JP7061375B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine provided with an effect control means capable of displaying a variable display game in which a first identification information, a second identification information, and a third identification information are variablely displayed on a display device.

Conventionally, there has been a gaming machine that variablely displays three types of identification information, that is, a first identification information, a second identification information, and a third identification information having the same configuration including a component indicating a character and a component indicating a number. (For example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2017-77362

However, in the conventional gaming machine, if the component indicating the character is enlarged in the three identification information in order to impress the character to the player, the three identification information occupies most of the display screen of the display device. There was a risk that other effects other than the variable display could not be displayed effectively. For this reason, there is a possibility that the interest of the game will be reduced in the conventional gaming machine.

An object of the present invention is to prevent a decrease in the interest of a game.

In a typical embodiment of the present invention, a gaming machine provided with an effect control means capable of displaying a variable display game in which a first identification information, a second identification information, and a third identification information are variablely displayed on a display device. In
The effect control means is
A first configuration mode in which each of the first identification information, the second identification information, and the third identification information is configured by including a predetermined component, and the first configuration mode. Can be displayed on the display device with the second configuration mode having a different configuration.
In the first section where at least the first identification information and the second identification information are being displayed in a variable manner in the variable display game, the display device is provided with the first identification information of the first configuration embodiment. In addition to displaying the second identification information of the first configuration embodiment, the first identification information and the second identification information in the section after the first section are temporarily stopped. In the second configuration mode , which is a configuration mode of the first identification information and the second identification information, which is displayed in the second section in which the third identification information is variablely displayed . The identification information of 3 can be displayed .

According to one embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view which looked at the gaming machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure which shows the structure of the collective display device. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the production control system of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of a main process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of a main process. It is a figure which shows the structure of the RAM of the game microcomputer of a game control device. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of output processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a winning opening switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a game state check process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the probability setting value change processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the probability setting value confirmation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure start port switch common processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure hold information determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big prize opening switch monitoring process. Special figure It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of ordinary processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 variation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 variation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit determination process. It is a figure which illustrates the jackpot probability and the small hit probability of a special figure variation display game for each setting (each setting value). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a figure which illustrates the jackpot symbol distribution (big hit breakdown) of a special figure variation display game for each setting. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure changing process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a symbol variation control process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a normal figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of ordinary processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the external information editing process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the external information editing process. It is a figure which shows the display example (the 1) of the batch display device during the probability setting change. It is a figure which shows the display example (the 2) of the batch display device during the probability setting change. It is a figure which shows the display example (the 3) of the batch display device during the probability setting change. It is a figure which shows the display example (the 4) of the batch display device during the probability setting change. It is a figure which shows the display example (the 5) of the batch display device during the probability setting change. It is a figure which shows the display example (the 6) of the batch display device during the probability setting change. It is a figure which shows the other configuration example of a batch display device. It is a figure which shows another configuration of a batch display device. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the received command check process. It is a flowchart which shows the received command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the one-shot system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead variable system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the design system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variable system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variation effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot system command processing. It is a figure which shows the state that the detachable part which concerns on 2nd Embodiment is attached to the gaming machine. It is a figure which shows schematic composition example of the game board and a part which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example of the game board and a part which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the parallel serial conversion part of the identification board which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 1st modification of the identification board (particularly the parallel serial conversion part) which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification of the identification board (particularly the parallel serial conversion part) which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 3rd modification of the identification substrate which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main processing of the effect control apparatus which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the parts collation processing which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. In the second embodiment, it is a figure which shows the reference table which associates a model designation command with a model identification information. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the transition state at the time of power-on (power restoration) of the gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the probability setting value change processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure at the time of receiving a set value which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the segment LED editing process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the display device at the time of setting change which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the 1st modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the 2nd modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode at the time of setting change of the state display device which concerns on the 2nd modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the 3rd modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the 4th modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting confirmation which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the display device at the time of setting confirmation which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting confirmation which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display screen of the display device at the time of setting confirmation which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the address of the input port in the game control apparatus which concerns on 4th Embodiment, and the signal input to each input port. It is a front view of the game board which concerns on 5th Embodiment. The figure which shows the relationship between the holding number and the occurrence probability of a setting suggestion effect (FIG. 75 (A)) which concerns on 5th Embodiment, and the relationship (FIG. 75 (B)) of the holding number, the set value and the lighting probability of red lighting. Is. The relationship between the error priority and the bit of the error code according to the sixth embodiment (FIG. 76 (A)), and the notation of the error code (binary) and the error code (hexadecimal) (FIG. 76 (B)). It is a figure which shows. In the display example of the error code and the error content according to the sixth embodiment, when there are two errors (left: binary notation, right: hexadecimal notation) (FIG. 77 (A)), one error is resolved. When this is done (FIG. 77 (B)), the case where all the errors are resolved (FIG. 77 (C)) is shown. An example of switching the display of the error content according to the sixth embodiment, in which the panel radio wave error is displayed as the initial state (FIG. 78 (A)), and the frame radio wave error is displayed by operating the operation unit once. (FIG. 78 (B)), and an example (FIG. 78 (C)) in which the operation unit is operated once to display a switch abnormality error are shown. It is a figure which shows the example which attached the detachable part which concerns on 7th Embodiment to a gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the example which displays the notification information which concerns on 7th Embodiment on the display device which is displaying the decoration special symbol of the special figure variation display game. It is a figure which shows the example which changes the display mode of the notification information which concerns on 7th Embodiment according to the operation of a movable body. It is a figure which shows the example of the case where the driving of the frame decoration device is prohibited in the parts collation process which concerns on 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the identification board of the part which concerns on 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the reference table (FIG. 84 (A)) which associates the model designation command and the model identification information which concerns on 7th Embodiment, and the reference table (FIG. 84 (B)) which shows the classification of a non-conforming model. It is a figure which shows the example of the case which changes the driving mode by classifying parts in the parts collation process which concerns on 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of the gaming board provided in the gaming machine which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the light guide plate control processing which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the movable body control process which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board at the time of the initial operation of the light guide plate which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board at the time of the initial operation of the internal accessory and the external accessory according to the eighth embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the initial operation control processing which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board at the time of executing the variable display game which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board when the reach effect is performed while executing the variable display game which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board when the reach effect is performed in the variable display game while executing the initial operation control process which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a modification of the front view of the game board when the reach effect is performed in the variable display game while the initial operation control process according to the eighth embodiment is being executed. This is the second modification of the front view of the game board when the reach effect is performed in the variable display game while the initial operation control process according to the eighth embodiment is being executed. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the display mode of the variation display game before and after the power failure recovery which concerns on 9th Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a display device when identification information is displayed in each display mode in the tenth embodiment. In the tenth embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order, and the screen transition of the entire game from the display result of the variable display game to the special result mode until the special game is started. This is an example. With respect to the eleventh embodiment, it is a figure which shows the composition mode and the variation mode of the decorative special symbol displayed on the display screen of a display device. With respect to the eleventh embodiment, it is a figure which shows the modification of the structural mode and the variation mode of the decorative special symbol displayed on the display screen of the display device. In the eleventh embodiment, it is a table referred to for setting the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decorative special symbol. In the eleventh embodiment, it is a modification of the table referred to for setting the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decorative special symbol. 11 is a screen transition diagram (first half) showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order with respect to the eleventh embodiment. 11 is a screen transition diagram (second half) showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order with respect to the eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main processing which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the hitting method notification processing which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the one-shot system command processing which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure at the time of receiving a striking instruction which concerns on a twelfth embodiment. 12 is a screen transition diagram (No. 1) illustrating the display screen of the display device in chronological order with respect to the twelfth embodiment. 12 is a screen transition diagram (No. 2) illustrating the display screen of the display device in chronological order with respect to the twelfth embodiment. 12 is a screen transition diagram (No. 3) illustrating the display screen of the display device in chronological order with respect to the twelfth embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the form of the image of the right-handed instruction display with respect to the thirteenth embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the color change in the right-handed instruction display with respect to the thirteenth embodiment. 13 is another diagram illustrating the color change inside the right-handed instruction display with respect to the thirteenth embodiment. 13 is a diagram showing an example in which colors are arranged so as to gradually and spatially change according to a hue circle in a right-handed instruction display with respect to the thirteenth embodiment. 13 is a screen transition diagram illustrating the movement of the right-handed instruction display on the display screen of the display device with respect to the thirteenth embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the addition of the effect image to the right-handed instruction display with respect to the thirteenth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the presence / absence of each parameter which defines and characterizes the effect mode of the notification effect with respect to the thirteenth embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example of the presence / absence of each parameter which defines and characterizes the effect mode of the notification effect with respect to the thirteenth embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram which shows the modification of the effect mode of the notification effect by right-handed instruction display with respect to the thirteenth embodiment. With respect to the thirteenth embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram which shows the effect mode of the notification effect by the left-handed instruction display.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the description of the gaming machine, the front, back, left, and right refer to the direction seen from the player during the game.

[Overall view of the gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

The gaming machine 10 includes an opening / closing frame that is rotatably attached to the frame 11 fixed to the island equipment via a hinge. The opening / closing frame is composed of a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game viewing area that makes the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 visible.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, by opening only the glass frame 15, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed. Further, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 7) arranged on the back surface side of the game board 30 can be accessed. Can be done.

Various frame constituent members are arranged on the edge portion around the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15.

In the upper center and the left side of the glass frame 15, a decorative device 1 capable of producing light emission according to the game state 1
8a and 18b are arranged. The decorative devices 18a and 18b accommodate lighting members such as LEDs inside, and perform a light emitting effect according to the gaming state. The lighting members arranged inside the decorative devices 18a and 18b form a part of the frame decorative device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper speaker 19a is arranged in the upper right corner portion and the upper left corner portion of the glass frame 15, respectively. Apart from these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided at the lower part of the gaming machine 10. The lower speaker 19b is arranged in the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a protruding effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and projects forward (on the player side) is arranged. Protruding production unit 1
Reference numeral 3 is an effect device that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the progress state of the game. Protruding production unit 13
The lighting member arranged inside the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4) also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18.

At the lower part of the glass frame 15, an upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to the ball launcher (not shown) one by one.

The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, a ball lending operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the game state. ..

The effect operation device is an operation device in which the touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25.
It is provided in the center of the upper part of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate it.

By operating the effect operation device by the player, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the special figure variation display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode) or execute a notice effect that announces the result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory in advance. It should be noted that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to a special figure variable display game.

Further, the effect pattern may be changed by the player operating the effect operation device not only during the execution of the variable display game but also during the non-execution.

The game state when the variable display game is executed is composed of a plurality of game states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. Further, the special gaming state is, for example, a time saving state as a specific gaming state, a state in which the probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, a big hit) is high (probability change state, probability fluctuation state), or a big hit state (big hit state) in a variable display game.
It is a special game state) and a small hit game state (small hit state).

Here, the probability change state (specific game state) continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), continues until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (number cut type, ST), and There are things that continue until a predetermined probability fall lottery is won (fall lottery type).

Further, it may be possible to always generate a probabilistic state when a big hit occurs, without determining whether or not to generate a probable change state by a big hit symbol random number, or to provide a winning device or the like provided with a specific area to specify. A probabilistic state may be generated when the game ball passes through the area.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated when the player rents a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device has a ball lending button 27 and a return button 28.
And the balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when renting a gaming ball, and the return button 28 is a button for ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. This is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area for displaying the balance of a prepaid card or the like.

The decoration device 22 houses a lighting member such as an LED inside, and is a device that performs light emission effect or the like according to a game state, and is provided on the front side portion of the upper plate unit. The lighting member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Below the glass frame 15 provided with the above-mentioned upper plate unit and the like, and below the front frame 12, an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of the ball launcher (not shown) and a game ball can be stored. A lower plate 23 is provided.

The operation handle 24 is located at the lower right of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball launcher launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 into the game area 32 of the game board 30. The rate of fire of the game ball launched from the ball launcher is set so as to increase as the amount of rotation of the operation handle 24 increases. That is, the ball launcher launches a game ball into the game area (speed).
The launch force can be changed in response to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game ball can be launched in various launch modes with different launch forces. The launch mode includes a left-handed hit (normal hit) in which the game ball is made to flow down on the left side of the game area 32, and a right-handed hit in which the game ball is made to flow down on the right side of the game area 32.

The lower plate 23 is arranged below the upper plate unit at a predetermined distance from the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball extraction hole 23a that penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23 in the vertical direction, and an opening / closing operation unit 23b for opening and closing the ball extraction hole 23a. When the player operates the opening / closing operation unit 23b to open the ball punching hole 23a, the game ball stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball pulling hole 23a.

[Game board]
Subsequently, the gaming board 30 of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 2A. FIG. 2A is a front view of the gaming board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 2A, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-shaped game board main body 30a that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the game board main body 30a is used.
A game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of a. The gaming machine 10 is configured to launch a gaming ball from a ball launching device into a gaming area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 to play a game. A windmill, an obstacle nail, or the like is disposed in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case (front component) 40 that forms a window portion that serves as a display area for a variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32. Behind the window formed in the center case 40, an effect display device (variable display device) that variablely displays (variablely displays) a plurality of identification information.
Display device 41 is arranged. The display device 41 is provided with, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that the display content can be visually recognized from the front side of the game board 30 via the window portion of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to the one provided with a liquid crystal display, and may be provided with a display such as an EL or a CRT.

A plurality of variable display areas are provided on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, and identification information (special symbol) and a character that directs a variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. In addition, images based on the progress of the game (big hit display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

Further, in the center case 40, a game ball flowing down the game area 32 is placed in the center case 40.
The inflow port 40a to the warp passage 40e for guiding to the inside of the warp passage 40e, and the stage portion 40b on which the game ball passing through the warp passage 40e can roll are provided. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37,
The game ball rolled on the stage portion 40b can easily win a prize in the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37.

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper portion and the right side portion of the center case 40, respectively. Upper effect unit 40c and side effect unit 40d
Consists of a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

A normal symbol start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. Inside the normal drawing start gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided. When the game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the normal map start gate 34, the normal map variation display game is executed.

A general winning opening 35 is arranged in the game area 32 on the lower left of the center case 40, and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the game area 32 on the lower right of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball to these general winning openings 35 is performed by the winning opening switch (SW) provided in the general winning opening 35.
) 35a-35n (see FIG. 3).

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a start winning opening (first starting winning area) 36 that gives a start condition for the special figure variation display game is provided, and a second starting winning opening (second) is directly below the start winning opening (first starting winning area) 36. A normal variable winning device 37 provided with a starting winning area) is provided. The normal variable winning device 37 includes a movable member (movable piece) 37b that converts the game ball into a state in which it is easy to flow in by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball cannot win the normal variable winning device 37. When the game ball wins the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, the special figure variable display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

The movable member 37b is a so-called tongue-shaped ordinary electric accessory, and rotates via the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode. It opens and changes to an open state (a state in which the game is easy to win, which is advantageous for the player), in which the game ball easily flows into the normally variable winning device 37.

The movable member 37b is controlled by the game control device 100, which will be described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of a winning easy state by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game and setting the winning probability of the normal map fluctuation display game to a higher probability than usual, or a normal game state. By making the time for which the easy-to-win state occurs longer than the easy-to-win state that occurs in the above-mentioned specific game state, a time-saving state (general electric support state) is generated. In addition, the probable change state (
Even in the latent probability change state), the time saving state (Public electricity support state) occurs in duplicate.

In the game area 32 at the lower right of the normal variable winning device 37, the large winning opening solenoid (39b) (
A special variable winning device 39 having an attacker-type opening / closing door 39c that opens the large winning opening by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side is provided. The special variable prize device 39 converts the large prize opening from the closed state (closed state unfavorable to the player) to the open state (special game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and wins a large prize. By facilitating the inflow of game balls into the mouth, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. A count switch 39a (see FIG. 3) is provided in the large winning opening as a detection means for detecting the game ball in the large winning opening. In addition, the large winning opening is illuminated in the large winning opening of the special variable winning device 39 and in the vicinity of the large winning opening (around the large winning opening).
One or more large winning opening LEDs 39d (full color LED) are arranged.

General winning opening 35, starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, and special variable winning device 39
When a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) discharges a number of prize balls according to the type of the winning winning opening from the payout device to the upper plate 21. In addition, the normal variable winning device 3
In the game area 32 below 7, the out opening 30 for collecting the game balls that did not win in the winning opening or the like
b is provided.

Further, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal map variation display game are executed in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a outside the game area 32. The batch display device 50 is provided. The batch display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 that display information such as the current gaming state (see FIG. 2B).

FIG. 2B is a diagram showing the configuration of the batch display device 50. The batch display device 50 is a first special figure variation display unit 5 for a variation display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like.
1 (Special Figure 1 Display, Lamp D1) and 2nd Special Figure Fluctuation Display 52 (Special Figure 2 Display, Lamp D)
2) and the fluctuation display unit 53 for the normal map fluctuation display game (normal map display, lamps D8, D10, D)
18) and a storage display unit (special figure 1 hold display 54, special figure 2 hold display 55, normal figure hold display 56) for starting (holding) storage number notification of each variation display game. ing. Special figure 1 The hold indicator 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12. The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 is the lamp D.
It is composed of 13 and D14. The normal figure hold indicator 56 is composed of lamps D15 and D16.

Further, the batch display device 50 is informed that it is a right-handed hit (when it should be right-handed) or a left-handed time (normal hitting time), and the first game state display unit 57 (first game state display, lamp). D7),
When the power of the second game state display unit 58 (second game state display, lamp D17), which lights up when a time reduction state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the time reduction state, and the game machine 10 is turned on, the probability state of a big hit becomes a high probability state. The third game status display unit 59 (third game status display, probability status display unit, lamp D9) that displays the fact that the game is being played, and the round display that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times the special variable winning device 39 is opened and closed). A unit 60 (lamps D3-D6) is provided.

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the variable display game is executed by the variable display in which the identification information (for example, the central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (blinking). The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are not limited to such a segment type display unit.
It may be composed of an aggregate of a plurality of LEDs, and when a variable display is executed, all the LEDs provided as a display are turned on and off (all LEDs are blinking at the same time) or circulated on (any one of them). It may be turned on and off in a predetermined order from one LED at predetermined time intervals), or may be turned on and off (blinking) or circulated by a predetermined number of LEDs among a plurality of LEDs. Also in the normal figure display 53, the variable display game is executed by the variable display (blinking) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. In addition, the normal figure display 53 is also a special figure 1 display 5
1. It can be appropriately configured in the same manner as the special figure 2 display 52.

The lamp display device 80 includes lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) that execute variable display (blinking) that repeats lighting display and extinguishing display as a symbol (fourth special symbol described later), and start of each special symbol variation display game. (Holding) It has a lamp display unit 3-6 (LED) for notifying the number of stored items. The lamp display device 80 is controlled by the effect control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 1 and 2 blink at a predetermined blinking cycle (for example, 200 msec (millisecond)) as a fluctuation display. While the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the normal figure display 53 of the batch display device 50 is measured by the game control device 100, the lamp of the lamp display device 80 The fluctuation time of the display units 1 and 2 is measured by the effect control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 3 and 4 (special figure 1 hold LED 1, special figure 1 hold LED 2) display the number of special figure 1 hold (first start storage number) depending on the combination of the off state, the on state, and the blinking state. Similarly, the lamp display units 5 and 6 (special figure 2 hold LED 1, special figure 2 hold LED 2) display the special figure 2 hold number (second start storage number) depending on the combination of the off state, the on state, and the blinking state. do. The lamp display unit 3-6 ends the display of the number of holds due to the occurrence of a big hit, but displays the number of holds except when the display device 41 is in the state of a big hit (including the case where the reach described later occurs in the display device 41). conduct.

Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, the normal map variation display game, and the special map variation display game will be described in detail.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a gaming ball from a ball launching device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal drawing start gate 34, the general winning opening 35, and the starting winning opening. 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 39 is won, or the ball flows into the out port 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when a game ball wins a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36, a normal variable winning device 37, or a special variable winning device 39, a number of winning balls corresponding to the types of winning winning openings are distributed via the payout device. It is discharged to the upper plate 21.

The normal figure start gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal figure start gate 34. When the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the normal map variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the hit determination random number value extracted at this time.

When the normal map fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal map fluctuation display game has already been played and the normal map fluctuation display game has not ended, or when the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is a hit, it is normal. When the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34 when the variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, the storage number is added (+1) if the normal drawing start storage number is less than the upper limit number.

The hit determination random value for determining the hit / miss of the normal map variation display game is stored in the normal map start memory, and when the hit judgment random value matches the judgment value, the normal map variation display is performed. The game is a hit and a specific result mode (specific result) is derived.

The normal map fluctuation display game is executed by the normal map display 53 provided in the batch display device 50. The normal identification information 53 is composed of LEDs that indicate a hit when the normal identification information (normal figure) is lit and a deviation when the normal identification information (normal figure) is off, and the normal identification information fluctuates by blinking the LED. The display is performed, and after a predetermined fluctuation display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

When the normal figure random value extracted when passing through the normal figure start gate 34 is a hit value, the normal symbol displayed on the normal figure display 53 stops in the hit state and becomes the hit state. At this time, by driving the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), the movable member 37b is converted into an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 is converted into an open state. Winning is allowed.

The winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).
The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game.
The game ball won in the normal variable winning device 37 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game, and is stored up to the predetermined upper limit number.

When the start winning ball of the special figure variation display game is detected, the jackpot random number value, the jackpot symbol random value, each variation pattern random value, and the like are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control device 100 as the special figure start winning memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, up to 8 times). The stored number of the special figure start prize memory is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 and the special figure 2 hold display 55 for notifying the start prize number of the batch display device 50, and the display device 4
It is also displayed on the display screen of 1.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning to the start winning opening 36 or the first start memory. Further, the game control device 100 is a special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 or the second start memory.
Run a variable display game.

The special figure 1 variable display game (1st special figure variable display game) and the special figure 2 variable display game (2nd special figure variable display game) have identification information (identification information) on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. This is performed by displaying the special symbol (special symbol) in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the predetermined result mode. also,
In the display device 41, a decorative special figure variation display game for variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) corresponding to each special figure variation display game is executed.

In the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numbers and the like is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and middle (third special symbol). ) Is started, and the fluctuating symbols are sequentially stopped after a predetermined time, and the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is displayed. Further, on the display device 41, various effects such as the appearance of characters are displayed in order to improve the interest. Further, in the decorative special symbol variation display game, as another decorative special symbol (identification information), the fourth special symbol is displayed by repeating (blinking) the lighting display and the extinguishing display on the lamp display units 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80. fluctuate. The fluctuation display of the lamp display units 1 and 2 is stopped by "turning off" in the case of a miss and "lighting" in the case of a big hit or a small hit after a predetermined time from the start.

When the game ball is won in the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is the big hit value), as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game. A specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the displayed symbol, and the jackpot state (
It becomes a special game state). Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned).

At this time, the special variable winning device 39 is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) by energizing the large winning opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3). That is, the large winning opening provided in the special variable winning device 39 opens wide until a predetermined time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, during which the player is given the privilege of being able to acquire many game balls. To.

When the game ball is won in the first start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is the small hit value), the special figure variation display game. As a result of the above, a specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the displayed symbol, and a small hit state is obtained. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a small hit result mode. In the present embodiment, the big hit random value is also used for the small hit determination, but the small hit value (small hit determination value) is different from the big hit value (big hit determination value).

At this time, the special variable winning device 39 is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short time by energizing the large winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3). Since the full opening time of the big winning opening is shorter in the small hit state (small hit game state) than in the big hit state (special game state), the game that the player can acquire in the small hit state than in the big hit state. Value (number of balls acquired)
Less is. In both the small hit state and the big hit state, the big winning opening is open, but the big hit state may be referred to as the first special gaming state, and the small hit state may be referred to as the second special gaming state.

Here, the difference between a big hit and a small hit will be described.

A big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device, and a small hit is a specific result without the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 39 is set. The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set as in the case of winning a small hit lottery, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has the meaning of.

Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special variable winning device is opened by setting the big hit flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, the special variable winning device is set by setting the small hit flag. Is released.

The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be configured as separate displays or the same display, but the special figure variation display games are not executed at the same time. Is set.

Regarding the decorative special figure variable display game in the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed in different display devices or different display areas, or the same display may be executed. It may be executed in the device or the display area. In this case, the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is prevented from being executed at the same time. The special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game, and there is a memory of starting the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. When the figure variation display game can be executed, the special figure 2 variation display game is executed.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game.

Further, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36 in the starting winning opening 36 is not particularly limited.
a, The start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the count switch (39a) in the normal variable winning device 37 are provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and the magnetic field changes when a metal is close to the coil. A non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by utilizing a phenomenon is used. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 or the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 or the like is a machine. Microswitches with similar contacts can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the game control system of the game machine 10. The game machine 10 is a game control device 10.
The game control device 100 is provided with 0 (main board), and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls the game, and is a CPU unit having a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It includes a 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting between the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

The CPU unit 110 is a gaming microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
It has a U) 111, an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that generates an operating clock of a CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. The electronic components such as the game control device 100 and the solenoid and the motor driven by the game control device 100 include DC32V, DC12V, and DC5 generated by the power supply device 400.
A predetermined level of DC voltage such as V is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 having an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from the DC32V voltage. , Game microcomputer 11
A backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of 1 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure. The control signal generation unit 430 and the like are provided.

In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100,
The backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 may be configured to be provided on a separate board or integrally with the game control device 100, that is, on the main board. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 43 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the embodiment.
By setting 0, it is possible to exclude from the target of exchange and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 (
In particular, the data supplied to the built-in RAM) and stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 (main board) responds to the setting key switch 93 that makes it possible to change the set value related to the game condition (game) by turning it on by the rotation operation of the operator or the like, and the operation of the operator. Setting value change switch 102 that can change the setting value related to the game conditions
And prepare. In the present embodiment, the set value related to the game condition (game) is the probability set value of the jackpot probability, but other game conditions other than the jackpot probability (small hit probability, probability variation inrush rate, etc.) are also according to the probability set value. It can be changed. The setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are
A setting changing means (setting changing device 42) capable of changing the setting (setting value) related to the game condition is configured. In the present embodiment, the touch switch signal of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 is used as the confirmation signal for confirming the set value, but the operationable confirmation button switch (operation means, operation unit) is used. The signal from the confirmation button switch may be provided in the game control device 100 and used as a confirmation signal for confirming the set value.

The setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are provided on the game control device 100 inside the game machine 10 so that the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are arranged at a position (inaccessible position) that cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. Will be done. That is, a general player cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102. In the present embodiment, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are provided so as to be assembled on the game control device 100, but the front frame 1 such as on the power supply board of the power supply device 400 is provided.
2 (main body frame) may be provided in a position that cannot be accessed unless it is opened.

When the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened and the setting key switch 9 is used.
When 3 is on, the operator can change the setting value switch 102 (setting value change button).
By operating, it is possible to change the settings (set values) related to the game conditions such as the probability of a big hit and the probability variation inrush rate. That is, when the power is turned on, the state in which the front frame 12 is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on is a setting variable state in which the setting (setting value) can be changed. In a normal procedure, when the operator opens the front frame 12 and rotates the setting key switch 93 to turn it on and turn on the power, the setting variable state corresponding to the state during the setting change is reached. The variable setting state may be notified by voice from the speaker. When the power is turned on, the state in which the glass frame 15 is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on may be set as a variable setting state, or both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on. The state may be set to a variable state.

In the present embodiment, the setting values related to the game conditions are defined in 6 stages, and the setting value 1 (setting 1), the setting value 2 (setting 2), the setting value 3 (setting 3), the setting value 4 (setting 4), There are a setting value 5 (setting 5) and a setting value 6 (setting 6). The setting value 1 is the most disadvantageous setting for the player, and the setting value 6
Is the most advantageous setting for the player. The setting values 1 and 2 are low settings, the setting values 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and the setting values 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the setting value change process, the setting value change switch 102 (setting value change button) is used by the operator.
Each time is operated, the setting value (setting) is set as setting value 1 → setting value 2 → setting value 3 → setting value 4 → setting value 5 → setting value 6 → setting value 1 → setting value 2 → ... Change to and select. Instead of operating the setting value change button, the setting key switch 93 may be rotated to a predetermined position to change the setting value. Moreover, the set value is not limited to 6 steps. Then, the selected set values 1 to 6 are displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 or the like, which is a 7-segment type display. The probability set value display device 143 has a set value change switch 102 via an electric circuit.
The display may be changed in conjunction with the operation of. As will be described later, the set values 1 to 6 selected are displayed on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and / or the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 for the variation display game of the batch display device 50. May be good.

When the operator touches the operation handle 24, the touch switch signal is transmitted to the game control device 1.
When it is input to 00, the selected (changed) set value (that is, the setting) is confirmed and stored in the probability set value area in the RWM (storage means), and the set value change process ends. Regardless of the touch switch signal, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off after the set value is changed or a predetermined time elapses after the setting is changed to the variable state, the game control device 100 determines the set value (that is, the setting) and stores it. It is also possible to configure it.

On the other hand, after the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened and the setting key switch 93 is rotated to change from the off state to the on state, the set value confirmation mode (setting confirmation state).
become. In the set value confirmation mode, the set value displayed on the probability set value display device 143 can be confirmed. The selected set values 1 to 6 may be displayed and confirmed on the first special figure variation display unit 51 and / or the second special figure variation display unit 52 for the variation display game of the batch display device 50. .. The set value confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) may be notified by voice from the speaker.

The setting value change switch 102 (setting value change button) is a RAM initialization switch (RA).
It can also be used as an M clear switch), and if the initialization switch is in the ON state when the power is turned on (power recovery), an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the gaming microcomputer 11
A process of forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111c in 1 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a.
, Read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b and RA that can be read and written at any time
It is provided with M (random access memory) 111c.

The ROM 111b non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111c is a work area of the CPU 111a and a storage area of various signals and random numbers during game control. It is used as. ROM111b or RAM11
As 1c, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start storage to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), which is a fluctuation pattern after the reach state, and fluctuations before the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. When the special result mode is adopted, the gaming state is advantageous for the player (special gaming state).
At the stage where some of the plurality of display results have not yet been derived and displayed in the gaming machine 10
A display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas of the display device. When the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle after display and the result mode is displayed, the left and right variable display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example). The state in which the variable display is stopped due to the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the conditions for the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas are satisfied (for example, the same identification information). (However, the special result mode is excluded) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from the reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as a system of reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode (big hit mode) is different (expected value is different), normal reach (normal reach)
N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected degree (expected value) of the jackpot increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach.
In addition, the reach state is at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variation display game (
It is included in the variable display mode in (when it becomes a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived (when it is out of order) in the special figure variable display game. Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is a state in which there is a high possibility that a big hit will occur as compared with the case where the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a big hit random number for determining a big hit in a special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining a big hit symbol, and a small hit for determining a small hit symbol. Random number generation circuit for generating variation pattern random numbers, etc. for determining variation patterns in symbol random numbers and special figure variation display games (including execution time of variation display games in various reach and variation display without reach) , Equipped with a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) for the CPU 111a based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit. ing.

Further, the CPU 111a is the ROM 111b in the process related to the special figure variation display game.
Acquire any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in. Specifically, the CPU 111a has a game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, a probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state, and a start storage number. Based on the above, one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. Here, CPU 11
1a serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize ball. Control to pay out.
Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit 600, and controls for paying out the lending ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (panel radio wave sensor) for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a gate switch 34a of the normal starting gate 34, and a starting port 1 in the first starting winning opening 36. Switch 36a, starting port 2 in the second starting winning opening 37 switch 37a
, Connected to the winning opening switch 35a, the large winning opening switch 39a of the special variable winning device 39,
An interface chip (proximity I) that inputs a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches and converts it into a 0V-5V positive logic signal.
/ F) 121 is provided.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Proximity I / F1
Of the outputs of 21, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 39a are the third input port 1.
It is input to 24.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

Further, the second input port 123 has a detection signal of a magnetic sensor switch 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10, and a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10. A signal is input from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) provided on the switch 63, the front frame 12 (main body frame), and the like. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine so that the detection signal is input to the second input port 123.

Further, the second input port 123 (input port 3) takes in the setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch signal from the setting value change switch 102, and is a gaming microcomputer via the data bus 140. Supply to 111.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to the test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the third input port 124 is an enable signal CE by decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124 by the gaming microcomputer 111.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changing to a valid level). The same applies to the second input port 123 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 indicates a frame radio wave illegal signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow. The game microcomputer 1 takes in the overflow switch signal, the touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, and the out ball detection switch signal from the out ball detection switch via the data bus 140.
A first input port 122 for supplying to 11 is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored (full) in the lower plate 23. The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame) detecting the radio wave, and the payout busy signal is in a state where the payout control device 200 can accept a command. It is a signal indicating whether or not. In this embodiment
The out-ball detection switch (not shown) detects all game balls that have been fired into the game area and have finished the game. The out ball detection switch (not shown) may detect only the game ball passing through the out port 30b.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from.
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122, and is taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111, and is also output to the output unit 13.
It is supplied to each port of 0. Further, the reset signal RST is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130 to turn off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing test device. It is configured as follows.

Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is used for each port 122, 123 of the input unit 120.
, 124 is not supplied. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged in a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like are transmitted via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine controls the game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be obtained.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not go through the buffer, and the like. There is. The port on the relay board 70 has a game microcomputer 11
The chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with open / close data of a solenoid (general electric solenoid) 37c connected to the data bus 140 to open the normal variable winning device 37 and a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 39b to open the special variable winning device 39. A second output port 134 for output is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. On / on the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of
A fourth output port 136 for outputting off-data is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with information related to the gaming machine 10, such as jackpot information, to the external information terminal 71.
A fifth output port 137 for outputting to is provided. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and information about the game machine 10 can be externally transmitted. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a sixth output port 141 (probability set value display output port) for outputting information on the set value (probability set value) to the probability set value display device 143.
In the present embodiment, the probability set value display device 143 is a 7-segment type display (LED lamp), but the information of the set value (probability set value) is transmitted from the sixth output port 141 to the driver (
It may be output to the probability setting value display device 143 via the LED driver).

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the normal electric solenoid 37 output from the second output port 134.
The current supply side segment of the batch display device 50 output from the first driver (drive circuit) 138a and the third output port 135 that receive the open / close data signal of c and the large winning opening solenoid 39b and generate and output the solenoid drive signal. Second driver 1 that outputs a line on / off drive signal
38b, the third driver 138c that outputs the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current draw side of the batch display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136, and the fifth output port 137 supply to an external device such as a management device. A fourth driver 138d is provided to output the external information signal to be output to the external information terminal 71.

A DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. In addition, the batch display device 50
DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the above. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a current is passed through the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and a current is drawn from the cathode terminal via the segment wire by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in, and the LEDs are turned on. Fourth to output an external information signal to the external information terminal 71
The driver 138d supplies a level of 12V to the external information signal, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 250. Photocoupler 13
Reference numeral 9 is configured so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can communicate with the inspection device 250 by serial communication. Since the transmission / reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Further, the output unit 130 receives a serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code (character code), etc.) output from the second output port 134, and a driver 150 that drives the status display device 152. It is provided. In the present embodiment, the status display device 152 is composed of a plurality of (4) 7-segment type (8-segment type including the point portion) display (LED lamp), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. It is not limited to.

Although the status display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board),
It may be installed in another place. For example, the status display device 152 is a 4-digit 7-segment type (
It is an 8-segment type display including the dot part), and can display the accessory ratio, the ball ejection rate, and the number of ejected balls. The status display device 152 is not limited to directly displaying the bonus ball ratio, the payout rate, and the number of ejected balls, but may also indirectly display the number of ejected balls, the payout rate, and the bonus ball ratio. good.
That is, the state display device 152 only needs to be able to display information on the accessory ratio, the ball ejection rate, and the number of ejected balls.

Here, the number of ejected balls is the number of gaming balls ejected from the gaming area 32 (also referred to as the number of out balls).
It is the total of the number of game balls that have passed through the winning opening (the number of winnings) and the number of game balls that have passed through the out opening 30b. The number of ejected balls is basically the same as the number of launched balls, which is the number of game balls launched from the ball launching device into the game area 32. The number of ejected balls can be obtained by counting the signal of the out ball detection switch. In the present embodiment, the winning opening is the general winning opening 35,
The starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2), and the special variable winning opening 39 (large winning opening) are included. The number of ejected balls is displayed as a countdown, (100-number of ejected balls) is displayed, and only 100 (predetermined number) are counted. The number of ejected balls may be counted up and displayed from "00" to "99".

The ball ejection rate is the ratio (ratio) of the total number of prize balls to the number of ejected balls (or the number of launched balls), and (
It is calculated by multiplying the number of acquired balls by the number of ejected balls (%). That is, the payout rate is the number of acquired balls (total number of prize balls) per 100 ejected balls.

In this embodiment, the ball ejection rate is simply obtained from the number of acquired balls between 0 and 100 each time the number of ejected balls reaches 100. That is, the number of ejected balls is counted only up to 100 (predetermined number). In addition, every time the number of ejected balls reaches 100 (predetermined number), the payout rate is updated to the latest payout rate until the number of ejected balls changes from 1 to 100. As a result, if the number of acquired balls (total number of prize balls) is displayed as it is on the status display device 152, the payout rate will be displayed.

For example, the bonus ratio is in the jackpot state among the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by winning a prize in the winning opening during a predetermined period (for example, from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present). It is the ratio (%) (= so-called continuous prize ratio) of the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired by the character) obtained by winning the big prize opening. In addition, the prize ratio may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (during the big hit state and the small hit state) obtained by winning the big prize opening (= big prize opening ratio) among the total number of prize balls. Or, the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in the large winning opening and the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening) (= the so-called bonus ratio (total bonus ratio) commonly used. )) May be used.

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 4
Is a block diagram of the effect control system of the gaming machine 10.

The effect control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC) similar to the gaming microcomputer 111.
), And VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying video on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. It is equipped with a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speaker 19.

The main control microcomputer 311 is a P that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
Program ROM 321 consisting of ROM (programmable read-only memory), RAM 322 that provides a work area, Fe that can retain stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure.
A RAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect content, instructs the VDP 312 of the output video content, and outputs the sound source LSI 314.
It executes processing such as instructing the playback sound to, lighting the decorative lamp, driving control of the motor and solenoid, and managing the production time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30 from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311.
C, a synchronization signal STS that gives the data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
Waits to notify the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal sync signal HSYNC, and a vertical sync signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A sound ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and is generated by the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Command I / F3
The decorative special figure hold number command, the decorative special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via the 31 are received as the effect control command signal (effect command). .. The game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 is DC5.
Since the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at V and operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 and a glass frame 15 for driving and controlling a panel decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). Frame decoration LED control circuit 333, game board 3 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an provided LED (light emitting diode).
Board effect device 44 (for example, display device 41) provided in 0 (including the center case 40)
A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control a movable accessory (such as a movable accessory) that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display in the above. The panel decoration device 46 includes the lamp display device 8 described above.
0 may be included.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. It should be noted that a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided on the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor in the board effect device 44. A function to detect the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) that detects the initial position and input a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and a volume control switch provided in the effect control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 that detects the state of the 335 and inputs the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration.
DC32V for driving a motor or solenoid, a display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving a motor or LED, in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the electronic components controlled by the motor. DC5 which is the power supply voltage of command I / F331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC15V for driving a motor, LED, and speaker.

Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, the DC- is used to generate DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. In addition, DC-
The DC converter may be usually provided in the power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, VDP312 (VDPREST signal) and sound source LSI314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
, The amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control the lamp, the motor, and the like are supplied to reset the state. Further, the effect control device 300 has a cooling FA that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10.
When the N45 is connected and the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on, the cooling FAN45 is driven.

Next, the game control performed in these control circuits will be described. Game control device 1
In the CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of 00, a random value for hit determination in the normal figure is extracted and stored in the ROM 111b based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34. The hit / miss of the normal map fluctuation display game is judged by comparing with the judgment value.

Then, after displaying the identification symbol variable for a predetermined time on the normal map display, a normal map variable display game for stopping and displaying is displayed. When the result of the normal fluctuation display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the normal figure display, the normal electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is operated for a predetermined time (for example,). (0.3 seconds) Control to open as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is out of sync, the normal map display is controlled to display the result mode of the out of alignment.

Further, the start winning prize (starting memory) is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, and the jackpot determination of the special figure 1 variation display game is made based on the starting memory. The random value for use is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b, and the hit / miss of the special figure 1 variation display game is determined.

Further, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, and the random value for jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variable display game is stored based on the start memory. Is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b, and the hit / miss of the special figure 2 variation display game is determined.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, the special figure variation display game in which the identification symbol is variablely displayed for a predetermined time and then stopped and displayed is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) of the game ball flowing down the game area 32. Make an eggplant.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling light emission of various LEDs based on the control signal from the game control device 100.
That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a hit, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and generates a special game state. Let me. In the process of generating the special gaming state, the CPU 111a
For example, the opening / closing door 39c of the special variable winning device 39 is opened by the large winning opening solenoid 39b, and control is performed so that the game ball can flow into the large winning opening.

Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the big winning opening, or a predetermined opening time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the big winning opening. One round (R) is to open the big winning opening until the above condition is achieved, and this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 times, 11 times or 2 times) control (cycle game). I do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (probability change state) is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that of the normal probability state. Further, regardless of which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game results in a high probability state, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game Both are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 are controlled to be in the normal fluctuation operating state, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is controlled as compared with the case where the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the normal operating state. Since the opening time is controlled to be substantially longer, the normal electric support state is set. In addition, even in the high probability state (normal probability change state) excluding the latent probability change state, the time saving state is duplicated and the Fuden support is executed.

For example, in the time saving state, the execution time of the above-mentioned normal map fluctuation display game (normal map fluctuation time)
Is possible to shorten the time to make the second variation display time shorter than the normal first variation display time (for example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). In the time-reduced state, the execution time of the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation time) is also shorter than usual, and the time reduction variation of the special figure fluctuation display game is also executed.

In addition, in the time saving state, the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is set to the first.
Second stop time (eg 704 msec) shorter than stop time (eg 1604 msec)
It is possible to control so as to be.

Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is the first opening time (for example, 100 msec) in the normal state. It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer (for example, 1352 msec).

Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is larger than the number of times the first opening time (for example, 2 times) is obtained with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number (for example, 4 times). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to set the probability (normal probability) of the hit result of the normal map fluctuation display game to be higher than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operating state.

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the normal power probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. As a result, in the time saving state, the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 becomes easier than in the normal gaming state, and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game per unit time can be increased as compared with the normal gaming state. It is also possible to set multiple types of time saving states that change different things. Further, in the normal operating state, the movable member 3
It may be set so that 7b is not released (probability of normal drawing is 0). Further, in the case of a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high-probability state and the time-saving state can be generated independently, and both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main process will be described. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the main processing by the game control device 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the game control device 100, the code (number) of the step is represented as "A ***".

As shown in FIG. 5A, when the game control device 100 starts the main process, it first executes a process of disabling interrupts (A1001). Further, the stack pointer setting process for setting the stack pointer, which is the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs, is executed (A1002).

Subsequently, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to the prohibited state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to the prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the state of the input port 3 (second input port 123) (A1006). As a result, the setting key switch 93,
Set value change switch 102, glass frame open detection switch 63, front frame open detection switch 6
The signal from 4 (main body frame opening detection switch) can be read.

Further, the game control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). A game control device 1 that serves as a main control means by setting a predetermined initial value in the power delay timer.
Waiting time (for example, 3) for waiting until the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to the instructions from 00 starts normally.
Seconds) is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can prevent the command from being missed. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and delays the activation of the slave control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 3).
It is a waiting means for setting a predetermined waiting time for waiting for the activation of (00, etc.).

Further, the timekeeping of the power delay timer is performed using a storage area (RAM area or register, etc. that is not subject to validity determination) that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). As a result, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, a part of R
Since it is not necessary to exclude the AM area for calculation, it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

The setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch signal from the setting value change switch 102 are input to the second input port 123 (input port 3), and the standby time By reading the state of the second input port 123 before the start of, the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 can be reliably detected. That is, if the state of the setting key switch 93 or the setting value change switch 102 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the setting key switch 93 or the setting value change switch 102 can be operated or the power is turned on after the standby time has elapsed. It is necessary to continue to operate the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 until the elapse of the standby time. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such annoying operation, and the setting key switch 93 performed at the time of turning on the power. And the situation where the operation of the setting value change switch 102 is not accepted can be prevented.

When the power delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes time counting of the standby time and a process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A).
1012).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first reads the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus and checks the number of times (
(For example, twice) is set (A1008), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (A1).
009).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on, the game control device 100 (the result of A1009 is "Y".
”), It is determined whether or not the on state of the power failure monitoring signal is continued for the number of checks set in the process of step A1008 (A1010). Then, if the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is "N"), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not the power failure monitoring signal in step A1009 is on.

Further, when the game control device 100 determines that the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is "Y"), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game control device 100 is a game machine. Wait until the power is turned off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the start of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the power failure monitoring signal is not turned on (the result of A1009 is ".
N "), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (A1011), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer is 0 (A1012). If the value of the timer is not 0 (the result of A1012 is "N"), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal in step A1008.

Further, in the game control device 100, when the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1012 is "Y"".
), That is, when the standby time has expired, access to RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM and EEPROM that can be read and written is permitted (A1013), and off-data is output to all output ports (state where there is no output). (A1014).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port previously mounted on the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in the present embodiment) (A1015). ). Further, the driver 15 for driving the status display device 152
Initially set to 0 (A1016).

Here, the game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the contents of the initial setting to the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits the command to the driver 150. For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in the initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED of the status display device 152. The control data corresponding to the duty ratio is used in the duty setting unit of the driver 150 (LED driver). In order to save power and darken each LED, the duty ratio of the driver 150 may be made smaller than usual. Next, the game control device 100 sets the number of digits used in the status display device 152 in the initial setting. In this embodiment, the number of digits used is four. The control data corresponding to the number of digits used is used in the digit number setting unit of the driver 150 (LED driver).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017). And if it is normal (A101
7), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data (A1018).

Further, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1018 is “Y”), the game control device 100 calculates a checksum of a predetermined area (for example, a game control work area) in the RWM. The calculation process is executed (A1019), and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum and the checksum when the power is turned off match (A1020). If the checksums match (the result of A1020 is "Y"), the RAM 111c is normal, and the RAM clear start address 2 is set (A1021).

FIG. 5C is a diagram showing a configuration of RAM 111c of the gaming microcomputer 111. As shown in FIG. 5C, the RAM clear start address 2 is set so as to exclude the probability set value area from the RAM area to be cleared. Due to the RAM clear start address 2, the RAM area to be cleared becomes the clear area # 2 in FIG. 5C. The clear area # 2 includes a random number area, a control information area, and a game control stack area. The random number area is an initial value random number area that stores various initial value random numbers, and an initial value random number area.
A variation pattern random number area for storing the variation pattern random number is included. The control information area is an area from the power failure inspection area 1 to the checksum area, and includes the power failure inspection area 1, the power failure inspection area 2, the checksum area, and the like. The random number area may be excluded from the clear area # 2. The clear area # 2 includes a status display work area for storing information to be displayed on the status display device 152 such as the accessory ratio, and a status display stack area for processing the information to be displayed on the status display device 152. I can't.

In FIG. 5C, an unused area may be provided between the game control work area and the game control stack area, which are composed of a probability set value area, a random number area, and a control information area. Further, an unused area may be provided between the status display work area and the status display stack area. also,
The status display stack area may be arranged at the end of the address of the RAM 111c, and the unused area at the end of FIG. 5C (the bottom of FIG. 5C) may be eliminated.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting is being changed (during the setting variable state or the setting changing state) (A1022). When the probability setting is being changed (the result of A1022 is “Y”), the game control device 100 executes the process during the probability setting change in steps A1036-A1041. When the probability setting value changing flag (A1038) is set, it can be determined that the probability setting is being changed.

When the game control device 100 is not changing the probability setting (the result of A1022 is "N"),
It is determined whether or not the front frame 12 (main body frame) is in the open state (A1023). When the signal from the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) is input, the front frame 1
It can be determined that 2 (main body frame) is in the open state. In step A1023, the front frame 1
Instead of 2, it may be determined whether or not the glass frame 15 is in the open state, or it may be determined whether or not both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are in the open state. When the signal from the glass frame open detection switch 63 is input, it can be determined that the glass frame 15 is in the open state.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is in the open state (the result of A1023 is “Y”) (A1024).
When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1024 is "Y"), the setting (setting value) can be changed. Therefore, the RAM is initially set in the variable setting state of step A1036-A1041. Formatting process (RAM clear process) and process during setting change are executed.

In the game control device 100, when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is not in the open state (in the closed state).
(The result of A1023 is "N"), or when the setting key switch 93 is off (A102).
The result of 4 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the set value change switch 102 is turned on (A1).
025). When the setting value change switch 102 is not turned on (the result of A1025 is "N".
”), The normal power-on (power-recovery) process of steps A1031-A1035 is executed.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the set value change switch 102 is turned on (A1).
The result of 025 is "Y"), and the process of RAM initialization (RAM clear) in steps A1042-A1045 is executed. Here, since the setting value change switch 102 is operated (pressed) and turned on when the power is turned on in the off state of the setting key switch 93, the setting value change switch 102 is a RAM initialization switch (). It will be used as a RAM clear switch). It should be noted that there is actually no situation in which the set value change switch 102 is turned on when the front frame 12 is in the closed state (the result of A1023 is “N”). The setting value change switch 102, which can also function as an initialization switch, serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and is a game control device 100.
However, it serves as an initialization means for initializing the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit.

Further, when the game control device 100 determines that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1017 is "N" or the result of A1018 is "N"), the checksums do not match. (The result of A1020 is "N"), the abnormality of the RAM 111c has occurred, and the process proceeds to the process of coping with the RAM abnormality after step A1026. First, R
AM clear start address 1 is set (A1026). As shown in FIG. 5C, since the RAM clear start address 1 is the start address of the game control work area, the probability set value area is also included in the RAM area to be cleared. R to be cleared by RAM clear start address 1
The AM area is set in the clear area # 1 of FIG. 5C. The clear area # 1 includes a game control work area (composed of a probability setting value area, a random number area, and a control information area), and a game control stack area. The clear area # 1 does not include a status display work area for storing information to be displayed on the status display device 152 and a status display stack area for processing information to be displayed on the status display device 152.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the front frame 12 (main body frame) is in the open state (A1027). When the signal from the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) is input, it can be determined that the front frame 12 is in the open state.

In the game control device 100, when the front frame 12 is in the open state (the result of A1027 is "Y".
”), It is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is ON (A1028). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1028 is "Y"), the setting value can be changed. Therefore, the RAM in the setting variable state of step A1036-A1041.
The initialization process (RAM clear process) and the process during setting change are executed. RA in this case
The RAM area to be cleared in the M initialization process is the clear area # 1 in FIG. 5C. Therefore,
RAM abnormality can be resolved.

In the game control device 100, when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is not in the open state (in the closed state).
(The result of A1027 is "N"), or when the setting key switch 93 is off (A102).
The result of 8 is "N"), and a command for instructing the player to change the setting is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1029). The effect control device 300 that has received the command of the setting change instruction displays the setting change instruction display for urging the player to change the setting on the display device 41. The setting change instruction display turns on the setting key switch 93 when the player tries to change the setting (the result of A1028 is "Y"), and the RAM clear processing (A1036) at the time of setting change solves the RAM abnormality. can.

After that, the game control device 100 executes a process of prohibiting access to the RWM (A10).
30) Wait until the power of the gaming machine is turned off.

Next, the process at the time of normal power-on (power restoration) in steps A1031-A1035 will be described.

The game control device 100 first saves the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the area to be initialized (
A1031). The area to be initialized is the clear area # 2 (random number area, control information area, game control stack area) in FIG. 5C. Here, in the control information area, the power failure inspection area,
A checksum area and an area related to error fraud monitoring are included. The payout control device 200
The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the command can be accepted, is also cleared, and the state of the payout busy signal is set to an indefinite state indicating that the state has not been determined. After that, the game control device 100 examines an area in the RWM that stores the game state and determines whether or not the game state is a high-probability state (A1032).

Here, when the game state is not a high probability state (the result of A1032 is "N"), the game control device 100 skips the processes of steps A1033 and A1033 and shifts to the process of step A1035. If the gaming state is a high probability state (A1)
The result of 032 is "Y"), and the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (A1033).
For example, the on (lighting) data of the high probability notification LED (third game state display unit 59, error display) provided in the batch display device 50 is saved in the segment area (A1034). Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1035), and step A1046 is performed. Move to processing.

Next, the RAM initialization process (RAM) in the variable setting state of step A1036-A1041.
The process of clearing) and the process of changing settings will be explained.

The game control device 100 first clears the RAM area to be cleared to 0 (A1036).
.. In the RAM area to be cleared, when the RAM 111c is normal (the result of A1020 is "Y"), the RAM clear start address 2 is set, so that the clear area # 2 in FIG. 5C is set.
Will be. When the RAM 111c is abnormal (the result of A1020 is "N"), the RAM clear start address 1 is set, so that the clear area # 1 in FIG. 5C is obtained. That is, RAM
The probability set value area is not cleared when it is normal, but the probability set value area is also cleared when the RAM is abnormal.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1037). At this point, it is assumed that the front frame 12 is in the open state, the initial value of the security signal control timer (described later) for outputting the security signal is saved, and the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. Make it possible to output what has been done to an external device (such as a hall computer). If the probability set value area is cleared when the RAM is abnormal, the default value (for example, set value 1) may be saved as an initial value in the probability set value area.

Then, the game control device 100 sets a probability setting value changing flag indicating that the setting can be changed (that is, the setting is being changed) (A1038).
Subsequently, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area as the initial data when the probability setting value is changed (A1039), the value in the probability setting value area is loaded, and the probability setting value is loaded. Saved in the working probability setting value area as initial data at the time of change (A104)
0). Subsequently, a command indicating that the setting is in a variable state (probability setting is being changed) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1041), and step A104 is performed.
Move to the process of 6. By the command during the probability setting change, the effect control device 300 can recognize that the setting is in the variable state (probability setting is being changed).

Next, the process of RAM initialization (RAM clear) by the RAM initialization switch (RAM clear switch, setting value change switch 102) in steps A1042-A1045 will be described.

The game control device 100 first sets the RAM clear start address 2 (A1042), and then sets the RAM clear start address 2.
The RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (A1043). Since the clear start address 2 is set, the RAM area RAM to be cleared is the clear area # 2 in FIG. 5C. Therefore, the RAM is initialized by operating the RAM initialization switch (set value change switch 102).
In the process of RAM clear), the probability set value area is not cleared.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1044). Here, the area to be initialized is, for example, a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the effect mode. Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is output to the effect control device 300.
It is transmitted to (effect control board) (A1045), and the process proceeds to step A1046.

The command at the time of power failure recovery and step A1 transmitted in the process of step A1035.
The commands at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of 045 include a model specification command indicating the type of the gaming machine, a decorative special figure 1 hold number command indicating the hold number of the special figures 1 and 2, and a decorative special figure 2 hold number. Includes commands and probability information commands that indicate the state of the probability. Also, depending on the state when the power is turned off or turned on, the recovery screen command is used when the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed when the power is turned off, and the customer waiting demo command is used when the customer is waiting when the power is turned off. , Includes a power-on command to indicate that the power has been turned on. Further, depending on the model, an effect mode information command indicating the state of the effect mode, an effect number information command, and a high probability number information command indicating the number of remaining games in the high probability state are included. The RAM initialization command also includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). The effect control device 300 that has received the RAM initialization command (RAM clear command) displays, for example, a customer waiting demo on the display device 41, and RAM initialization (RAM) is performed by the sound of the LED and the speaker of the board decoration device 46 or the like. Clear) notification 3
Do it for 0 seconds.

Further, the command at the time of power failure recovery and the command at the time of RAM initialization include a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) indicating setting value information which is information of the setting value (probability setting value) of the gaming machine 10. Is done. The game control device 100 only needs to transmit the set value information command to the effect control device 300 only once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter, the effect control device 300 refers to the set value information stored by itself. You can control the production.

After the processing of steps A1035, A1041 and A1045, the game control device 100 uses a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator). Start up (A104
6). The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU 111a based on the divided signal. It also includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After executing the CTC activation process in step A1046, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, a predetermined register (CTC) in the random number generation circuit.
The setting of the code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in the update permission register) is C.
This is done by PU111a. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set.

The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) by exchanging them in a predetermined order and storing them as different bit arrangements (arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that determines.

In the present embodiment, by exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of turning on the power, and corresponds to various initial value random numbers (random numbers for determining the big hit symbol (big hit symbol). Random number 1, big hit symbol random number 2), random number that determines the small hit symbol (small hit symbol random number), random number that determines the hit of the normal figure (win random number), random number that determines the hit symbol of the normal figure (win symbol random number) Etc.) as the initial value (start value) and save it in the predetermined area of RWM (A1048)
), Allow interrupts (A1049). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it can be difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the hit random number are configured to be generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the jackpot random number is C
It is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or higher than the operating clock of the PU. CTC (C) different from CTC (CTC0) for timer interrupt processing
It is a "slow counter" that is updated based on TC2)).

Further, in the big hit symbol random number and the hit symbol random number, a so-called "initial value change method" is adopted in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes around. It should be noted that each random number may be a counter-type update by +1 or 1, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed.
That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number and the hit random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step A1050, the game control device 100 is the power supply device 40.
The number of times to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from 0 via the port and the data bus is set (A1051), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (A10).
52). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (result of A1052 is "N"), step A
The process returns to the initial value random number update process of 1050. That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (A1050) (A1049), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is executed with priority, and the timer interrupt is initially executed. It is possible to prevent the interrupt processing from being overwhelmed by making it stand by by the value random number update processing. While the setting is being changed (during the setting variable state), it is not necessary to execute the processes of steps A1046, A1047, A1048, and A1050 related to the initial value random number update.

In the initial value random number update process of step A1050, in addition to the main process, there is also a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process, and when such a method is adopted, the initial value random number is used in both cases. In order to avoid executing the update process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update and cancel the interrupt when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process. On the other hand, if the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process as in the present embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. It has the advantage of simplifying the main process.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1052 is "Y"), the game control device 10
0 determines whether or not the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in the process of step A1051 (A1053). Then, if the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks (the result of A1053 is "N"), the process returns to step A1052 to determine whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on.

Further, the game control device 100 interrupts once when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (the result of A1053 is "Y"), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred. (A1054) and output off-data to all output ports (A105)
5).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the power failure inspection area check data 1 in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1056), and saves the power failure inspection area check data 2 in the power failure inspection area 2 (A1056).
A1057). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off is executed (A1058), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1059).
). Finally, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1060), and the machine waits until the power of the gaming machine is turned off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to the instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control device) that delays the start of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is provided. , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111c capable of storing data and a RAM 111c.
An initialization operation unit (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, an initialization means (game control device 100) that initializes the data stored in the RAM 111c based on the operation of the initialization operation unit, and The operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111c after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the timer interrupt process is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates the register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM start address in the predetermined register (A1302). By switching from the register bank 0 used in the main processing to the register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt processing, it is equivalent to saving the register used in the main processing. When the timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 receives inputs from various sensors and switches, captures signals, and so on.
That is, an input process for reading the state of each input port is executed (A1303). moreover,
Solenoid (Large winning opening solenoid 39b) based on the output data set by various processes
Output processing for performing drive control and the like of the actuator such as (A1304) is executed. If a firing prohibition signal is output in the process of step A1005 in the main process,
By performing this output processing, a launch permission signal is output, and the launch permission signal can be set to the permission state.

Next, the game control device 100 has a random number update process 1 (A1305) and a random number update process 2 (A1).
306) is executed. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, which are the targets of the initial value random number update process. The random number update process 2 is a process for updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. It is not necessary to execute the random number update process 1 and the random number update process 2 when the probability setting is being changed (the setting is in the variable state).
After that, monitoring of whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 39a, and monitoring of errors (front frame and The winning opening switch / status monitoring process for performing (whether the glass frame is not opened, etc.) is executed (A1307).

Next, the game control device 100 executes a probability setting value change process for changing the probability set value (A1308). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the probability setting is being changed (setting variable state) (A1309). Whether or not the probability setting is being changed is indicated by the probability setting value changing flag (A103).
It can be determined by 8). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting is being confirmed (the setting is being confirmed) (A1310). When the flag in the probability setting value confirmation mode described later is set,
It can be determined that the probability setting is being confirmed.

When the game control device 100 is neither changing the probability setting nor confirming the probability setting (A131).
The result of 0 is "N"), and the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes is issued by the payout control device 2.
The payout command transmission process to be output to 00 is executed (A1311). Further, a special figure game process for performing processing related to the special figure variation display game is executed (A1312), and then a normal map game process for performing processing related to the normal map variation display game is executed (A1313). Game control device 10
0 is not necessary when the probability setting is being changed (the result of A1309 is "Y") or when the probability setting is being confirmed (the result of A1310 is "Y"), so the payout command transmission process (A)
1311), the special figure game process (A1312), and the normal figure game process (A1313) are not executed, and the process proceeds to the process of step A1314.

Next, the game control device 100 is provided in the game machine 10 and executes a segment LED editing process for driving a segment LED for displaying a special figure variation game display and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents. (A1314).

Further, the game control device 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process of checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (A1315). For example, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, the magnet fraud generation flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area when there is an abnormality. Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) for checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board and determining whether or not there is an abnormality is executed (A1316). For example, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, the board radio wave fraud occurrence flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area when there is an abnormality.

After that, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1317). Then, the state display edit output process for editing and outputting the output data to the state display device 152 is executed (A1318). In the state display edit output process, the accessory ratio, the payout rate, the number of ejected balls, and the like may be calculated as the output data to the state display device 152. In the status display edit output process, the checksum of the status display work area is calculated when the power is turned on (power recovery), and if it does not match the checksum when the power is turned off, the status display work area and the status display are used. You may clear the stack area. afterwards,
Terminates timer interrupt processing. At the time of return of timer interrupt processing, restoration of interrupt disabled state and restoration of register bank specification are automatically performed, but the CP to be used
Depending on the U, after the external information editing process, a process of permitting an interrupt or a process of returning the register bank designation to the register bank 0 may be performed.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (A1304) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of output processing.

First, the game control device 100 outputs (reset) off-data to the port 135 (see FIG. 3) that outputs the segment data of the batch display device (LED) 50 (A1601).
Next, the data to be output to the solenoid output port 134 that outputs the data of the large winning opening solenoid 39b is combined and output (A1602).

Then, the game control device 100 updates the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device (LED) 50 (A1603). Further, the output data of the LED digit line corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (A1604). Then, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (A1605), and the combined data is output to the fourth output port 136 for digit output / external information output (A1606). After that, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (A1607), and the loaded data is used as the third output port 135 for segment output.
Is output to (A1608).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes the data to be output to the external information terminal 71 (A1609), and further synthesizes the synthesized data and the output data of the launch permission (A161).
0), 5th output port 137 for outputting external information / launch permission signal from the finally synthesized data
Is output to (A1611).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the off output data of the probability set value display (A161).
2). The off output data is output data (blank data for turning off the lights) during the period when the probability set value is not displayed. Then, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value display permission flag that permits the display of the probability setting value is set (A1613). The probability setting value display permission flag is set in the probability setting value change process described later.

The game control device 100 is set to the probability set value display permission flag (A16).
The result of 13 is "Y"), the probability setting value display data is loaded from the probability setting value display data area (A1614), and the loaded probability setting value display data is sent to the probability setting value display output port (sixth output port 141). Output (A1615). When the probability setting value display permission flag is not set (the result of A1613 is "N"), the probability setting value display data is not loaded and the off output data is output to the probability setting value display output port (6th output port 141). Output to (A161)
5). Therefore, when the probability setting value display permission flag is set, the probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143, and when the probability setting value display permission flag is not set, the probability setting value display device 143 is displayed. Turns off (blank display).

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (A1616). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (A1617).

Next, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device, synthesizes the data, and synthesizes the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. The combined data is output to (A1618). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( A1619
). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (A1620), the output process is terminated.

After that, the game control device 100 loads the test signal output data of the probability set value (A1).
621). Here, as the test signal output data related to the probability setting value, the display data itself of the probability setting value display device 143 (7-segment type display), that is, the probability setting value display data in the probability setting value display data area is output. The test signal output data may be numerical data (1 to 6) representing set values, or may be output data in other forms. Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A1622). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1622 is "Y"), the loaded data and the setting key switch on information are combined (A1623), and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 6 (A1623).
A1624). On the other hand, when the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1622 is "
N ”), the test signal output data of the probability set value is output to the test signal output port 6 as it is (N”).
A1624).

[Winning opening switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning opening switch / status monitoring process. The winning port switch / status monitoring process is executed in step A1307 of the timer interrupt process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability setting is being changed (setting variable state) (A2001). When the game control device 100 is not changing the probability setting (A2001)
The result of is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the probability setting is being confirmed (the setting is being confirmed) (A20).
02). When the probability setting is not being confirmed (the result of A2001 is "N"), the monitoring process and the like from steps A2003 to A2010 are executed as usual. On the other hand, the glass frame 15 may be released when the probability setting is being changed (the result of A2001 is "Y") or when the probability setting is being confirmed (the result of A2002 is "Y"). Since there is a possibility that a game ball can be inserted into one of the winning openings by hand and there is no point in performing monitoring processing, etc., step A20
The process proceeds to step A2011 without executing the monitoring process from 03 to A2010.

When the game control device 100 is not changing the probability setting (the result of A2001 is "N"),
A winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the large winning opening switches 39a (two) in the large winning opening (special variable winning device 39) is prepared (A2003). Then, even though the large winning opening is not open, the fraudulent & winning monitoring process for detecting whether or not there is an illegal winning in the large winning opening is executed (A2004).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other of the large winning opening switches 39a (two) in the large winning opening (special variable winning apparatus 39) (A2005).
Then, the fraudulent and winning monitoring process for monitoring the fraudulent winning and detecting the normal winning is executed (A2006).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37 (A2007). Then, the fraudulent and winning monitoring process for monitoring the fraudulent winning and detecting the normal winning is executed (A2008). Subsequently, a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring is prepared (A2009). The winning opening switches that do not require fraud monitoring are the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the winning opening switch (SW) 35a of the general winning opening 35.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a winning number counter update process for updating the winning number (
A2010). Then, the state scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal among the plurality of switches for monitoring the state and the signal to be monitored this time is updated (A2011). The status scan counter is updated in the range 0-3.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares the game machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2012). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2013).
.. The details of the gaming machine status check process will be described later.

By referring to the value of the status scan counter to the game machine status monitoring table 1, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of the switch connector disconnection etc. (switch abnormality) (1 error) monitoring is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 1, monitoring of the status (shoot ball burnout error) based on the shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. The value of the status scan counter is 2.
If is, the monitoring of the state based on the overflow switch signal (overflow error) is set, and if the value of the state scan counter is 3, the monitoring of the state based on the payout abnormality status signal (payout abnormality error) is set.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the game machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2014). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2015).

By referring the value of the status scan counter to the game machine status monitoring table 2, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status (glass frame opening error) based on the signal output from the glass frame opening detection switch is monitored. Is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 1, monitoring of the status (main unit frame opening error, front frame opening error) based on the signal output from the front frame opening detection switch is set. If the value of the status scan counter is 2, the monitoring of the status based on the frame radio wave invalid signal (frame radio wave invalidity) is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is 3, the monitoring of the status based on the touch switch signal is set. Is set.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the state scan counter is 0 (A2016). And if the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (A2016)
The result of is "N"), and the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is completed. In this case, there is no status monitoring target in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next.

Further, in the game control device 100, when the value of the error scan counter is 0, (A2).
The result of 016 is "Y"), the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (A2017), and the gaming machine status check process for determining the status such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2018).
..

By referring to the value of the status scan counter in the game machine status monitoring table 3, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like (switch abnormality). 2 error) monitoring is set. It should be noted that the game machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counters are 1 to 3.

After that, the game control device 100 executes a payout busy signal check process for setting a busy signal status (payout busy signal flag) based on the payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control (A2019). ), End the winning opening switch / status monitoring process.

Since the processes from steps A2017 to A2019 are executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is 0, they are executed once for every four timer interrupts. .. That is, if the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, 1
Processing from A2017 to A2019 will be performed every 6 ms.

In addition, in the fraud & prize monitoring process (A2008), a large prize opening (special variable prize device 39)
) And the number of winning balls for each character (total number of prize balls) related to the normal variable winning device 37 are counted and stored, and information on the number of winnings and the number of balls acquired for each character is set as a production command. good.
In the winning number counter update process (A2010), the number of winnings related to the starting winning opening 36 and the general winning opening 35 and the number of balls won by character (total number of prize balls) are counted and stored, and further, the number of winnings and each character are stored. Information on the number of acquired balls may be set as an effect command. Further, in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (FIG. 8), the number of out balls (number of ejected balls) is counted and stored by the out ball detection switch, and the information on the number of out balls is output as an effect command (out ball number command). May be set as. The payout rate is the ratio (ratio) of the total number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired for each bonus) to the number of ejected balls. The bonus ratio is, for example, the ratio (%) (= so-called continuous bonus ratio) of the number of prize balls (the number of balls won by the bonus) obtained by winning the big prize opening out of the total number of prize balls. be. In the state display edit output process (A1318), the accessory ratio, the payout rate, the number of ejected balls, and the like may be calculated as the output data to the state display device 152.

[Game machine status check process]
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gaming machine state check process. The gaming machine status check process is performed in step A2013 in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process shown in FIG.
It is executed in A2015 and A2018.

The game control device 100 first acquires a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter (A2201). The state scan counter is set to a value in the range of 0 to 3 according to the gaming state. The relationship between the status monitoring table and the status scan counter is as described in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process shown in FIG.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the signal to be checked is on (".
A2202). If the signal to be checked is not on (the result of A2202 is "N"), that is, if the signal to be checked is off, a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (A2203), and the target state off command is acquired. And prepare (A2204). Further, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2205). The state-off flag indicates a normal state for an error-type signal, and indicates a non-touch state for a touch switch signal.

On the other hand, when the signal to be checked is on (the result of A2202 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares the state on flag as the state flag (A2206), acquires the target state on command, and prepares. (A2207). Further, the target state-on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2208). The state-on flag indicates an abnormal or invalid state for an error-type signal, and indicates a touched state for a touch switch signal.

When the process of step A2205 or step A2208 is completed, the game control device 100
Determines whether or not the value of the target signal control area matches the state of the acquired signal (A2).
209). If they match (the result of A2209 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2212. If they do not match (A2209 result is "N"), the acquired signal status is saved in the target signal control area (A2210), and the target status monitoring timer is cleared (A2210).
A2211).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 updates the target state monitoring timer by +1 (A2212).
.. Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated status monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (A2213). If the value of the updated status monitoring timer is less than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2213 is "N"), the gaming machine status check process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the updated status monitoring timer value is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2213 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the status monitoring timer by -1 and the timer comparison value-. Keep the value at 1 (A2214). Further, it is determined whether or not the prepared state flag matches the value of the target state flag area (A2215). If they match (A221)
The result of 5 is "Y"), and the gaming machine status check process is completed.

On the other hand, when the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (the result of A2215 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the prepared state flag in the target state flag area. (A2216). Finally, the effect command setting process for setting the effect command is executed (A2217), and the gaming machine status check process is completed. The effect command here is either a state-off command or a state-on command. If the state-on command is an error-type command, the effect control device 300 is started to notify the error. In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Probability setting value change processing]
Next, the details of the probability set value change process (A1308) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability set value change process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability setting value is being changed (setting variable state) (A2401). When the probability setting value is not being changed (the result of A2401 is "N"),
The probability set value confirmation process for confirming the probability set value is executed (A2402).

When the game control device 100 is changing the probability set value (the result of A2401 is "Y").
If the probability set value extinguishing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (A2403), and it is determined whether or not the probability set value extinguishing timer is 0 (A2404). When the probability setting value extinguishing timer is 0 (the result of A2404 is "Y"), the probability setting value display permission flag is set (A2405).
The process proceeds to step A2406. When the probability setting value off timer is not 0 (A24)
The result of 04 is "N"), nothing is done, and the process proceeds to step A2406.

Then, the game control device 100 determines in step A2406 whether or not the probability set value has been changed (A2406). When the probability setting value changed flag described later is set, the probability setting value has been changed. When the probability setting value has been changed (A2)
The result of 406 is "Y"), and the process of completing the setting change in steps A2416 to A2421 is executed.

In the game control device 100, when the probability set value has not been changed (the result of A2406 is "N".
”), It is determined whether or not there is an input from the set value change switch 102 (A2407). When there is no input from the set value change switch 102 (the result of A2407 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2411.

The game control device 100 receives an input from the set value change switch 102 (A240).
The result of 7 is "Y"), and the value of the working probability setting value area is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 5 (A24).
08). In this way, each time the setting value change switch 102 is operated, the value in the working probability setting value area is increased by 1. When the setting value change switch 102 is operated after the value of the working probability setting value area becomes 5, the value of the working probability setting value area may return to 0.
The values 0 to 5 in the working probability setting value area correspond to the probability setting values 1 to 6 in 6 stages. The probability setting value is not limited to 6 steps.

Then, the game control device 100 saves the probability setting value display data corresponding to the work probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area (A2409). Next, the initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the probability set value extinguishing timer area (A2410). This initial value corresponds to the extinguishing period (blank period) in which the probability setting value display device 143 is extinguished (blank display).

In this way, when the probability setting value extinguishing timer is 0, by setting the probability setting value display permission flag, the probability setting value display data becomes the probability setting value (working probability setting value) during the setting change. It is displayed on the set value display device 143, and when the probability setting value extinguishing timer is not 0, the probability setting value display device 143 is extinguished. Since the light is turned off only for a predetermined turn-off period after the set value change switch 102 (set value change button) is operated by the probability set value turn-off timer, even if the setting is only one step (when the set value is only 1). , The probability setting value display device 143 can visually confirm that the setting value change switch 102 has been operated.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input of a touch switch signal from the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (A2411). When there is no input of the touch switch signal (the result of A2411 is "N"), the probability setting value change process is terminated. When there is an input of a touch switch signal (the result of A2411 is "Y"), the value in the working probability setting value area is loaded and saved in the probability setting value area (A2412). The touch switch signal is a confirmation signal for confirming the set value. Then, the values 0 to 5 corresponding to the determined probability set value are stored in the probability set value area.

It is also possible to determine the probability setting value and store it in the probability setting value area when a predetermined time has elapsed after the setting key switch 93 is turned off or the setting is changed to the variable state. Further, an operable confirmation button switch (operation means, operation unit) may be newly provided in the game control device 100, and the signal from the confirmation button switch may be used as a confirmation signal for confirming the set value. .. That is, instead of the operation of the touch switch, the operation of the newly provided confirmation button switch may be the confirmation operation.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value in the probability set value display data area (A2413). As a result, the determined probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143. Then, the probability setting value changed flag indicating that the probability setting value has been changed is set (A2414), and the command for changing the probability setting value indicating that the probability setting value has been changed is issued by the effect control device 300 (effect control). Send to (board) (A241)
5), the probability setting value change process is terminated.

In the process of completing the setting change in steps A2416 to A2421, the game control device 10
0 first determines whether or not the setting key switch 93 is off (A2416). When the setting key switch 93 is in the ON state (the result of A2416 is “N”), the probability setting value change process is terminated. When the setting key switch 93 is in the off state (the result of A2416 is "Y").
, RAM clear start address 3 is set (A2417), and the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (A2418). The RAM area to be cleared here is the clear area # 3 in FIG. 5C.
Will be. The clear area # 3 is composed of a control information area (area from the power failure inspection area 1 to the checksum area) and a game control stack area, and the probability set value area and the random number area are excluded. The clear area # 3 is the clear area # 2 excluding the random number area, and the random number updated during the setting change is not wasted. By clearing the RAM area to be cleared to 0, the information and flags used for setting changes such as the information of the probability setting value area for work, the probability setting value changing flag, and the probability setting value changed flag are cleared. The flag.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A2419). Since it is the end of the setting change, the initial value of the security signal control timer (described later) for outputting the security signal is saved, and the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. Allow output to a computer, etc.). After that, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (A2420). As a result, the probability setting value at the end of the setting change is displayed and maintained on the probability setting value display device 143.

Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command for ending the probability setting change indicating that the probability setting change has been completed to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A2421), and the main process (A2421).
Returning to FIG. 5B), the process proceeds to step A1049. The commands to be sent here are the above-mentioned model specification command, decoration special figure 1 hold number command, decoration special figure 2 hold number command, probability information command, setting value information command (probability setting value information command), and completion of probability setting change. It is a command (a command for RAM initialization may be used). Depending on the model, the effect mode information command, the effect count information command, and the high probability count information command are transmitted. Upon receiving the command to end the probability setting change, the effect control device 300 displays, for example, a customer waiting demo on the display device 41.
30 notification of RAM initialization (RAM clear) by LED of board decoration device 46 etc. and sound of speaker
Do it for a second.

[Probability setting value confirmation process]
Next, the details of the probability set value confirmation process (A2402) in the above-mentioned probability set value change process will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability set value confirmation process.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting value confirmation mode (the set value confirmation state) is in the mode in which the probability setting value can be confirmed (A2501). When the flag in the probability setting value confirmation mode described later is set, it can be determined that the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress. When the probability set value confirmation mode is in effect (the result of A2501 is “Y”), the processes after step A2509 are executed.

When the game control device 100 is not in the probability set value confirmation mode (the result of A2501 is "
N "), clear the probability set value display permission flag (A2502). Then, it is determined whether or not the game is in progress (A2503). For example, if the variable display game is being executed or the jackpot is in progress, it can be determined that the game is in progress. When the game is in progress (the result of A2503 is "Y"), the probability setting value confirmation process is terminated so that the probability setting value cannot be confirmed. When not playing (A
The result of 2503 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is ON (A2).
504). When the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A2504 is "N"), the probability setting value confirmation process is terminated.

The game control device 100 sets the probability setting value confirmation mode flag (A2505) when the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A2504 is “Y”). This will result in
When the probability setting value is not being changed (setting variable state) (the result of A2401 is "N")
When the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the probability setting value confirmation mode (setting value confirmation state) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed is set. Next, set the probability setting value display permission flag (A2).
506). As a result, the probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 based on the probability setting value display data loaded from the probability setting value display data area by the output process (FIG. 7).

Next, the game control device 100 saves an initial value in the security signal control timer area in order to enable output of the security signal (A2507). When the set value is confirmed, a security signal will be output, and it will be possible to output to an external device (such as a hall computer) that the front frame 12 has been opened. The command for confirming the probability set value is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A2508), and the probability set value confirmation process is terminated.

When the game control device 100 is in the probability set value confirmation mode (the result of A2501 is "
Y ”), it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A2509). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A2509 is "Y"), the probability setting value confirmation mode continues, and the probability setting value confirmation probability setting value confirmation process ends.

The game control device 100 clears the probability setting value confirmation mode flag (A2510) when the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A2509 is “N”). Therefore, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the probability setting value confirmation mode ends. and,
In order to prevent the probability setting value from being displayed on the probability setting value display device 143, the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (A2511). Subsequently, a command for completing the probability setting value confirmation indicating that the probability setting value confirmation is completed is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A2).
512).

In the above, the setting value change switch 102 is configured to be usable as a RAM initialization switch (RAM clear switch), but a RAM initialization switch may be provided separately from the setting value change switch 102. In this case, when the power is turned on (power restoration),
If the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch are on, the setting is variable (setting change state), and if the setting key switch 93 is on and the RAM initialization switch is off, the setting confirmation state (setting value confirmation state). If the setting key switch 93 is off and the RAM initialization switch is on, RAM initialization (RAM clear) is possible, and the setting key switch 93
If the RAM initialization switch is off, it may be configured to be in a normal power-on (power recovery) state. Further, the set value (setting) may be fixed when the setting key switch 93 is turned from on to off.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game processing (A1312) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure game processing. In the special figure game process, the inputs of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

First, the game control device 100 executes a start port switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (A2601). In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins a game ball in the start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted and a special figure fluctuation display based on the winning is displayed. Predetermine the game result based on the winning at the stage before the start of the game. note that,
The details of the start port switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a large winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602).
In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the count switch 39a provided in the special variable winning device 39 is monitored. The details of the large winning opening switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (1).
(A2603). The special figure game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt cycle (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). If the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A2604 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2619.

In the game control device 100, when the special figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is ".
Y ”), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is set in the register (A2605). .. Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired by using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606).
Subsequently, a subroutine call is made by the special figure game processing number, and the game branch processing according to the special figure game processing number is executed (A2607).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A2607, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
Special figure fluctuation display Monitors the fluctuation start of the game, sets the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game, sets the effect, sets the information necessary for processing during the special figure fluctuation, etc. Execute (A2608). The details of the special figure normal processing will be described later in FIG.

When the game processing number is "1" in step A2607, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
The special figure changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure, setting the information necessary for performing the special figure display process, and the like is executed (A2609). For details of the processing during special map fluctuation, see Fig. 2.
It will be described later in 8.

When the game processing number is "2" in step A2607, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
If the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, the fanfare time is set according to the big winning opening opening pattern of each big hit, and the fanfare / interval processing is performed. The special figure display processing for setting the necessary information for the above is executed (A2610). For example, in the special figure display processing, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, necessary information such as a big hit fanfare command (directing command), a big hit fanfare time, and a probability information command (low probability) is set. Set the processing number "3" related to the fanfare / interval processing and save it in the special figure game processing number area. If the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit, set the necessary information such as the small hit fanfare command (directing command) and the small hit fanfare time, and set the processing number "7" related to the small hit fanfare processing. Save to the special figure game processing number area. If the result of the special figure variation display game is not a big hit or a small hit, the processing number "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "3" in step A2607, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
The fanfare / interval processing for setting the opening time of the large winning opening, updating the number of opening times, setting the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the large winning opening, etc. is executed (A2611). For example, in the fanfare / interval processing, necessary information such as the round command (directing command) corresponding to the round of the round game to be executed and the opening time of the large winning opening is set, and the processing number related to the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is set. Set "4" and save in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "4" in step A2607, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
If the jackpot round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the ending command is set, and the information necessary for processing the remaining ball of the jackpot is set. The middle process is executed (A2612). For example, in the processing during the opening of the large winning opening, necessary information such as an interval command or an ending command as an effect command is set, and the processing number "5" related to the processing of the remaining ball of the large winning opening is set and the special figure game processing number area is set. Save to.

When the game processing number is "5" in step A2607, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
If the jackpot round is the final round, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the jackpot to be discharged, the process of setting the information necessary for performing the jackpot end process, etc. Execute (A2613). For example, in the large winning opening remaining ball processing, if it is not the final round, the interval time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, the processing number "3" related to the fanfare / interval processing is set, and the special figure game processing number area is set. Save. If it is the final round, the ending time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, the processing number "6" related to the jackpot end processing is set, and the game is saved in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "6" in step A2607, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
Special figure Execute the jackpot end processing that sets the information necessary for executing the normal processing (A)
2614). For example, in the big hit end process, necessary information such as the probability state after the end of the big hit state and the normal power support state (time saving state) after the end of the big hit state is set, and these probability states and the time saving state are set by the probability information command (directing). Set as a command), set the processing number "0" related to the special figure normal processing, and save it in the special figure game processing number area. The probability information command includes the number of continuous games (number of time reduction fluctuations, number of electric support) of the probability state (high probability / low probability) after the end of the big hit state and the normal power support state (time saving state) after the end of the big hit state. Information etc. are included.

When the game processing number is "7" in step A2607, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
The small hit fanfare processing is executed (A2615), in which the opening time of the large winning opening is set, the number of times of opening is updated, and the information necessary for performing the small hit processing is set. For example, in the small hit fanfare middle processing, necessary information such as the small hit opening time of the big winning opening is set, the processing number “8” related to the small hit middle processing is set, and the game is saved in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "8" in step A2607, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
Execute the small hit medium processing that sets the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing (A2)
616). For example, in the small hit middle processing, necessary information such as the small hit remaining ball processing time is set, the processing number “9” related to the large winning opening remaining ball processing is set, and the game is saved in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "9" in step A2607, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
Execute the small hit remaining ball processing that sets the information necessary for performing the small hit end processing (A)
2617). For example, in the small hit remaining ball processing, necessary information such as the small hit ending time is set, the processing number “10” related to the special figure small hit end processing is set, and the game is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "10" in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a small hit end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure normal process (the small hit end process).
A2618).

When the processing based on the special figure game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (A2619), and then the special figure 1 display device. The symbol fluctuation control process according to 51 is executed (A2620). Then, after preparing the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (A2621), the symbol fluctuation control process related to the special figure 2 display 52 is executed (A2622). The details of the symbol variation control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 29.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process.

First, the game control device 100 prepares a winning monitoring table for the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2701), executes a hard random number acquisition process (A2702), and starts the starting winning opening 36.
It is determined whether or not there is a prize in (A2703). When there is no prize in the starting prize opening 36 (
When the result of A2703 is "N"), the processes after step A2709 are executed. On the other hand, when there is a prize in the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special figure time is shortened (during the normal electric support state) (A2704).

When the game control device 100 determines that it is not during the special time reduction (during the normal electric support state) (A).
The result of 2704 is "N"), and the processing after step A2707 is executed. On the other hand, when the special figure time is shortened (during the normal power support state) (the result of A2704 is "Y"), the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2705), and the effect command setting process is executed (A2705). A2706).

That is, in the normal electric support state (time saving state), the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared and the effect command setting process is executed regardless of the probability state (high probability state / low probability state) of the variable display game. .. In the case of the present embodiment, the starting winning opening 36 is not won unless it is left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 is not won unless it is right-handed. In addition, the game ball does not pass through the normal drawing start gate 34 unless it is hit to the right. Therefore, in the normal power support state (time saving state), right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a prize in the start winning opening 36 during the normal power support state (that is, during the normal power support state). When left-handed), a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 gives an instruction to right-handed (when it is left-handed).
Warning) is executed by the display device 41 or the like.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting the information of the hold by the start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and then executes the special figure starting opening switch common process (A2).
708). Then, a winning monitoring table for the second starting winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) is prepared (A2709), a hard random number acquisition process is executed (A2710), and whether or not there is a winning in the second starting winning opening is determined. Judgment (A2711). When there is no prize in the 2nd start prize opening (
When the result of A2711 is "N"), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when there is a prize in the second start winning opening (the result of A2711 is "Y"), whether or not the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is operating. That is, it is determined whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is activated and the game ball is in an open state in which the winning can be won (A2712). When the normal electric accessory is in operation (the result of A2712 is "Y"
), The process proceeds to step A2714.

On the other hand, when the normal electric accessory is not in operation (the result of A2712 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not a fraudulent electric power is being generated (A2713). When the number of fraudulent winnings to the ordinary variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5), it is determined that the general electric fraud is occurring. In the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball is won in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there is a game ball that has won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal winnings. Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

The game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the second start winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) when the general electric fraud is not occurring (the result of A2713 is "N") (A2714). , The special figure start port switch common process is executed (A2715), and the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, even when it is determined in A2713 that an illegal electric power is being generated (the result of A2713 is "Y"), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second
Prevents any further start-up memory.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the special start port switch common process (A2708, A) in the start port switch monitoring process.
The details of 2715) will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a procedure of common processing for the special drawing start port switch. The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are input.

First, the game control device 100 outputs information regarding the number of winnings to the monitoring target start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a to the external management device of the game machine 10. The start port signal output number of times is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output number of times overflows (A2903). If the number of outputs does not overflow (the result of A2903 is "N"),
Save the updated value in the RWM start port signal output count area (A2904), and step A.
The process proceeds to 2905. On the other hand, when the number of output times overflows (the result of A2903 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2905. In the present embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, in the game control device 100, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, whether or not the number of special figure reservations (starting memory number) to be updated corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value. (A2905). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure start port switch common processing is terminated. If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "Y"), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (the number of special figure 1 hold or the number of special figure 2 hold) is updated by +1. Then (A2906), the target start opening winning flag is saved (A2907).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2805 in the RWM jackpot random number. Save to the area (A2909). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (A2910), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning is in the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2912). If the starting prize opening 36 is not won (the result of A2912 is "N")
), The process proceeds to step A2915. On the other hand, when the winning is to the starting winning opening 36 (the result of A2912 is "Y"), the small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (A2913).
Save in the small hit symbol random number storage area of RWM (A2914).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (A2915), and executes the special figure reservation information determination process (A2).
916). Then, a start port switch to be monitored and a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared as effect commands (A2917), and the effect command setting process (A291) is prepared.
8) is executed to end the common processing of the special figure start port switch.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning opening 36 and the starting winning area of the normal variable winning device 37, and becomes the right to execute the variable display game. It serves as a start storage means for storing a predetermined number as a start memory up to an upper limit. also,
The start storage means (game control device 100) stores various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as the first starting storage up to a predetermined number. , Various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (A2916) in the start port switch common process will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure reservation information determination process.
The special figure hold information determination process is a look-ahead (preliminary determination) process for determining result-related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

First, the game control device 100 checks the start opening winning flag saved in step A2907, and determines whether or not the starting opening winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) has won a prize (A300).
1). If the starting prize opening 36 is not won (the result of A3001 is "N"), step A3
Move to the process of 004. On the other hand, in the case of winning the start winning opening 36 (the result of A3001 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special time is shortened (during the normal electric support state) (A300).
2).

The game control device 100 ends the special figure reservation information determination process when the special figure time is shortened (during the normal electric support state) (the result of A3002 is "Y"). On the other hand, if the special time is not shortened (A3)
When the result of 002 is "N"), it is determined whether or not a big hit or a small hit is in progress (A30).
03). If a big hit or a small hit is in progress (the result of A3003 is "Y"), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the game control device 100 is not in the big hit or the small hit (the result of A3003 is "N"), the big hit determination process determines whether the big hit random value matches the big hit determination value. Is executed (A3004). And when the judgment result is a big hit (
When the result of A3005 is "Y"), the jackpot symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (A3006), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number prepared in step A2910 is acquired (). A3007), the process proceeds to step A3014.

When the determination result is not a big hit (the result of A3005 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) has been won (A3008). If it is not a prize to the start winning opening 36 (the result of A3008 is "N"), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (A3013), and the process proceeds to the process of step A3014.

When the game control device 100 wins a prize in the starting winning opening 36 (the result of A3008 is "Y".
”), The small hit determination process for determining whether or not the large hit random value matches the small hit determination value is executed (A3009). And when the judgment result is not a small hit (A30)
The result of 10 is "N"), the stop symbol information of the outlier is set (A3013), and step A3.
Move to the process of 014. On the other hand, when the determination result is a small hit (the result of A3010 is "Y".
In)), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (A3011), and step A143 is performed.
The stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in is acquired (A3012), and the process proceeds to the process of step A3014.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information as an effect command (A3014), and executes the effect command setting process (A3015). Next, the special figure information setting process for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed (A3016), and the variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is executed (A3017). ).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game (A3018). ), The effect command setting process is performed (A3019), and the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. The special figure information setting process in step A3016 and the variation pattern setting process in step A3017 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special map normal processing. In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Through the above processing, a look-ahead symbol command containing the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target and a look-ahead variation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether or not it is a big hit and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is controlled to be produced before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to notify the device 300, and in particular, by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result-related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variation display game. It becomes possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Etc.) Make a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only at the start prize when the start memory occurs, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is played. good.

[Large winning opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the large winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the large winning opening switch monitoring process.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "4", that is, whether or not the processing is in progress while the large winning opening is open (A3101). When the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is in progress (the result of A3101 is "Y"), the process proceeds to the processing of step A3105. In addition, when the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is not in progress (the result of A3101 is "N"), whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "5", that is, whether or not the remaining ball of the large winning opening is being processed. Judgment (A3102
).

When the game control device 100 is in the process of processing the remaining balls of the large winning opening (the result of A3102 is "Y"".
), The process proceeds to step A3105. In addition, when the remaining ball of the big winning opening is not being processed (A)
It is determined whether the result of 3105 is "N") and the value of the special figure game processing number is "8", that is, whether or not the small hit middle processing is in progress (A3103). When processing during small hit (A310)
The result of 4 is “Y”), and the process proceeds to step A3105. Further, when the small hit middle processing is not in progress (the result of A3103 is "N"), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "9", that is, whether or not the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (). A3104). Since the special figure game processing number does not shift to the next until the special figure game processing timer reaches 0, the progress state of the game can be checked by the special figure game processing number in this way.

When the game control device 100 is not processing the small hit remaining ball (the result of A3104 is "N").
, Ends the big prize opening switch monitoring process. In addition, when the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (A31)
When the result of 04 is “Y”), the process proceeds to the process of step A3105. Then, 0 is set in the winning counter (A3105), and the big winning opening switch 1 (one of the big winning opening switches 39a) is set.
) Is determined (A3106).

In the game control device 100, when there is no input to the large winning opening switch 1 (the result of A3106 is ".
N ”), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the large winning opening switch 2 (the other large winning opening switch 39a) (A3110). Further, when there is an input to the large winning opening switch 1 (the result of A3106 is "Y"), the large winning opening count command is prepared as an effect command (A3107).
The effect command setting process (A3108) is executed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (
A3109), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the big winning opening switch 2 (the other big winning opening switch 39a) (A3110).

In the game control device 100, when there is no input to the big winning opening switch 2 (the result of A3110 is ".
N ”), it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3114). Further, when there is an input to the large winning opening switch 2 (the result of A3110 is "Y"), the large winning opening count command is prepared as an effect command (A3111), and the effect command setting process (A3112) is executed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3113), and it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3114).

In the game control device 100, when the value of the winning counter is 0 (the result of A3114 is "Y"".
) Ends the large winning opening switch monitoring process. Also, if the value of the winning counter is not 0 (
The result of A3114 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the remaining ball of the large winning opening is being processed (A311).
5). When the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (the result of A3115 is "Y"), when the large winning opening switch monitoring process is completed and the large winning opening remaining ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3115 is "N").
It is determined whether or not the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (A3116).

When the game control device 100 is in the process of processing the remaining small hit balls (the result of A3116 is "Y").
When the large winning opening switch monitoring process is completed and the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3116 is "N"), the value of the winning counter (1 or 2) is added to the large winning opening count number (A31).
17), the number of large winning openings is the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round. For example, "9"
") It is determined whether or not the result is equal to or greater than that (A3118).

In the game control device 100, when the number of winning openings is not equal to or higher than the upper limit (A31).
The result of 18 is "N"), and the large winning opening switch monitoring process is completed. In addition, when the number of large winning openings exceeds the upper limit (the result of A3118 is "Y"), the number of large winning openings is kept at the upper limit (A3119), and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0. (A3120), it is determined whether or not the small hit middle processing is in progress (A3121).

When the game control device 100 is not in the process of small hits (the result of A3121 is "N"), the game control device 100 ends the large winning opening switch monitoring process and is in the process of processing small hits (the result of A3121 is "Y").
”), Save the value of the end of the small hit opening operation in the large winning opening control pointer area (A3122).
, Ends the big prize opening switch monitoring process. As a result, the big prize opening will be closed and one round will end.

[Special figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (A2608) in the special figure game processing will be described.
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start storage number) is 0 (A3201). When the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (the result of A3201 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number) is 0 (A3205). Then, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (the result of A3205 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo has started (A3209), and when the customer waiting demo has not started (A3209). The result of (A3210) is that the customer waiting demo flag area is set with the customer waiting demo flag indicating that the customer waiting demo state (customer waiting demo is in progress) (A3210).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command as a production command (
A3211), the effect command setting process is performed (A3212), and "0" related to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (A3213). On the other hand, even when the customer waiting demo has been started in step A3209 (the result of A3209 is "Y"), "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (A3213). After that, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (A3214), and the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (A3215). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A3216).
, Special figure Ends normal processing.

In this way, the customer waiting demo command is transmitted when the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number) and the special figure 2 hold number (second start storage number) are 0, and the customer wait demo command is received. The effect control device 300 is set to display the customer waiting demo on the display device 41 or the like. The game control device 100 can also be configured to transmit a customer waiting demo command only when the touch switch signal from the touch switch of the operation handle 24 becomes an off signal.

Further, in the game control device 100, when the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is not 0 (the result of A3201 is "N".
”), The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is executed (A3202), and the decorative special figure hold number command (decorative special figure 2 hold number command) corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is prepared as an effect command (A3203).
), Executes the effect command setting process (A3204), and ends the special figure normal process.

Further, in the game control device 100, when the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is not 0 (the result of A3205 is "N".
”), The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is executed (A3206), and the decorative special figure hold number command (decorative special figure 1 hold number command) corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared as an effect command (A3207).
), The effect command setting process is executed (A3208), and the special figure normal process is terminated.

In this way, by checking the special figure 2 hold number before the check of the special figure 1 hold number, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) is executed when the special figure 2 hold number is not 0. The Rukoto. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed in preference to the special figure 1 variable display game. That is, the game control device 100 is the second start storage means (game control device 100).
If there is a second start memory, the variable display game based on the second start memory is preferentially executed over the variable display game based on the first start memory.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (A3206) in the special figure normal processing will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game.

The game control device 100 saves the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the variable symbol discrimination flag area (A3401). Subsequently, the jackpot flag 1 setting process for setting the missed hit flag 1 and the jackpot information for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a jackpot is executed (A3402). The details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3403). The details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process will be described later. Further, the game control device 100 executes a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern (A3404).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (A3405). ). After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern, which is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game (A3406).

Next, the game control device 100 executes the variation start information setting process (A3407) for setting the variation start information of the special figure 1 variation display game, and ends the special figure 1 variation start process. In the fluctuation start information setting processing, the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, regarding the special figure 1 variation display game, a variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared as an effect command, and the effect command setting process is performed.

Then, the game control device 100 sets "1" related to the special figure changing process as the process number (A3408), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3409).

Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3410), and saves the signal relating to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 1 in the test signal output data area (A3411). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (A3412), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area (A3412).
For example, 100 ms) is set (A3413). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 1 variation start process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3202) in the special figure normal processing will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game, and is the same process as the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 18 for the second start memory. It is something to do.

First, the game control device 100 uses the type of special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2).
The special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the above is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (A3501). Subsequently, the jackpot flag 2 setting process for setting the missed hit flag 2 and the jackpot information for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a jackpot is executed (A3502).

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3503). Further, the special figure information setting process for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is executed (A3504). Subsequently, a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is set, is prepared (A3505).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game (A3506). Then, the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the special figure 2 variation display game is executed (A3507). In the fluctuation start information setting processing, the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, regarding the special figure 2 variation display game, a variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared as an effect command.
Performs production command setting processing.

Next, the game control device 100 first sets "1" related to the special figure changing process as the process number (A3508), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3509).

Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3510), and saves the signal relating to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 2 in the test signal output data area (A3511). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A3512), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area (A3512).
For example, 100 ms) is set (A3513). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 2 variation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the small hit flag area (A360).
1), the information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (A3602). Next, load the jackpot random number from the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM and prepare (A360).
3) Clear the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number) to 0 (A3604). It should be noted that the reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). After that, a jackpot determination process for determining whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value is a jackpot according to whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value is executed (A3605).

When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3605) is a jackpot (the result of A3606 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step A3602. Save (A3607) and end the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3605) is not a jackpot (A).
The result of 3606 is "N"), and the small hit determination process for determining whether or not the prepared big hit random value matches the small hit determination value is executed (A3608).

When the determination result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is a small hit (the result of A3609 is "Y"), the game control device 100 transfers the small hit information to the small hit flag area in which the loss information is saved in step A3601. Overwrite and save (A3610), and the jackpot flag 1 setting process ends. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is not a small hit (A3).
When the result of 609 is "N"), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated while the information is saved in both the jackpot flag 1 region and the small hit flag region. Thus, in this embodiment,
The result of the special figure 1 variable display game is one of "big hit", "small hit", and "missing".
[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process.
This process is the same as the process in the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 20 for the second start storage.

The game control device 100 first saves the information that the game control device 100 is out of the jackpot flag 2 area (A37).
01). Next, the big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM, prepared (A3702), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0. (A3703). It should be noted that the reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). After that, a jackpot determination process for determining whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value is a jackpot according to whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value is executed (A3704).

When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3704) is a jackpot (the result of A3705 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A3701. Save (A3706) and end the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3704) is not a jackpot (A).
The result of 3705 is "N"), and the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated while saving the information that the jackpot flag 2 is out of alignment. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is either "big hit" or "missing".

[Big hit judgment process]
Next, the jackpot determination process in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, the jackpot flag 2 setting process, and the like (
The details of A3605 and A3704) will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot determination process. The jackpot determination process is a process common to the jackpot determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3004 of the special figure hold information determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets a table of upper limit determination values (upper limit determination value table) corresponding to the probability setting value (A3801). The upper limit determination value table determines the upper limit determination value according to the probability setting value for each of the high probability state and the low probability state. Then, the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (A3802), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A3803). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

In the game control device 100, when the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A380).
The result of 3 is "Y"), a deviation (other than a big hit) is set as a judgment result (A3808), and the big hit judgment process is terminated.

Further, the game control device 100 determines that the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (A3).
The result of 803 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the probability of occurrence of a big hit is a high probability state (probability change state) (A3804). Then, in the case of a high probability state (the result of A3804 is "Y"".
), The upper limit determination value in high probability is set corresponding to the probability setting value using the upper limit determination value table (A3805). On the other hand, when it is not in the high probability state (the result of A3804 is "N"), the upper limit judgment value in the low probability is set corresponding to the probability setting value using the upper limit judgment value table (A).
3806).

When the upper limit determination value of the value of the jackpot random number is set, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (A3807). When the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A3807 is "Y"), a deviation (other than the jackpot) is set as the determination result (A3808). On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (
The result of A3807 is "N"), and a big hit is set as a determination result (A3809). When the determination result is set, the jackpot determination process ends.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process (A3608) in the big hit flag 1 setting process will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. The small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3009 of the special figure hold information determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets a small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability set value (A).
3901). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the big hit random number of the target (Special Figure 1) is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (A3902). The small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is equal to or less than the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit.

As a matter of course, in order to avoid that the result of the same special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit and a big hit, the range of the small hit judgment value (between the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value) is the above-mentioned big hit judgment. It does not overlap the range of values (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value). In this embodiment, it should be noted that
A small hit random number is not provided independently, and a large hit random number is also used for determining a small hit, but a configuration in which an original small hit random number is provided is also possible.

When the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 1) is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A3902 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets a deviation as the determination result (A3904).
The small hit determination process is terminated.

Further, in the game control device 100, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A3902 is "N"), the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 1) is the small hit upper limit determination value. It is determined whether or not it is larger (A3903). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3903 is "Y"), a deviation is set as the judgment result (A3904).
.. On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3903 is "
N "), a small hit is set as a determination result (A3905). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process ends.

[Big hit probability, small hit probability]
24 (A), (B), and (C) show the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the special figure variation display game determined as a result of the above-mentioned big hit determination process (FIG. 22) and small hit determination process (FIG. 23). Each setting (
It is a table exemplifying for each setting value).

In the example of FIG. 24A, a case where the big hit probability and the small hit probability are different for each setting (each set value) is shown. The jackpot probability (low probability and high probability) and the small hit probability increase as the set value increases (higher setting), and the larger the set value, the more likely the jackpot to occur, which is advantageous to the player. The jackpot probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value in FIG. 22 by the range of the value of the jackpot random number. The jackpot probability can be changed according to the set value by changing the range of the lower limit determination value or the value of the jackpot random number corresponding to the set value in addition to the upper limit determination value.
In another example, only one of the jackpot probability at the low probability and the jackpot probability at the high probability may be configured to increase as the set value increases. By changing the big hit probability and the small hit probability according to the setting (set value), the player enjoys estimating the setting (set value) from the big hit probability and the small hit probability, and the interest of the game is improved.

In the example of FIG. 24B, the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the settings 1, 2, 3 (setting values 1, 2, 3) and the settings 4, 5, 6 (setting values 4, 5, 6) are the same. It is set. In addition, in the setting 1 to 3 or the setting 4 to 6, the big hit probability and the small hit probability become higher as the set value becomes larger (higher setting). In the example of FIG. 24 (B), it is more difficult for the player to estimate the setting (set value) from the big hit probability and the small hit probability, and the player can be prevented from getting bored.

In the example of FIG. 24 (C), the jackpot probability (at the time of low probability and at the time of high probability) regardless of the setting (set value).
And the small hit probability are the same. In this case, the player estimates the setting (setting value) from other setting discriminating elements.

Other setting discriminating factors include the probability variation inrush rate (described later), the number of continuations of fanfare support after the end of the jackpot (described later), the number of continuations of the probability variation state on the ST machine, the number of jackpot rounds (upper limit of the number of rounds), and special features. There are fluctuation patterns (variation time values) of the figure fluctuation display game, various times (stop display time, fanfare time, etc.) set in the special figure game processing. If the probability that a predetermined content of these setting discriminating elements is selected is different for each set value, the player can estimate the set value from these setting discriminating elements.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3403) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (A4001).
, When it is a big hit (the result of A4001 is "Y"), the big hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the holding number 1) (A4002). Next, a special figure 1 jackpot symbol table is set (A4003).

Subsequently, the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A4004). Type of special result (type of jackpot) by this processing
Is selected.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table (A4).
005), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4006). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display device (here, the special figure 1 display device 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (A4007).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number, and obtains the time reduction determination data.
Save in the time reduction determination data area (A4008). The time reduction determination data includes information on whether or not there is a normal power support state (time reduction state) after the end of the jackpot state.

After that, the game control device 100 saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4009). Then, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4018).

The effect mode transition information is information for shifting the effect mode. The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of a big hit (the result of A4001 is "Y") and is used in the big hit end process. That is, the effect mode transition information can be used to shift the effect mode in the wake of a big hit. In addition, as described above, the effect mode transition information is set according to the jackpot stop symbol pattern (probability variation jackpot symbol / normal jackpot symbol, etc.), so the jackpot ends depending on the type of jackpot symbol (type of jackpot). The transition destination of the production mode to be transitioned later will change. In addition, since the effect mode transition information is set according to the probability state as described above,
The transition destination of the production mode is also affected by whether or not the special figure is currently in the high probability state (probability change state).

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A4001 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the small hit flag is a small hit (A4010), and when it is a small hit (A4010).
The result of A4011 is "Y"), and the small hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the holding number 1) (A4011). Next, set the special figure 1 small hit symbol table (A4).
012), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A4013).

After that, the game control device 100 acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and obtains the stop symbol pattern.
It is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4014), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (A4015). The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of a small hit (the result of A4010 is "Y"), and the effect mode can be transferred with the small hit as an opportunity. Then, prepare a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A40).
18).

If the small hit flag is not a small hit (the result of A4010 is "N"), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A4016), and the stop symbol pattern is stopped. Save to the area (A4017) and prepare a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4018). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (A4019), and the effect command setting process is executed (A4020). This decorative special figure command is the effect control device 30.
It is sent to 0. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A4021), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) is cleared to 0 (A4022), and the special figure 1 small hit. Clear the symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) to 0 (A40)
23), the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A3503) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (A4101).
, When it is a big hit (the result of A4101 is "Y"), the big hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the holding number 1) (A4102). Next, a special figure 2 jackpot symbol table is set (A4103). Subsequently, the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (A4104). This process selects the type of special result (type of jackpot).

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table (A4).
105), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4106). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special diagram 2 display 52) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (A4107).

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number, and obtains the time reduction determination data.
Save in the time reduction determination data area (A4108). The time reduction determination data includes information on whether or not there is a normal power support state (time reduction state) after the end of the jackpot state.

After that, the game control device 100 saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4109). The production mode transition information here is for a big hit (
The result of A4101 is set to "Y") and used in the jackpot end process. Then, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4112).
).

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (the result of A4101 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of loss in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (A4110).
), Save the off-stop symbol pattern in the stop symbol pattern area (A4111), and prepare a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4112). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (A4113), and the effect command setting process is executed (A4114). This decorative special figure command is the effect control device 30.
It is sent to 0. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A4115), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (A4116), and the special figure 2 stop symbol is saved. End the setting process.

[Example of special figure jackpot symbol distribution]
FIG. 27 is a table illustrating the jackpot symbol distribution (big hit breakdown) of the special figure variation display game controlled by the above-mentioned special figure game processing for each setting.

FIG. 27 illustrates a jackpot symbol number 1 to 6 (stop symbol number) indicating the type of jackpot and a jackpot symbol table defining the distribution rate for each setting. As shown in FIG. 27, the distribution rate of the jackpot symbol number (type of jackpot, symbols 1 to 6) can be changed according to the setting (set value), and the probability variation inrush rate becomes higher as the set value becomes larger, for the player. It will be advantageous. The probability variation inrush rate is the ratio of the probability variation jackpot symbol that the probability state after the jackpot ends to a high probability to all the symbols.
In addition, the number of times of normal electric support after the end of the big hit is, in particular, as the set value becomes larger in the settings 1 to 3 or the settings 4 to 6 with respect to the normal big hit (the probability state after the end of the big hit becomes a low probability). growing. Settings 1, 2, 3 (setting values 1, 2, 3) and settings 4, 5, 6 (setting values 4,
The number of times of public electric support in 5 and 6) is set to be the same. It should be noted that the ST machine can be configured to increase the number of continuations of the probabilistic state as the set value increases.

Further, in FIG. 27, the number of rounds given in one big hit (upper limit value of the number of rounds, for example, 2R, 6R, 16R) does not change with respect to the set value, but the number of rounds is increased as the set value becomes larger. Configuration is also possible. Further, in FIG. 27, the jackpot of the special figure 2 variable display game is more likely to be given a larger number of rounds than the jackpot of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the special figure 2 variable display game is more likely to be given a special figure. 1 It is more advantageous to the player than the variable display game.

As in FIG. 24C, it is also possible to make the jackpot symbol distribution (big hit breakdown) the same regardless of the setting (set value).

[Processing during special figure change]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (A2609) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the processing during the change of the special figure.

First, the game control device 100 prepares a symbol stop command (special symbol 1 symbol stop command or special symbol 2 symbol stop command) corresponding to the changing symbol as an effect command (A4701).
, The effect command setting process is executed (A4702). The fluctuating symbol can be discriminated from the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag (special figure 1 fluctuation flag or special figure 2 fluctuation flag). Upon receiving the symbol stop command, the effect control device 300 stops the corresponding decorative special figure variation display game (decorative special figure 1 variable display game or decorative special figure 2 variable display game).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number indicating the stop symbol pattern (A4703), and saves the set display time in the special figure game processing timer area (A4704). In the case of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an out-of-order symbol pattern, a large hit symbol pattern, or a small hit symbol pattern, the display time is 600 in common.
Set msec.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the process number "2" related to the process during display of the special figure (A4).
705), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (A4706).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal relating to the end of the variation of FIG. 1 in the test signal output data area (A4707), and further saves the signal relating to the end of the variation of FIG. 2 in the test signal output data area (A4707). A4708).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 has a control timer initial value (for example, 256 msec) in the symbol confirmation count signal control timer area used when outputting the symbol confirmation count signal related to the execution count of the special figure variation display game to the external information terminal. Is saved (A4709).

After that, the game control device 100 sets the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 display 51 as the information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51 in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area. Save to (A4710). Further, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A4711). , Ends the process transition setting process during special figure change.

[Design fluctuation control process]
FIG. 29 shows the symbol fluctuation control process (A2620, A2622) in the above-mentioned special figure game process.
), The symbol fluctuation control process in the normal figure game process described later is shown. The symbol fluctuation control processing is performed by controlling fluctuations of special symbols (first special figure, second special figure, etc.) and ordinary symbols (ordinary symbols) of the variation display game in the variation display unit of the batch display device 50, and special symbols and ordinary symbols. This is the process of setting the display data of the symbol.

First, the game control device 100 checks whether the fluctuation control flag related to the symbol to be controlled (for example, any of the first special figure, the second special figure, and the normal figure) is changing (A7501). In the case of this embodiment, on the fluctuation control table prepared in step A2619, step A2621, and step A7614, the lower address of the fluctuation control flag area, the initial value of the blinking control timer, the fluctuation symbol number upper limit determination value, and the display table 2 ( Address (for stop), display table 1
The (variable) address is defined.

In the game control device 100, when the changing flag related to the symbol to be controlled is changing (A).
The result of 7502 is "Y"), and the symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (A7503). In the case of this embodiment, step A2619, step A2621,
The address of the symbol display table (for variation, display table 1) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A7614.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the blinking control timer of the controlled object by -1 (A7504).
, It is determined whether the blinking control timer after updating is 0 (A7505), and when the blinking control timer after updating is not 0 (the result of A7505 is "N"), the value in the variable symbol number area to be controlled is set. Acquire the corresponding display data (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

If the updated blinking control timer is 0 (the result of A7505 is "Y"), the initial value of the blinking control timer corresponding to the target blinking timer area is saved (A7506), and the fluctuation symbol number of the controlled object is saved. Is updated by +1 in the corresponding range (A7507), and the display data corresponding to the value in the variable symbol number area of the controlled object is acquired (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the changing flag related to the symbol to be controlled is not changing (the result of A7502 is "N"), the game control device 100 acquires the symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled. (A7509). In the case of this embodiment, step A2619, step A2
The address of the symbol display table (for stop, display table 2) is defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in step A7614 in 621. Next, the display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area of the control target is acquired (A7510), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

As the initial value of the blinking control timer saved in step A7506, the value defined in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed is saved. Here, a value corresponding to 100 msec is defined as the initial value of the blinking control timer. The blinking control timer initial value is an interval for updating the lighting pattern during the fluctuation time in the batch display device 50.

Further, the corresponding range in step A7507 is defined by the fluctuation symbol number upper limit determination value defined in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed. When the variable symbol number upper limit is reached by updating the variable symbol number by +1 in step A7507, the variable symbol number is set to 0, and the variable symbol number is 0 to (variable symbol number upper limit determination value -1). ) Will be updated sequentially. In steps A7508 and A7511, display data (lighting pattern) corresponding to the variable symbol number is set to be acquired and displayed, and the lighting pattern is updated (changed) the number of times equal to the variable symbol number upper limit determination value. Will be repeated to make a round of display.

By defining the blinking control timer initial value and the fluctuation symbol number upper limit value in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed in this way, the interval and display for updating the lighting pattern in the batch display device 50 are cycled. The number of updates to be performed can be set for each game.

[Public map game processing]
Next, the details of the normal figure game processing (A1313) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal figure game processing. In the normal map game processing, monitoring of the input of the gate switch 34a and control of the entire processing related to the normal map fluctuation display game,
Set the display of the normal map.

First, the game control device 100 executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a (A7601). The details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a general electric winning switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the start port 2 switch 37a (A7602).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the normal figure game processing timer is not 0 (1).
(A7603). The minimum value of the normal figure game processing timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the normal figure game processing timer becomes 0 (A7604).

When the value of the normal figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is "Y"), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the game control device 100 is set to the normal figure game processing number. A general-purpose game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the corresponding process is set in the register (A7605).

Further, the game control device 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the game process number of the game based on the set table of the game sequence of the game (A7606). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the normal figure game processing number, and the game branch processing according to the normal figure game processing number is executed (A7607).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A7607, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
Normal map fluctuation display Monitors the fluctuation start of the game, sets the fluctuation start of the normal map fluctuation display game, sets the effect, and sets the information necessary for processing during the normal map fluctuation. Execute (A7608). The details of the normal processing will be described later in FIG. 32.

Further, when the game processing number is "1" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the normal map changing process for setting information necessary for performing the normal map display process (the normal map changing process). A7609). For example, in the normal map fluctuation processing, in order to shift to the normal map display processing, "2" is set as the game processing number and saved in the normal map game processing number area, and the normal map display time is set to the normal map game. Save to the processing timer area.

Further, when the game processing number is "2" in step A7607, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the time is shortened if the result of the normal map variation display game is a hit. Execution of the normal map display processing (A7610), which sets the opening time, sets the information necessary for performing the normal drawing processing, and the like. For example, in the normal map display process, when the result of the normal map variable display game is a hit, "3" is set as the game process number and the normal map game process number area is set in order to shift to the normal map hit process. On the other hand, in the case of a loss, "0" is set as the game processing number and the game is saved in the normal game processing number area in order to shift to the normal processing.

Further, when the game processing number is "3" in step A7607, the game control device 100 continues the processing during the normal drawing, or sets the information necessary for performing the processing of the remaining ball of the normal power. The middle process per figure is executed (A7611). For example, in the normal processing per figure, after setting to open the normal variable winning device 37 a predetermined number of times, "4" is set as the game processing number in order to shift to the normal electric remaining ball processing. Save to the normal game processing number area.

Further, when the game processing number is "4" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the normal electric remaining ball processing for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing end processing (A7612). ). For example, in the Fuden remaining ball processing, in order to shift to the Fuzu hit end processing, "5" is set as the game processing number and saved in the Fuzu game processing number area, and the Fuzu ending time is set to the Fuzu game. Save to the processing timer area.

Further, when the game processing number is "5" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the normal drawing end processing for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing normal processing (A7608). (A7613). For example, in the normal drawing per end processing, in order to shift to the normal drawing normal processing, "0" is set as the game processing number and the game is saved in the normal drawing game processing number area.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a normal map fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal map display 53 (A7614). After that, the symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 53 is executed (A7615), and the normal symbol game process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the value of the normal figure game processing timer is not 0 (A7604).
If the result of is "N"), that is, the time is not up, the processing after step A7614 is executed.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate switch monitoring process. The gate switch monitoring process is executed in step A7601 in the normal map game process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (
A7701). Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is "
Y "), it is determined whether or not the game is in a right-handed gaming state (A7702). The right-handed game state is a big hit state, a small hit state, and a time saving state (general electric support state). In the case of a right-handed gaming state (the result of A7702 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A7705.
When it is not in the game state of right-handed (A7702 result is "N"), the left-handed instruction notification command (left-handed instruction command) is prepared as an effect command (A7703), and the effect command setting process is executed (A7704). Production control device 300 that received the left-handed instruction notification command
Executes a notification (warning) instructing to hit left by the display device 41 or the like.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the number of reserved figures and determines whether or not the number of reserved rules is less than the upper limit (for example, 4) (A7705). When the number of reserved figures is less than the upper limit (the result of A7705 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the number of reserved rules by +1 (A).
7706), the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved normal figures after the update is calculated (A).
7707). Then, the hit random number is extracted and saved in the hit random number storage area of RWM (A77).
08), the hit symbol random number is extracted, saved in the hit symbol random number storage area (A7709), and the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the game control device 100 has no input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is "N"), or when it is determined that the number of reserved figures is not less than the upper limit value (A770).
The result of 5 is "N"), and the gate switch monitoring process is completed.

[Usually processing]
Next, the details of the normal drawing normal processing (A7608) in the normal drawing game processing will be described.
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the procedure of normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the number of reserved figures is 0 (A7901).
.. If the number of reserved numbers is not 0 (the result of A7901 is "N"), the winning random number is loaded from the random number storage area per RWM (for the number of reserved numbers 1), and the random number storage area per symbol of RWM. ((
The hit symbol random number is loaded from (for 1 hold number), and the random number storage area per normal figure (for 1 hold number) and the symbol random number storage area per normal figure (for 1 hold number) after loading are cleared to 0 (A7902). .. Furthermore, whether or not the probability of a hit result in the normal map fluctuation display game is higher than usual in the normal high probability (high probability state), that is, whether or not the time is shortened (normal electric support state). (A7903). The probability of hitting a normal figure in a high probability is 250/251, and the probability of hitting a normal figure in a low probability is 0/251.

When the game control device 100 is not in the high probability of the normal figure (the result of A7903 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets the low probability lower limit judgment value (251 in this case) which is the lower limit judgment value in the low probability of the normal figure (A7904).
), When the high probability of the normal map is in progress (the result of A7903 is "Y"), the high probability lower limit judgment value (1 in this case), which is the lower limit judgment value in the high probability of the normal figure, is set (A7905), and step A7906. Move to the processing of.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (251 in this case) (A7906). It should be noted that the upper limit determination value here is common to the high probability of the normal map and the low probability of the normal map. When the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (the result of A7906 is "Y"), that is,
In the case of a loss, the process proceeds to step A7908. When the hit random number is less than the upper limit determination value (the result of A7906 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A7907).

In the game control device 100, when the winning random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A7907 is "".
Y "), that is, in the case of a miss, the miss information is saved in the hit flag area (A7908).
.. Further, the missing stop symbol number is set as the normal symbol stop symbol number (A7909), the missing symbol information is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (A7910), and the process proceeds to step A7914.

In the game control device 100, when the winning random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A7907 is "
N "), that is, in the case of a hit, the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (A7911), the hit stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded hit symbol random number is set (A7912), and the hit corresponding to the hit stop symbol number is set. The stop symbol information is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (A7913), and the process proceeds to step A7914. In addition, there may be several kinds of hit stop symbols, and there are two in this embodiment.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the normal symbol stop symbol area (A791).
4), save the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A7915), shift the random number storage area per normal figure (A7916), and clear the free area after shift to 0 (A7917).
), The number of reserved figures is updated by -1 (A7918).

That is, as the oldest normal figure holding number 1 game is executed, the rankings of the normal figure holding numbers 2 to 4 that are held after the normal figure holding number 1 are moved up one by one.
By this processing, the value for the number of holdings of the normal figure 2 to the number of holdings of the normal figure 4 in the random number storage area per normal figure is moved from the number of holdings of the normal figure 1 in the random number storage area for the normal figure to the number of holdings of the normal figure 3. Will be done. Then, the value for the number 4 hold of the normal figure in the random number storage area per normal figure is cleared, and the number of hold the normal figure is decremented by 1.

Next, the game control device 100 extracts the variation pattern random number 3 (A7919), sets the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3, and saves it in the normal figure game processing timer area (A7).
920). For example, the fluctuation time is 500 msec with a probability of 200/256 and a probability of 40/25.
It is distributed to 1500 msec with 6 and 3000 msec with probability 16/256. Then, the process transition setting process during fluctuation of the normal map is executed (A7921), and the normal process of the normal map is terminated. For example, in the normal map changing process transition setting process, "1" is set as the process number for shifting to the normal figure changing process, and the process number is saved in the normal map game process number area. Then, the blinking control timer initial value (for example, 100 msec), which is the initial value of the blinking cycle timer of the ordinary figure display, is saved in the ordinary figure blinking control timer area, and the initial value (here, 0) is saved in the ordinary figure variation symbol number area. To save.

Further, in the game control device 100, when the number of reserved figures is 0 (the result of A7901 is "".
Y ”), set“ 0 ”as the processing number for shifting to normal processing (A7922),
The processing number is saved in the normal game processing number area (A7923). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraudulent monitoring period flag area (A7294), and the normal processing of the normal map is terminated.

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (A1317) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the external information editing process. FIG. 33A shows the first half of the external information editing process, and FIG. 33B shows the second half of the external information editing process. In the external information editing process, payout command transmission process (A1311), winning opening switch / status monitoring process (A1307), magnet fraud monitoring process (A1315), panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1316)
Based on the monitoring results in, information to be output to external devices such as information collection terminals and amusement park internal management devices and test firing test devices is created and set in the output buffer.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a glass frame opening error is occurring (
A9501). If no glass frame opening error is occurring (A9501 result is "N")
Determining whether or not a main body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is occurring (A9502)
.. When the main body frame opening error is not occurring (the result of A9502 is "N"), the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9503), and the off data of the security signal is the external information output data. Save to the area (A9504).

When the glass frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9501 is "Y"), or when the main body frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9502 is "Y"), the game control device 100 is used.
The on-data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9505), and the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9506).

After steps A9504 and A9506, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A9507), and determines whether or not the security signal control timer is 0 (whether or not the time is up). Judgment (A9508). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set to RAM by operating the initialization switch (set value change switch 102) or the like.
When the data stored in is initialized or when the setting change is completed, a predetermined time (for example, 256)
msec) is set (main processing A1044, A2419). Then, the security signal control timer is clocked from the time when the RAM is initialized or the time when the setting change is completed. also,
The initial value of the security signal control timer is the setting key switch 93 or the setting value change switch 1.
Setting variable state (setting change mode) and setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) by the operation of 02 etc.
It is set when becomes (A1037, A2507 of the main process), and the flag for changing the probability setting value is set. The flag is set during the setting change (during the setting variable state) or during the probability setting value confirmation mode. During the confirmation state, the security signal may be output all the time. The security signal control timer is set to 0 when the probability setting value changed flag is set (A2414), not when the probability setting value changing flag is cleared (A2418), and the security signal is output. It is also possible to configure it to end.

When the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9508 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the on-data of the security signal in the external information output data area (A).
9509), the process proceeds to step A9510. That is, it is output as external information that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized.

When the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A9508 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not magnet fraud is occurring (A9510). When the magnet fraud generation flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area, it can be determined that magnet fraud is occurring. When the magnet fraud is not occurring (the result of A9510 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not the panel radio wave fraud is occurring (A9511). When the board radio wave fraud occurrence flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area, it can be determined that the board radio wave fraud is occurring.

In the game control device 100, when the board radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A9511 is "N").
Further, it is determined whether or not the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (A9512). When the frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A9512 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not the general electric wave fraud is occurring (A9513). When the fraudulent electric service is not occurring (the result of A9513 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not the fraudulent prize opening is occurring (A9514). If the fraudulent prize occurrence flag for the large prize opening is saved in the fraud flag area by the fraud & prize monitoring process, it can be determined that the fraudulent prize opening is occurring. If the big prize opening fraud is not occurring (the result of A9514 is "N"), it is determined whether or not a switch abnormality error is occurring ().
A9515).

When a switch abnormality error (the above-mentioned switch abnormality 1 error) such as a switch connector disconnection is occurring (the result of A9515 is "N"), the game control device 100 tests off-data of the game machine error status signal. Save to the output data area (A9516). When a switch error is occurring (the result of A9515 is "Y"), the on-data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9518).

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the magnet fraud is occurring (the result of A9510 is "Y".
”), When the board radio wave fraud is occurring (A9511 result is“ Y ”), when the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (A9512 result is“ Y ”), and when the general electric wave fraud is occurring (" The result of A9513 is "Y"), or when the big winning opening fraud is occurring (the result of A9514 is "Y").
, Save the on-data of the security signal in the external information output data area (A9517),
Save the on-data of the game machine error status signal in the test signal output data area (A9518)
). Depending on the on-data setting of the security signal, the security signal is output to an external device (such as a hall computer) as external information.

After steps A9516 and A9518, the game control device 100 executes a main prize ball signal editing process for setting information regarding the number of prize balls to be paid out (A9519). Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a start port signal editing process for editing the winning signal of the start port (A952).
0).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game is not 0 (A9521). The minimum value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is set to 0.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the symbol determination number control timer is 0 (A9522). When the value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is 0 (the result of A9522 is "Y"), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the off data of the symbol confirmation count signal is output as external information data. Save to the area (A9523) and end the external information editing process.

Further, in the game control device 100, when the value of the symbol confirmation number control timer is not 0 (A952).
If the result of 2 is "N"), that is, the time is not up, the on-data of the symbol confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9524), and the external information editing process is terminated.

[Display of batch display device during setting change]
FIG. 34 shows the display of each display unit of the batch display device 50 during the probability setting change (during the setting variable state in which the setting can be changed), that is, each light emitting unit (LED lamp D1-D18) of the batch display device 50.
It is a figure explaining the light emission mode (the mode of turning on / off) of).

While the probability setting is being changed, the game control device 100 displays a predetermined display for the special figure variation display game of the batch display device 50 regardless of the state (game state, etc.) of the game machine 10 when the power is turned off before the power is turned on. Is displayed on the display units 51 and 52 of. For example, even if the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed when the power is turned off before the power is turned on, the game control device 100 collectively displays a predetermined display regardless of the state when the power of the batch display device 50 is turned off while the probability setting is being changed. Display units 51, 5 of the display device 50
Can be displayed in 2. Therefore, while the probability setting is being changed (setting variable state), the probability setting is being changed by a predetermined display on the display units 51 and 52 for the special figure variation display game that is easy to see from the front of the gaming machine 10. It can be suggested that the gaming machine 10 is in a state where it cannot play a game (for example, a variable display game).

In FIG. 34A, while the probability setting is being changed (during the variable setting state), the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (7-segment type LED lamp D1) for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game of the batch display device 50 is designated. The probability setting value (6 in this case) is displayed as a display. In this way, while the probability setting is being changed, the gaming machine 10 cannot play a game (for example, a variable display game) by displaying a different display (display different from the normal display) on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 when the fluctuation is stopped. Can be clearly indicated on the front of the gaming machine 10. It should be noted that the numbers 1 to 6 indicating the probability set values are not used in the stop display when the fluctuation of the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 is stopped.

For example, the game control device 100 may use the probability setting value display data (probability setting value display data) corresponding to the work probability setting value.
Based on A2409) and the probability setting value display data (A2413) corresponding to the probability setting value.
Output data is output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136, and the work probability setting value and the probability setting value are lit or blinked on the first special figure variation display unit 51 (LED lamp D1). Good (A1603-A1608 for output processing).

The probability set value may be lit or blinked on the second special figure variation display unit 52 (7-segment type LED lamp D2) for the special figure 2 variation display game of the batch display device 50. Further, the probability set value may be displayed by lighting or blinking by using both the first special figure variation display unit 51 and the second special figure variation display unit 52.

Furthermore, even if the brightness is made weaker than usual and the probability setting value is lit or blinking so that it is difficult for a person who does not have the authority to change the setting to visually recognize the probability setting value at a place away from the gaming machine 10. good.

In FIG. 34B, the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (LED lamp D1) is being changed while the probability setting is being changed.
), As a predetermined display, a changing information display (for example, the character "P") suggesting that the probability setting is being changed (setting variable state) is displayed. In this way, while changing the probability setting,
By displaying the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 different from the display when the fluctuation is stopped (display different from the normal display), it can be clearly shown on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which the game cannot be played. The same identification information (special symbol) as the changing information display (for example, the character "P") is not used in the stop display when the fluctuation of the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 is stopped. It shall be.

For example, when it is determined that the game control device 100 is changing the probability setting (A240).
The result of 1 is "Y"), and the process of generating output data related to the information display being changed to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 is executed (a process step is added to FIG. 10), and the process is being changed. The information display may be lit or blinked on the first special figure variation display unit 51 (A of output processing).
1603-A1608). Further, for example, the game control device 100 has a front frame 12 (main body frame).
Is open and the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1024 is "Y").
When the probability setting value changing flag is set (A1038), the output data is output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136, and the changing information display is displayed in the first special figure variation display unit 51.
(LED lamp D1) may be lit or blinking.

The changing information display may be lit or blinked on the second special figure variation display unit 52 (7-segment type LED lamp D2) for the special figure 2 variation display game of the batch display device 50. Further, the changing information display may be lit or blinked by using both the first special figure variation display unit 51 and the second special figure variation display unit 52.

In FIG. 34C, while the probability setting is being changed, the first special figure variation display unit 51 displays the same display as the stop result (missing result) of the variation display game other than the special result (other than the big hit) as a predetermined display. .. In the present embodiment, the loss result (missing symbol) is a display in which the central segment of the first special figure variation display unit 51 (7-segment type LED lamp D1) is lit.
As described above, by performing a predetermined display on the first special figure variation display unit 51 while the probability setting is being changed, it can be suggested in front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is not executing the game. Further, the RAM area is cleared to 0 at the end of the setting change (A2418), but by displaying the loss result (missing symbol) from the time when the probability setting is being changed, the initial data to be displayed on the first special figure variation display unit 51 is displayed. The value setting (A2419) may not be necessary.

For example, when it is determined that the game control device 100 is changing the probability setting (A240).
The result of 1 is "Y"), and the process of generating output data related to the display of the loss result (missing symbol) to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 is executed (a processing step is added to FIG. 10). ), The display of the deviation result may be lit and displayed on the first special figure variation display unit 51 (output processing A1603-A1608). Further, for example, in the game control device 100, when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is open and the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1024 is "Y".
”), When the probability setting value changing flag is set (A1038), the third output port 13
The output data may be output to the 5 and the 4th output port 136, and the display of the disconnection result may be lit and displayed on the 1st special figure variation display unit 51 (LED lamp D1).

It should be noted that the second special figure variation display unit 52 (LED) for the special figure 2 variation display game of the batch display device 50.
The display of the disconnection result may be lit on the lamp D2). Further, the display of the deviation result may be lit up by using both the first special figure variation display unit 51 and the second special figure variation display unit 52.

In FIG. 34D, the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (LED lamp D1) is being changed while the probability setting is being changed.
), The off display is displayed as a predetermined display. In this way, while the probability setting is being changed, the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which the gaming machine cannot be played by displaying a display different from that when the fluctuation is stopped (display different from the normal display) on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51. It can be clearly shown in front of 10. It should be noted that the extinguishing display is not used in the stop display when the fluctuation of the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 is stopped.

For example, the game control device 100 has a first feature to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 from the time the power is turned on (power restoration) until the probability setting value is changed (the result of A2406 is "Y"). The output data for the figure variation display unit 51 may not be generated, and the extinguished display may be displayed on the first special figure variation display unit 51.

The lights may be turned off on the second special figure variation display unit 52 (7-segment type LED lamp D2) for the special figure 2 variation display game of the batch display device 50. In addition, the first special figure fluctuation display unit 5
It may be turned off on both the 1 and the 2nd special figure variation display unit 52.

In FIGS. 34A to 34D, LED lamps (for example, LED lamps D3-D) other than the display units 51 and 52 (D1, D2) for the special figure fluctuation display game are being changed while the probability setting is being changed.
18) may be turned off or may be turned on cyclically to display an animation.

In FIGS. 34E and 34F, all the display units (that is, all the light emitting units: LED lamps D1-D18) of the batch display device 50 are turned on or blinked to be displayed as a predetermined display while the probability setting is being changed. , All lighting display or all blinking display is displayed on the batch display device 50. In this way, while the probability setting is being changed, the batch display device 50 is displayed differently from when the fluctuation is stopped (
By performing a display different from the usual one, it can be clearly shown on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which the game cannot be played.

The all blinking display of FIG. 34F is executed by repeating the all-off display and the all-on display of the batch display device 50 at predetermined time intervals.

For example, when it is determined that the game control device 100 is changing the probability setting (A240).
The result of 1 is "Y"), the process of generating output data related to the full lighting display or the full blinking display to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 is executed, and the full lighting display or the full blinking display is collectively displayed. It may be displayed on the display device 50 (output processing A1603-A1608). Further, for example, the game control device 100 sets the probability setting value changing flag when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is open and the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1024 is “Y”). Occasionally (A1038), output data may be output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136, and the full lighting display or the full blinking display may be displayed on the batch display device 50 (LED lamps D1-D18). ..

34G shows another configuration example of the batch display device 50 of FIGS. 34A-34F. In FIG. 34G, the performance of the gaming machine 10 (in the periphery of the LED lamps D1-D18 of the batch display device 50).
The performance display related to (specs) is displayed. Although the performance display is printed, L
It may be displayed by light emission from an ED lamp, a liquid crystal display, or the like. As a performance display, display of jackpot probability at low probability in setting 1 (lowest setting) and setting 6 (highest setting) 85
a "1/300 and 1/200", prize ball number display 85b "3 & 2 & 10 &14", round number upper limit display 85c "2, 6, 16", model (official name) display 85d "CRxxx"
xx ", display of the presence or absence of a limit regarding the probability variation jackpot 85e (here," no limit ")
Is displayed.

In the display of the number of prize balls 85b, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the general winning opening 35,
And the number of prize balls of the special variable winning device 39 is displayed in order. The limit regarding the probability variation jackpot means that the number of consecutive probability variation jackpots is limited to a predetermined limit number (one jackpot can generate a predetermined limit number of jackpots (number of consecutive villas)). Become).

Since the display 85a of the jackpot probability at the time of low probability is displayed only for the setting 1 (lowest setting) and the setting 6 (highest setting), it can be displayed so as to fit in the empty area around the batch display device 50. In addition, the display 85a of the big hit probability at the time of low probability is displayed only for the setting 3 (intermediate setting), and the display 85a of the big hit probability at the time of low probability is set 1 (lowest setting) and 6 (highest setting). Only one of them (one of the lowest value 1/300 and the highest value 1/200) may be displayed, or the range of the jackpot probability at the time of low probability (1/300 to 1/200) may be displayed.

In addition, among the jackpot probabilities at the time of low probability, the LED lamps D1-D of the batch display device 50
Items that cannot be displayed around 18 (big hit probabilities such as settings 2, 4, 5, etc.) may be displayed outside the game area 32 in an empty area of a member separate from the batch display device 50. It should be noted that what is displayed on the batch display device 50 may be duplicated on this separate member. For example, the jackpot probability at low probability for the settings 2, 4, 5, etc. is displayed on the empty area of the upper right, lower left, upper left of the game board of FIG. 2A, the member (guide rail 31) that divides the game area 32, and the like. May be. Alternatively, the jackpot probability at the time of low probability for the settings 2, 4, 5, etc. may be displayed in the empty area in the game area (for example, the surface of the general winning opening 35 in the lower left). Further, the display 85e of the presence / absence of a limit regarding the probability variation jackpot is displayed as "with a limit" only when there is a limit, and nothing may be displayed when there is no limit. In this way, the LED lamps D1-D1 of the batch display device 50
Items to be displayed as a performance display around 8 can be changed as appropriate. For example, the display 85c of the upper limit of the number of rounds at the time of a big hit may be displayed in another area or the display device 41, and some or all the items to be displayed as the performance display may be displayed on the batch display device 50 as needed. It does not have to be displayed.

Further, the effect control device 300 may display on the display device 41 the jackpot probability at the time of low probability for the settings 2, 4, 5, etc. while the setting is being changed, the setting is being confirmed, and / or the customer is waiting. .. The effect control device 300 previously stores the jackpot probability at the time of low probability (program ROM).
It may be stored in 321 etc.). It should be noted that the display device 41 may duplicately display what is displayed on the batch display device 50. To switch the display of the jackpot probability of each setting, use the effect button 2
It may be executed by operating an operation unit such as 5 or a cross key.

35 (A) and 35 (B) show a predetermined display (here, the probability setting value 6) on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 or the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 of the batch display device 50 while the probability setting is being changed. In the case of displaying, a configuration is shown in which it is difficult to visually recognize a predetermined display from an oblique direction other than the front of the gaming machine 10. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a person who does not have the authority to change the setting from visually recognizing a predetermined display (particularly the probability setting value) from the diagonal direction of the gaming machine 10 while changing the probability setting.

In FIG. 35A, two recesses 51a and 51b (recesses) are provided in front of the batch display device 50, and the first special figure variation display section 51 or the second special figure is provided in the recesses 51a and 51b, respectively. The variation display unit 52 is arranged. In FIG. 35B, an annular wall portion 50a (convex portion) surrounding the first special figure variation display unit 51 and the second special figure variation display unit 52 is provided in front of the batch display device 50. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the display of the first special figure variation display unit 51 or the second special figure variation display unit 52 from an oblique direction.

[Control of production control device]
The control (process) executed by the effect control device 300 by the effect control program will be described below.

[Main processing (effect control device)]
First, the details of the main processing executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 36
Is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main process is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (directing microcomputer) when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 10. In the flowchart of the process executed by the effect control device 300, the code (number) of the step is represented as "B ***".

When the execution of the main process is started, the effect control device 300 first disables interrupts (
B0001). Next, the initial settings of CPU 311 and VDP 312 are executed (B0002, B).
0003) Allow interrupts (B0004). When the interrupt is permitted, the game control device 1
The command reception interrupt process for receiving the command transmitted from 00 is ready to be executed.

Next, the effect control device 300 permits the generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed to be used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at the time of turning on the power is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B0).
008). The WDT is started by the above-mentioned CPU initial setting (B0002), and the CPU 311
Monitor whether is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared even after a certain period of time, the WDT time is up and the CPU 311 is reset.

After that, the effect control device 300 sets the RTC (real-time clock) 3 as a timekeeping means.
The RTC reading process for reading the time information from 38 is executed (B0009).

In the RTC reading process, the time information may be read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every minute), and it is not necessary to read the time information every time the process shifts to step B0009. Further, the RTC reading process may be executed only once when the power is turned on to the effect control device 300 (that is, the power is turned on to the gaming machine 10) (the position of the RTC reading process may be changed, for example, step B0003). And B0004 may be executed). The effect control device 300 sets a time timer (time measuring means) for measuring the time in the timer area in the RAM, and when the time information is read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle or when the power is turned on, the time is set from the RTC 338 only once. When the information is read, the time timer may be adjusted to match the time of RTC338. Then, the effect control device 300 may execute various processes by using the time timer instead of the RTC 338. By doing so, the number of processes for reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

In the RTC reading process, if the read time matches any of a plurality of predetermined times (first predetermined time, second predetermined time, ...), A predetermined effect may be executed, but a plurality of By drawing a lottery for the time interval of the predetermined time with a probability corresponding to the set value, the player can estimate the set value from this time interval. For example, the lottery may be performed so that the selection rate at long time intervals becomes smaller as the set value is larger. Further, the player can estimate the set value from the execution period of the predetermined effect by drawing a lottery for the execution period for executing the predetermined effect with a probability corresponding to the set value. For example, the lottery may be performed so that the selection rate for a long execution period becomes larger as the set value is larger.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects the operation signal of the effect button 25 by the player (the signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b), or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. The effect button input process is executed (B0010). continue,
The hall / player setting mode process for accepting operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal display by the person in charge of the game hall (game store) or the player is executed (B0011). In the hall / player setting mode processing, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes an effect point control process for adding or clearing the effect points (B0012). In the effect point control process, the effect points are added by executing the effect or operation for which the effect points are to be added, and at the end of the game so that the effect points can be carried over to the next game. For example, information including information on production points is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display the QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall / player setting mode processing. The player can estimate the set value from the added value by drawing a value (added value) to be added to the effect points with a probability according to the set value. For example, the lottery may be performed so that the selection rate of a large addition value increases as the set value increases.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating a random number such as an effect random number (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check process. (B0014). The details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

Next, the effect control device 300 updates various data according to the content to be displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41, or sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. The effect display editing process to be performed is executed (B0015). As for the drawing data set at this time, the image of the display device 41 can be updated without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete the drawing within the frame period of 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec). Then, the preparation for drawing in the display frame buffer is completed, and the drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B0016).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing (B).
0017). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B0017 is "N"), the process of B0017 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached, and if it is the frame switching timing (the result of B0017 is "Y"), the display device 41 is displayed. Instruct screen drawing (B0
018). Since the frame period of the present embodiment is 1/30 second, the frame is switched when the periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice, for example, every 1/60 second (1/2 of the frame period). .. The image may not be updated in 1/60 seconds, and the interval may be further increased.

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0019).

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a decoration control process for controlling a decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) including LEDs and the like (B0020). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling an effect device (board effect device 44, frame effect device) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B002).
1). In the movable body control process, for example, the accessory operation effect for driving the motor is set.

Then, when the effect control device 300 finishes the process of the above-mentioned B0021, the effect control device 300 returns to the process of B0008. After that, the processes from B0008 to B0021 are repeated.

[Receive command check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the details of the received command check process (B0014) in the above-mentioned main process (FIG. 36) will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the received command check process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the command number received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of command receptions is 0 (B1102). When the number of commands received is 0, that is, when there is no command received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "N"), there is no command to analyze, so the received command check process ends.

On the other hand, when the number of commands received is not 0, that is, when the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 is a command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of commands received (B1103)
), Copy the contents of the receive command buffer of RAM to the command area for analysis (B11)
04). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem even if the number of command received is subtracted before copying the contents in the buffer to the command area. Also, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, the effect control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (adds only 1) (B1105). The receive command buffer contains 32 received commands.
It is configured to store up to the number. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of the command read index 0 to 31, and here, the received commands are read in the order of the index and copied to the command area for analysis. When the copy to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the copy of the command for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and if the copy is not completed (the result of B1106 is "N". ”), The processing of steps B1104 to B1106 is repeated.

When the effect control device 300 receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is saved in the reception command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, the received commands are analyzed separately in the command area for analysis. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the command area for analysis, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, by always securing a free area without performing analysis directly in the received command buffer, it is possible to prepare for a large amount of commands received.

Subsequently, when the copy is completed, the effect control device 300 (the result of B1106 is "Y".
]), The received command content in the command area for analysis is loaded (B1107), and the received command analysis process for analyzing the content is executed (B1108). The details of the received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 38 below. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether or not the analysis of the command for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1110), and if the analysis is not completed (the result of B1110 is "N"), the step. The processing of B1107 to B1110 is repeated. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is "Y]), the received command check process is terminated.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the above-mentioned received command check process (FIG. 37) will be described. FIG. 38 shows the effect control device 30.
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the received command analysis processing executed by 0.

First, the effect control device 300 separates the upper byte of the received command as a MODE unit and the lower byte as an ACTION unit (ACT unit) (B1201). The commands transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 are the MODE unit (MODE command) and A.
It is composed of a CTION unit (ACTION command), and is usually continuously transmitted from a MODE unit indicating the type of command. Therefore, the upper and lower levels of the received command are M.
It is composed of an OD part and an ACTION part in this order.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit is in the normal range (B12).
02). That is, it is determined whether or not the value (value assigned as the command specification indicating the type) that can be taken by the MODE unit indicating the type of the command. Then, when the MODE unit is in the normal range (the result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION unit is in the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value (value assigned as the command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION unit indicating the content of the command (specific effect instruction, etc.). Then, when the ACTION section is in the normal range (B1203).
The result is "Y"), and the ACTION section for the MODE section determines whether or not the combination is correct (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the type of command specified by the MODE section. Then, if the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is "Y"), the command processing according to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE unit is within the range of the variable command (B1205). The variable command is a command for instructing a variable pattern of a special decorative symbol, and is a variable command (set in the variable start information setting process). And MODE
When the part represents a variable command (the result of B1205 is "Y"), the variable command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a variable command, the effect control device 300 is (B12).
The result of 05 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section is within the range of the hit command (B).
1207). The hit-type command is a command for instructing an operation (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) related to the effect during hitting. Interval command (set in process during interval opening), interval command (set in process during opening of big winning opening), ending command (set in processing during opening of big winning opening), small hit fanfare command, command during opening of small hit (small hit round command), Small hit end screen command (small hit ending command), etc. And so on. And when the MODE part represents a hit command, (
The result of B1207 is "Y"), the hit command process is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a hit command, the effect control device 300 is (B12).
The result of 07 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section is within the range of the symbol-based command (B).
1209). The symbol-based commands include a decorative special figure 1 command (A4018) and a decorative special figure 2 command (A4112) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. Then, when the MODE unit represents a symbol-based command (the result of B1209 is "Y"), the symbol-based command process is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a symbol-based command, the effect control device 300 is (B12).
The result of 09 is "N"), and then it is determined whether the MODE part is within the range of the one-shot command (B).
1211). Then, when the MODE unit represents a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "Y"), the single-shot command process is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a one-shot command, the effect control device 300 is (B12).
The result of 11 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE unit is within the range of the look-ahead symbol command (B1213). The look-ahead symbol command includes the above-mentioned look-ahead stop symbol command (FIG. 15).
There is A3014). Then, when the MODE part represents a look-ahead symbol command, (B).
The result of 1213 is "Y"), the look-ahead symbol system command processing is executed (B1214), and the reception command analysis processing is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a look-ahead symbol command, the effect control device 300 (
The result of B1213 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE unit is within the range of the look-ahead variable command (B1215). The look-ahead variation command includes the above-mentioned look-ahead variation pattern command (A3018 in FIG. 15). Then, when the MODE section represents a look-ahead variable command (the result of B1215 is "Y"), the look-ahead variable command process is executed (B1216).
), Ends the received command analysis process.

On the other hand, if the MODE unit does not represent a look-ahead variable command (the result of B1215 is "N"), the effect control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only in the test mode). Since there is a possibility, the received command analysis process is terminated. If the MODE section is not in the normal range (B1202 result is "N"), the ACTION section is not in the normal range (B1203 result is "N"), or AC for the MODE section.
Even if the TION unit is not the correct combination (the result of B1204 is "N"), the reception command analysis process is terminated.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the details of the one-shot command processing (B1212) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a procedure of one-shot command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a model designation command indicating the type of the gaming machine (B1301). Then, when the MODE section represents a model specification command (the result of B1301 is "Y"), the model setting process for setting the type of the gaming machine is executed (B).
1302), the one-shot command processing is terminated.

In the effect control device 300, when the MODE unit does not represent the model designation command (B1).
The result of 301 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents the RAM initialization command (B1303). And when the MODE part represents the command of RAM initialization, (
The result of B1303 is "Y"), the RAM initialization setting process for notifying the RAM initialization and the like is executed (B1304), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a command for recovering from a power failure when the MODE section does not represent a command for RAM initialization (the result of B1303 is "N"). (B1305). Then, when the MODE unit represents a command at the time of power failure recovery (the result of B1305 is "Y"), the power failure recovery setting process is executed (B1306), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the mode unit does not represent a command at the time of power failure recovery, the effect control device 300 (
The result of B1305 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents the customer waiting demo command (B1307). Then, when the MODE section represents a customer waiting demo command (B1)
The result of 307 is "Y"), the customer waiting demo setting process is executed (B1308), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

In the effect control device 300, when the MODE unit does not represent the customer waiting demo command (B).
The result of 1307 is "N"), and then the MODE section is decorated with the special figure 1 hold number command (A2917).
, A3207) is determined (B1309). Then, when the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is "Y"), the special figure 1 hold information setting process is executed (B1310), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

In the effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent the decorative special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is "N"), then the MODE section sets the decorative special figure 2 hold number command (A2).
It is determined whether or not it represents 917, A3203) (B1311). Then, when the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 2 hold number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the special figure 2 hold information setting process is executed (B1312), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents the probability information command when the MODE section does not represent the decorative special figure 2 hold number command (the result of B1311 is “N”). (B1313). Then, when the MODE part represents a probability information command, (B1
The result of 313 is "Y"), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a probability information command, the effect control device 300 is (B1).
The result of 313 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents an error / invalid command (B1315). In addition, as error / fraudulent commands, for example, fraud occurrence command (set by fraud & winning monitoring processing when fraud occurs), fraud release command (set by fraud & winning monitoring processing when fraud is cleared), There is a state off command (A2204) and a state on command (A2207). As a status on command, the glass frame open detection switch 63
There is a command indicating the generation of a signal from (glass frame opening error) or the signal generation from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) (main body frame opening error, front frame opening error). In addition, the status off command indicates that no error has occurred.

Then, when the MODE section represents an error / invalid command (the result of B1315 is "Y"), an error / invalid setting process for notifying or canceling the error or invalidity is executed ().
B1316), the one-shot command processing is terminated.

In the effect control device 300, when the MODE unit does not represent an error / invalid command (the result of B1315 is "N"), the MODE unit then issues a command for switching the effect mode (processing during special figure display). Etc.) is determined (B1317). Then, when the MODE unit represents a command for switching the effect mode (the result of B1317 is "Y"), the effect mode switching setting process is executed (B1318), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the effect control device 300 does not represent a command for switching the effect mode (the result of B1317 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit represents an out ball count command. (B1319). Then, when the MODE unit represents the out-ball number command (the result of B1319 is "Y"), the out-ball number reception processing is executed (B1320), and the single-shot command processing is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent the out-ball number command, the effect control device 300 is (B).
The result of 1319 is "N"), and then the MODE section is the count command (A3107, A3).
It is determined whether or not it represents the large winning opening count command of 111) (B1321). and,
When the MODE unit represents a count command (the result of B1321 is "Y"), the count information setting process is executed (B1322), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a count command, the effect control device 300 is (B).
It is determined whether or not the result of 1321 is "N") and the MODE unit represents the set value information command (probability set value information command) (B1323). The set value information command is in step A of FIG. 5B.
It is included in the command at the time of power failure recovery of 1035 and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1045. Further, as described above, in accordance with the command for ending the probability setting change in step A2421, the set value information command is issued to the game control device 10 at the end of the probability setting change.
It is transmitted from 0. Then, when the MODE section represents a set value information command, (B132)
The result of 3 is "Y"), the set value reception processing is executed (B1324), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. In the process of receiving the set value, the set value (probability set value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM, and necessary processing is executed.

When the MODE unit does not represent the set value information command, the effect control device 300 is (B).
The result of 1323 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents a setting change type command (B1325). As a setting change command, for example, a setting change instruction command (A1).
029), command for changing probability setting (A1041), command for changing probability setting value (A2)
415), there is a command (A2421) to end the probability setting change. Then, when the MODE unit represents a setting change system command (the result of B1325 is "Y"), the setting change system information setting process is executed (B1326), and the single-shot system command process is terminated. In the setting change information setting process, the contents of the setting change command are stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the command of the setting change instruction is received, in the setting change system information setting process, the setting change instruction display urging the player to change the setting is displayed on the display device 41. Further, when the command during the probability setting change is received, in the setting change information setting process, the setting changing display for notifying the player that the setting is being changed is displayed on the display device 41.

When the MODE unit does not represent a setting change command, the effect control device 300 is (
The result of B1325 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents a command of the setting confirmation system (B1327). As the command of the setting confirmation system, for example, there is a command (A2508) in which the probability setting value is being confirmed and a command (A2512) in which the probability setting value confirmation is completed. And MOD
When the E section represents a setting confirmation system command (the result of B1327 is "Y"), the setting confirmation system information setting process is executed (B1328), and the single-shot system command process is terminated. In the setting confirmation information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation command are stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the command for confirming the probability setting value is received, in the setting confirmation system information setting process, the setting confirmation display for notifying the player that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the display device 41.

Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents a symbol stop command (B1329). The symbol stop command includes, for example, a symbol stop command of special figure 1 and a symbol stop command of special figure 2. Then, when the MODE section represents a command to stop the symbol (the result of B1329 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the command of the MODE section is a normal command (". B1330).

If the command in the MODE section is a normal command (the result of B1330 is "Y").
, The effect control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special figure (B1331), sets the game state flag to the normal state after all the symbols are stopped (B1332), and ends the one-shot command process. In the process of B1332, as an example, the game state flag is set to the normal state, but depending on the timing when this process is executed, the game state flag is a flag of "changing", "big hit", and "small hit". Is set.

On the other hand, when the MODE part does not represent the command to stop the symbol (the result of B1329 is "N".
”) Or when the command in the MODE section is not normal (the result of B1330 is“ N ”).
The effect control device 300 ends the one-shot command processing.

[Read-ahead design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the details of the look-ahead symbol system command process (B1214) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process (FIG. 38) will be described. FIG. 40 shows the effect control device 30.
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the look-ahead symbol system command processing executed by 0.

First, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the latest hold information is the information of the special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start storage), for example, the latest received decorative special figure hold number command is the decorative special figure 1 hold number. It is determined whether or not it is a command (B1601). When the latest hold information is the information of special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is "Y"), the look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command) is set to the special figure 1 look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the number of special figure 1 hold. Save (B1602).

In the effect control device 300, when the latest hold information is not the information of the special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is "N"), that is, the latest received decorative special figure hold number command is the decoration special figure 2 hold number command. In this case, the look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command) is saved in the special figure 2 look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number (B1603).

After steps B1602 and B1603, the effect control device 300 sets a look-ahead variable command reception waiting flag indicating that the read-ahead variable command is waiting to be received (B160).
4). This is because the look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead variable command are set, and the game control device 100 transmits the look-ahead variable command following the look-ahead symbol command. After that, the look-ahead symbol command processing is terminated.

[Read-ahead variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the details of the look-ahead variable command process (B1216) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process (FIG. 38) will be described. FIG. 41 shows the effect control device 30.
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the look-ahead variable system command processing executed by 0.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the look-ahead fluctuation system command is waiting to be received (B1701). When the above-mentioned look-ahead variable command reception wait flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the read-ahead variable command is waiting to be received. If the read-ahead variable command is not waiting to be received (the result of B1701 is "N"), the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated. When waiting for reception of a look-ahead variable command (the result of B1701 is "
Y ”), clear the look-ahead variable command reception wait flag (B1702).

Next, the effect control device 300 (sub-board) has the latest hold information symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2).
Set the look-ahead variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of holds (B1703), and acquire the look-ahead variation command MODE section in the sub corresponding to the MODE section of the look-ahead variation command (B1703).
B1704). Next, the look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and the sub-internal look-ahead variation command ACT corresponding to the ACTION section (ACT section) of the look-ahead variation system command is set.
Acquire a part (B1706).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not both the converted MODE unit and the ACT unit (that is, the sub-inward look-ahead fluctuation command MODE unit and the ACT unit) are other than 0 (B1707).
.. If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to a command other than 0. MODE part after conversion, A
When both CT parts are other than 0 (the result of B1707 is "Y"), the converted MODE part and A
The converted command composed of the CT unit is saved in the latest hold information and the look-ahead fluctuation command area (special figure 1 look-ahead change command area or special figure 2 look-ahead change command area) corresponding to the number of holds (B1708). Then, the look-ahead command consistency check process is executed (B170).
9), it is determined whether or not the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is normal (B1710).
).

It should be noted that the time of the first half fluctuation corresponding to the MODE unit changes depending on the number of holds when the hold is changed and the display game is started. Holds vary When starting a display game, if there are no other holds, the first half will be longer, and if a new hold occurs and the number of holds is large, the first half will be shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first half variation changes, the MODE section of the received look-ahead variation command is converted into the sub-internal look-ahead variation command MODE section so that the internal command of the effect control device 300 can be handled in the same way.

Further, since the type of reach is not related to the number of holds, the latter half change corresponding to the sub-pre-reading change command ACT section does not depend on the number of holds. However, because there are different types of reach for the same system,
Supposing that the ACT section (value of the latter half fluctuation) of the look-ahead fluctuation system command is not converted, the effect control device 30
If 0 is used as it is, the number will increase and it will be difficult to check. For example, for normal reach
There are types such as normal reach -1 stop off and normal reach +1 stop off.
Therefore, by converting the ACT unit showing the reach of the same system into the same sub-pre-reading variation command ACT unit, the number is reduced and the burden of the check processing such as the pre-reading command consistency check processing is reduced.

Next, in the effect control device 300, when at least one of the converted MODE unit and the ACT unit (that is, the sub-inward look-ahead fluctuation command MODE unit and the ACT unit) is 0 (the result of B1707 is "N"), or , When the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is not normal (B171)
The result of 0 is "N"), and it is assumed that there is an abnormality in the converted command, and the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated.

In the effect control device 300, when the combination of the MODE unit and the ACT unit after conversion is normal (B).
The result of 1710 is "Y"), the hold information (latest hold information) to be read ahead is loaded from the look-ahead variable command area (B1711), and the look-ahead lottery process regarding the look-ahead effect of the latest hold is executed (B1712). The look-ahead effect includes, for example, a continuous advance notice effect (including a chance look-ahead effect), a look-ahead zone effect, and a hold change advance notice. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest hold look-ahead effect (hold change notice, etc.) occurs (B1713). When the latest hold look-ahead effect occurs (the result of B1713 is "Y"), the point information corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect is set (B1714).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the pre-reading effect (holding change notice, etc.) that occurs is an effect that immediately starts (B1715). When the generated look-ahead effect is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is "Y"), the display corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect is set (B1716). Then, the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the effect control device 300, when the latest hold look-ahead effect does not occur (the result of B1713 is "N"), or when the generated look-ahead effect does not start immediately (B171).
The result of 5 is "N"), as it is. Ends the look-ahead variable command processing.

[Design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the details of the symbol-based command processing (B1210) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a procedure of symbol-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 receives a symbol-based command (decorative special figure 1 command or decorative special figure 2).
The special figure type corresponding to the MODE part of the command) is set (B1801). The special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT) of the design command.
Set the symbol type corresponding to the combination of (part) and save it in a predetermined area such as RAM (B180).
2). Here, since the distribution ratio of the symbols changes between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the symbol type is set by using the table for each MODE. In addition, in this embodiment, the symbol type is a missed symbol, a 2R probability variation jackpot symbol (2R-A1 etc.) shown in FIG. 27, and a 2R normal jackpot symbol (2).
R-A2 etc.), 6R probability variation jackpot symbol (6R-A1 etc.), 6R normal jackpot symbol (6R-A2 etc.)
Etc.), 16R probability variation jackpot symbol (16R-A1 etc.), 16R normal jackpot symbol (16R-A2 etc.)
Etc.).

[Variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a procedure of variable command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 is a special figure type (special figure 1) of the received variable system command (variable command).
Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2) is undecided (B1901). When the special figure type is undecided (the result of B1901 is "Y"), the variable command processing is terminated. If the special symbol type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received variable command and symbol command is checked (B1902), and whether the variable command and symbol type are inconsistent. Is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency is a contradiction in performing the production, such as when a design command of a jackpot symbol is received even though a variable command of an outlier is received. When the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "Y")
, Ends variable command processing.

When the effect control device 300 does not match the symbol type with the variable command (the result of B1903 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines the variable pattern type from the variable command (variable command) (B1).
904) Executes a variable effect setting process for setting a variable effect, which is a variable effect (B19).
05). It should be noted that there are multiple effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the special figure changing is set in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of pre-reading effects of the continuous notice effect (the remaining number of continuous notice effects) is not 0, the number is updated by -1. (B1907)
).

[Variable effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the details of the variation effect setting process (B1905) in the variation system command process (FIG. 43) described above will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the variation pattern type is reachless variation (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). When the fluctuation pattern type is non-reach fluctuation (the result of B2001 is "Y"), the number of production points, the model code,
Set the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the special figure type, effect mode, and set value (probability set value) (B2002), and correspond to the MODE part of the variable command (variable command) and the number of pending special figure types. First half notice Get the address of the distribution group table (B200)
3). In the case of non-reach fluctuation, the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of holds increases, so the address of the table corresponding to the number of holds is acquired.

When the variation pattern type is not reachless variation (the result of B2001 is "N"), that is, the effect control device 300 is reachable variation, the effect control device 300 has a number of effect point points, a model code, a special figure type, and an effect mode. Set the first half advance notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and set value (probability set value) (B2004), and set the MODE part of the variable command (variable command) and the first half advance notice distribution group table corresponding to the variable pattern type. Get the address of (B2005).

After steps B2003 and B2005, the effect control device 300 draws a lottery for a notice that appears during the first half fluctuation (before reach) (B2006). The lottery probability of the notice depends on the set value. Next, set the second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of production points, model code, special figure type, production mode, symbol type, and set value (probability setting value) (B2007), and set the variable command. The address of the second half notice distribution group table corresponding to the ACT unit is acquired (B2008), and the notice lottery that appears during the second half fluctuation (during reach) is performed (B2009). The lottery probability of the notice depends on the set value. After that, the content of the variable effect corresponding to the MODE section and the ACT section of the variable command (variable command) is determined (B2010). From the variable commands, you can see the variable time and the main reach contents.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the lottery result of the advance notice (B2011). After that, the stop symbol setting process for determining the stop symbol of the decorative special symbol variation display game is executed according to the content of the variation effect such as the reach effect or the advance notice effect (B20).
12). Here, the decoration stop symbol is concretely determined, such as determining the looseness in the case of the out-of-order symbol.

Next, the effect control device 300 sets the display of the variable effect such as the reach effect (B2013).
), Set the display of the notice effect (B2014). Then, the pending decrease corresponding to the special figure type (
The display of the hold shift) is set, and for example, a display in which the hold display corresponding to the decorative special figure that fluctuates this time is reduced is set (B2015). Subsequently, a voice number that determines the effect mode (sound output mode) by the sound of the speaker and a decoration number that determines the effect mode by the light emission of the decoration device are set (B).
2016). The decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) has a plurality of decorative light emitting units (decorative LEDs, etc.) and emits light in a light emission mode (color, light emission timing, etc. of each LED) defined by a decoration number. ..

It is possible to set the voice number and the decoration number not only based on the effect content but also by drawing with a lottery probability according to the set value (probability setting value). In this way, the player can change the light emitting mode of the decorative device, that is, the light emitting mode of the decorative light emitting unit (LED) to the gaming machine 10.
You can enjoy guessing the set value (probability set value) of.

Next, the effect control device 300 sets the display of the decorative special map variation corresponding to the special map type (B).
2017), in addition to the above-mentioned first to third special symbols that change in the display device 41, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation related to the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol, identification information) is performed (B2018). note that,
The fourth symbol variation is the lamp display unit 1 of the above-mentioned lamp display device 80 provided in addition to the display device 41.
, 2 (LED).

[Hit command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the details of the hit system command process (B1208) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process (FIG. 38) will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a procedure of hit system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE unit of the received hit system command represents a fanfare (B2101). When the MODE part of the hit system command represents a fanfare (the result of B2101 is "Y"), that is, when the hit system command is a big hit fanfare command or a small hit fanfare command, the fanfare effect setting process for setting the fanfare effect. Is executed (B2102). The fanfare command includes information on the upper limit of the number of rounds for this big hit. Subsequently, the game status flag indicating the game status (P machine status) of the current gaming machine 10 is set to during fanfare (
B2103), the hit command processing is terminated. The upper limit of the number of rounds can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol command (decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section of the hit command represents a round when the MODE section of the received hit command does not represent a fanfare (the result of B2101 is "N") (the result of B2101 is "N"). B2104). When the MODE unit represents a round (the result of B2104 is "Y"), that is, when the hit system command is a round command or a small hit open command, the effect control device 300 executes the round effect setting process and is currently Set the game status flag indicating the gaming status (P machine status) of the gaming machine 10 in the round (B2105, B21).
06), the hit system command processing is terminated.

If the MODE section of the received hit command does not represent a round (the result of B2104 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section of the hit command represents an interval (the result of B2104 is "N"). B2107). When the MODE part represents an interval (B2107)
The result of is "Y"), that is, when the hit system command is an interval command, the effect control device 300 executes the interval effect setting process, and the game indicating the game state (P machine state) of the current game machine 10. Set the status flag to be in the interval (B2108, B2109), and end the hit command processing. There is no interval command when the big winning opening is opened only once in a small hit, that is, when the small hit is one round.

If the MODE part of the received hit command does not represent the interval (B2107)
The result is "N"), and the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit of the hit system command represents the ending (B2110). When the MODE part represents the ending (B21
When the result of 10 is "Y"), that is, when the hit system command is an ending command or a small hit end screen command, the effect control device 300 executes the ending effect setting process for setting the ending effect, and the current end effect setting process is executed. Ending is set in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 (B2111, B2112), and the hit system command processing is terminated.

If the MODE part of the received hit command does not represent the ending (B2)
The result of 110 is "N"), and the effect control device 300 ends the hit system command process without executing any process.

[Action / effect of the first embodiment]
According to the first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 satisfies the starting condition (for example, winning a prize in the starting winning opening).
A game control means (game control device 100) capable of displaying a variable display game for variable display of identification information on a display unit (for example, a first special figure variable display unit 51 or a second special figure variable display unit 52).
When the stop result of the variable display game is a special result, a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. The setting changing means (for example, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value changing switch 102) can change the setting related to the game condition (or the setting related to the game) when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 10. The game control means (game control device 100) can shift to a variable setting state in which the setting can be changed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 10, and when the power is cut off before shifting to the variable setting state. A predetermined display is displayed on the display unit regardless of the state of the gaming machine 10 (FIG. 34).

Therefore, in the variable setting state (setting is being changed), the setting is being changed or the gaming machine 1 is being changed by a predetermined display on the display unit for the special figure variation display game that is easy to see from the front of the gaming machine 10.
It can be suggested that 0 is a state in which a game (for example, a variable display game) cannot be played.
Even in the variable setting state, the state of the gaming machine 10 when the power is cut off is maintained, and the normal display (missing symbol, jackpot symbol) when the fluctuation is stopped is displayed on the display unit for the special figure fluctuation display game. Then, for example, if the front frame 12 (main body frame) is closed before the setting change is completed,
There is a possibility that it will be misunderstood that it is in a state where it can be played.

According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) displays a variable display game in which identification information is variablely displayed based on the establishment of a start condition, such as LED lamps D1 and D.
It can be displayed in 2). The gaming machine 10 includes a light emitting unit and a display device (collective display device 50) including another light emitting unit different from the light emitting unit. The game control means may blink all the light emitting units of the display device in the variable setting state in which the setting can be changed (FIG. 34F).
..

Therefore, in the variable setting state (setting is being changed), it is possible to clearly indicate on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which the gaming machine 10 cannot be played by displaying a display device (batch display device 50) different from the usual one. ..

According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) displays information suggesting that the setting is in the variable state (for example, the first special figure variation display) in the setting variable state (setting is being changed). It may be displayed on the unit 51 or the second special figure variation display unit 52) (FIG. 34B).

Therefore, in the variable setting state (setting is being changed), the gaming machine 10 is in a state where the gaming machine 10 cannot play by displaying a display unit different from the normal display on the display unit for the variable display game.
Can be clearly shown in front of.

According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) has a display unit (for example, a first special figure variation display unit 51 and a second special figure variation display unit 5) in a variable setting state (setting is being changed).
2) may be turned off (FIG. 34D).

Therefore, in the variable setting state (setting is being changed), the gaming machine 10 is displayed by displaying a different display (display different from when the variable display game is stopped) on the display unit for the variable display game.
Can be clearly shown on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the game cannot be played.

According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) displays the same display as the stop result (missing result) of the variable display game other than the special result (other than the big hit result) in the variable setting state (for example, the display unit (for example). , The first special figure variation display unit 51 or the second special figure variation display unit 52) may be displayed (FIG. 34C).

Therefore, it can be suggested in front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is not executing the game by performing a predetermined display on the display unit for the variable display game in the variable setting state (setting is being changed). Fluctuation display other than special result (other than big hit result) By displaying the stop result (missing result) of the game from the setting change, the data to be displayed on the display part for the variable display game is the initial at the end of the setting change. No need to set values.

[Second Embodiment]
A second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 55. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first embodiment. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first embodiment, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate.

In the second embodiment, when the parts identification information (first identification information) of the detachable parts (parts, members) 510 and the model identification information (second identification information) corresponding to the model of the gaming machine 10 do not match. , Notify as an error that there is a mismatch.

[Parts of gaming machines]
FIG. 46 shows how the removable parts 510 are attached to the gaming machine 10. The part 510 is assigned electrically readable part identification information. For example, the part 510 may be a plate-shaped member on which model information (model logo, etc.) of the gaming machine 10 to be attached is displayed, or may be a movable accessory constituting the frame effect device or the board effect device 44. A decorative member having an LED of the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 46 may be used. The parts 510 can be attached to the gaming machine 10 at the gaming ground because they interfere with the delivery to the gaming hall (game store), and an unfamiliar staff member may attach the parts 510 to the wrong model.

As shown in FIG. 46 (A), for example, when the part 510A for the model A is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10, no problem occurs. However, for example, as shown in FIG. 46 (B), a problem occurs when the part 510B for the model B is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10, so that the effect control device 300 is the speakers 19a, 19b and the display device. An error is notified via 41.

FIG. 47 is a schematic configuration diagram schematically showing a configuration example of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment. The game control device 100 transmits a model designation command indicating the model (type) of the game machine 10 to the effect control device 300 (A1035, A1045) when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on. The effect control device 300 receives a model designation command (B13) from the reference table (FIG. 55 described later).
Select and set the model identification information corresponding to 01). Further, the effect control device 300 compares the part identification information read from the parts 510 with the set model identification information. moreover,
When the part identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) do not match, the effect control device 300 notifies as an error that the parts identification information does not match.

The part 510 has an identification board 513 that holds the part identification information. Identification board 513
In, the part identification information is one or more wirings 519 (electric wires) to which a predetermined voltage is applied.
Set by. In FIG. 46, the wiring 519 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage via a pull-up resistor, but the pull-up resistor may not be provided. The power supply (voltage) to the part 510 is supplied from, for example, the effect control device 300 or the power supply device 400 when the part 510 is attached.

In FIG. 47, each of the plurality of wirings 519 (plurality of electric wires) is connected to a predetermined terminal among a plurality of (eight) terminals (ports) in the parallel serial conversion unit 516. In this way, a predetermined terminal to which a predetermined voltage is input is set as a bit having a value of "1", and a terminal to which a predetermined voltage is not input (wiring 519 is not connected) is set as a bit having a value of "0", for example, "0".
Part identification information such as "11111100" can be transmitted via the parallel serial conversion unit 516.

That is, the identification board 513 is assigned the part identification information as parallel data by the plurality of wirings 519. Then, the parallel serial conversion unit 516 converts the input part identification information (parallel data) into serial data and transmits the input to the effect control device 300 by serial communication (here, I ^2C ).

FIG. 48 shows another example of the identification substrate 513. In FIG. 48, the part identification information is set by the DIP switch 521. Each of the plurality of wires 519 is DIP switch 521.
As a result, a predetermined voltage or ground voltage is obtained, and information of each bit (“1” or “0”) of the part identification information is input to a plurality of (8) terminals (ports) in the parallel serial conversion unit 516. In the example of FIG. 48, the terminal connected to the wiring 519 in which the DIP switch 521 is turned on becomes the ground voltage (bit of the value “0”), and is connected to the wiring 519 in which the DIP switch 521 is turned off. The terminal has a predetermined voltage (a bit having a value of "1").

[Parallel serial converter]
FIG. 49 shows the configuration of the parallel serial conversion unit 516 when the parallel serial conversion unit 516 is a normal parallel serial conversion IC.

The parallel serial conversion unit 516 has a plurality of D-type flip-flops 516a (D-FF).
It has the configuration of a normal parallel serial conversion IC. Parallel serial conversion unit 51
Reference numeral 6 converts parallel data (for example, "01111100") as part identification information input from terminals 0 to 7 (ports 0 to 7) into serial data, and connects by serial communication (here, I ^2C communication). It is transmitted to the effect control device 300 via the line SDA (data line). The effect control device 300 has a master IC 300a for IC communication, and inputs clock signals for a plurality of D-type flip ^- flops 516a to the parallel serial conversion unit 516 via a connection line SCL (timing signal line).

The plurality of D-type flip-flops 516a (D-FF) constitute a shift register in which each bit data of the parallel data moves from right to left in synchronization with the clock signal. The bit data of each D-type flip-flop 516a at a certain clock timing moves to the adjacent D-type flip-flop 516a at the next clock timing. Each bit data of the parallel data is taken into a plurality of D-type flip-flops 516a at a certain clock timing, and is sequentially output as serial data from the leftmost D-type flip-flop 516a. That is, the output of the serial data is completed 8 clocks after the parallel data is captured.

[First modification of the identification board]
FIG. 50 shows a first modification of the identification board 513 of the part 510. In the first modification, the parallel serial conversion unit 516 of the identification board 513 is not a normal parallel serial conversion IC but an I ² CI / O expander 815 (slave IC) for input. I ² C for input
The I / O expander 815 connects ports 0 to 7 to the master IC 300a of the effect control device 300.
The part identification information input from is input as data.

The I ² CI / O expander 815 (slave IC) is connected to the transistor 830 connected to the connection line SDA, the filter 831 connected to the connection line SDA, the driver 832 connected to the connection line SDA, and the connection line SCL. Filter 833, bus controller 834,
And a reset signal generation circuit 839 is provided. In addition, another I ² CI / O expander 81
The bus monitoring WDT (watchdog timer) 840 for determining whether or not the connection line SDA is occupied by 5, and the I ² CI / O expander 815 itself determine whether or not the connection line SDA is occupied. It is equipped with a self-occupied WDT841 for the purpose of doing so.

The connection line SDA is a connection line for exchanging data signals between the master IC 300a of the effect control device 300 and the I ² CI / O expander 815 (slave IC), and functions as a data line. The connection line SCL is a connection line for inputting / outputting a clock signal used for data communication in the connection line SDA, and functions as a timing signal line.

The filter 831 is connected to the connection line SDA, removes noise from data (here, response signal, address data, etc.) input from the connection line SDA, and outputs the noise-removed data to the bus controller 834.

When the driver 832 outputs data (here, parts identification information, etc.) from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a, the transistor 83 sets the voltage at which the transistor 830 can operate.
Apply to 0.

A field effect transistor (FET) is used for the transistor 830 in order to suppress power consumption, the gate of the transistor 830 is connected to the driver 832, and the drain is a connection line SDA to which a predetermined voltage is applied by a pull-up resistor R. Connected to and the source is grounded.

The driver 832 connects the data (part identification information, etc.) to the master IC 300a, and the connection line SDA.
When outputting from, a voltage of a value at which the transistor 830 can operate is applied to the gate of the transistor 830 in order to pass a current through the transistor 830 between the drain and the source. Then, the driver 832 outputs data from the connection line SDA by repeatedly changing the voltage of the connection line SDA from HIGH to LOW.

The filter 833 is connected to the connection line SCL, removes noise from the data input from the connection line SCL, and outputs the noise-removed data to the bus controller 834.

Further, a unique address is set in the I ² CI / O expander 815 by the address setting terminals A0 to A3 provided in the I ² CI / O expander 815, and is input to the bus controller 834. Further, the address for resetting the I ² CI / O expander 815 is also preset.

The unique address (8 bits) of the I ² CI / O expander 815 is composed of a fixed address portion consisting of upper 3 bits and a variable address portion consisting of lower 5 bits. A predetermined value (for example, "110") is preset in the fixed address portion and cannot be changed by the I ² CI / O expander 815.

The variable address section includes a 4-bit I ² CI / O expander address corresponding to the pattern set in the terminals A0 to A3 of the I ² CI / O expander 815, and a write request as to whether the data is a read request. It is composed of 1-bit R / W identification data indicating whether or not it is. In the input I ² CI / O expander 815, "1" is usually registered in the R / W identification data in response to the read request.

In the bus controller 834, the address of the data input from the connection line SDA is I ² CI.
It is determined whether or not it matches the unique address set in the / O expander 815, and if it matches, data (part identification information) is output from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a. A predetermined voltage is obtained by connecting a plurality of wirings 519 to a predetermined port (here, 5) out of eight ports 0 to 7 (terminals 0 to 7) in the I ² CI / O expander 815. Is applied. Therefore, 8-bit part identification information (for example, "01111100") is input to the bus controller 834 as parallel data via the eight ports 0 to 7. A predetermined port to which a predetermined voltage is input corresponds to a bit having a value of "1", and other terminals (wiring 519 is not connected) correspond to a bit having a value "0".

Further, in the bus controller 834, the address of the data input from the connection line SDA is I.
² It is determined whether or not it matches the reset address set in the CI / O expander 815, and if it matches, the data is taken in as initialization instruction data (initialization command RES), and the I ² Initialize the CI / O expander 815.

In addition, the number of changes of the signal level of the connection line SCL from LOW to HIGH reached 8 times, and 8 times.
After the bus controller 834 outputs the bit data (part identification information), the connection line S
When the signal level of CL changes from HIGH to LOW, the master IC 300a outputs a response signal from the connection line SDA to the bus controller 834. Further, it is confirmed that the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from LOW to HIGH, and when the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from HIGH to LOW again, the connection line SDA is released. That is, the master IC 30
0a outputs a response signal at the timing when the number of changes of the signal level of the connection line SCL from LOW to HIGH becomes 9 times.

The reset signal generation circuit 839 has a Vcc terminal connected to the connection line Vcc that supplies power to the I ² CI / O expander 815, and a RES that receives a reset signal from the outside.
The ET terminal is connected.

The reset signal generation circuit 839 is powered on to the I ² CI / O expander 815.
When the voltage rises to a predetermined value, a reset signal is generated, and the generated reset signal is input to the bus controller 834 to initialize the voltage.

Therefore, when the harness is removed, the connection line Vcc for supplying power for logic is temporarily disconnected, and when the harness is reinserted, the power supply is restored and the reset signal generation circuit 83.
9 will output a reset signal. A harness is a bundle of a connection line Vcc for supplying power for logic, a connection line SDA, a connection line SCL, a ground line GND, and the like.

The bus monitoring WDT840 is used to detect that another I ² CI / O expander 815 occupies the connecting line SDA. The bus monitoring WDT840 is connected to the reset signal generation circuit 839, and when a predetermined time elapses after the connection line SDA is occupied,
The I ² CI / O expander 815 is activated by operating its own reset signal generation circuit 839.
Is initialized.

The self-occupied WDT841 is a connection line SD by itself (I ² CI / O expander 815).
Used to detect the occupancy of A. When the self-occupied WDT 841 operates continuously for a certain period of time, the self-occupied WDT 841 generates a reset signal in the reset signal generation circuit 839 to initialize the I ² CI / O expander 815.

[Second modification of the identification board]
FIG. 51 shows a second modification of the identification board 513 of the part 510. In the second modification, the parallel serial conversion unit 516 of the identification board 513 is not a normal parallel serial conversion IC, but an I ² CI / O expander 815 (slave IC) for output. Further, in the second modification, the part 510 is provided with an effect device and can perform an effect. The production device is, for example, an LED (
It is a decorative device such as a light emitting part), but it may be a movable accessory.

The I ² CI / O expander 815 for output is the master IC 300 of the effect control device 300.
Based on the effect control data received from a, the output state (here, the light emitting state) of the effect device (here, LED, light emitting unit) provided in the part 510 is controlled via the ports 0 to 15 on the output side. The I ² CI / O expander 815 is the I ² CI / O expander 815.
The unique address (8 bits) of is used as the part identification information and is input to the master IC 300a of the effect control device 300.

The I ² CI / O expander 815 for output is the I ² CI / O expander 81 for input.
5 (FIG. 50) shows a driver 83 connected to each port 0 to 15 (terminals 0 to 15) on the output side of the output setting register 835, the output controller 836, and the I ² CI / O expander 815.
7. Transistors 838A to 838P connected to each port 0 to 15 have been added. Therefore, the same configuration as the I ² CI / O expander 815 (FIG. 50) for input will be omitted as appropriate.

The filter 831 is connected to the connection line SDA, removes noise from data input from the connection line SDA (here, effect control data, response signal, etc.), and outputs the noise-removed data to the bus controller 834.

When the driver 832 outputs data (here, part identification information, response signal, etc.) from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a, the driver 832 applies a voltage at which the transistor 830 can operate to the transistor 830.

When the driver 832 outputs data (part identification information, response signal, etc.) from the connection line SDA, the transistor 830 can operate at the gate of the transistor 830 in order to pass a current between the drain and the source of the transistor 830. Apply a value voltage. Then, the driver 832 outputs data from the connection line SDA by repeatedly changing the voltage of the connection line SDA from HIGH to LOW.

In the bus controller 834, the address of the data input from the connection line SDA is I ² CI.
It is determined whether or not it matches the unique address set in the / O expander 815, and if it matches, data (part identification information, response signal, etc.) is output from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a. The part identification information output to the master IC 300a is I ² as described above.
Whether it is a unique address (8 bits) of the CI / O expander 815, or separately set identification information different from the unique address (whether it is set via a port as in the first modification, or a storage unit (memory). ) Is memorized. From the bus controller 834 to the master IC
It is not always necessary to output the part identification information to the 300a, and even if the effect control device 300 is configured to recognize the address of the transmitted data as the part identification information when the response signal from the bus controller 834 is received. good.

Further, in the bus controller 834, the number of changes of the signal level of the connection line SCL from LOW to HIGH reaches 8 times, and after the effect control data of the 8th bit is taken in from the connection line SDA, the signal level of the connection line SCL is changed. When changing from HIGH to LOW, the response signal is sent to the connection line SD.
Output from A to the master IC 300a. Furthermore, it was confirmed that the signal level of the connection line SCL changed from LOW to HIGH, and the signal level of the connection line SCL changed from HIGH to LO again.
When it changes to W, the connection line SDA is opened. That is, the bus controller 834 outputs a response signal at the timing when the number of changes of the signal level of the connection line SCL from LOW to HIGH becomes 9 times.

The operation mode of the I ² CI / O expander 815 and the output states of ports 0 to 15 are set in the output setting register 835. When the bus controller 834 fetches the initialization instruction data from the connection line SDA and the I ² CI / O expander 815 is initialized, the output setting register 835 has a current flowing through all the ports 0 to 15. It is set to the initial state so that it does not exist.

The output controller 836 is based on the data set in the output setting register 835.
A production device (here, LE) connected to each port 0 to 15 via a port driver 837.
The output state (here, the light emitting state) of the effect device is actually controlled by passing a current through (D, the light emitting unit) (output of lighting data). When the bus controller 834 captures the effect control data from the connection line SDA, this output state is updated to the content specified in the effect control data.

That is, the output setting register 835 is set based on the effect control data received from the master IC 300a, and when the stop condition is received, the output state of each port 0 to 15 is updated and reflected in the effect device.

When a current is passed through the port, the driver 837 applies a voltage to the transistor so that the transistors 838A to 838P connected to the port through which the current flows can operate.

The gates of the transistors 838A to 838P are connected to the driver 837, the drain is connected to the port terminal connected to the connection line to which the voltage for operating the effector is applied, and the source is grounded.

If the voltage applied to the gates of the transistors 838A to 838P is equal to or higher than the predetermined value for operating the transistor 838, the predetermined voltage applied to the gate from the drive power supply is grounded through the drain of the transistor 838. By the current flowing to
The output state of the effect device (LED in this case) connected to the port terminal can be controlled.

[Third modification of the identification board]
FIG. 52 shows a third modification of the identification board 513 of the part 510. In the third modification, the parallel serial conversion unit 516 of the identification board 513 does not exist, and the effect control device 3 is used as part identification information (for example, “01111100”) in which a predetermined voltage is 8 bits from a plurality of wirings 519.
It is directly input to the input port 300b (ports 0 to 7) provided with 00. Input port 300
The part identification information input to b is the main control microcomputer (CPU) via the data bus 340.
) Taken into 311. A predetermined terminal to which a predetermined voltage is input corresponds to a bit having a value of "1", and other terminals (wiring 519 is not connected) correspond to a bit having a value "0".

Then, when the part identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) do not match, the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 notifies as an error that the parts do not match. Execute the process to be performed.

[Main processing (effect control device)]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process (main program) according to the second embodiment. The main process is executed by the effect control device 300 (main control microcomputer 311) when the power is turned on (restored) to the gaming machine 10.

The main process of the second embodiment is a part collation process (B50) with respect to the main process of FIG.
Since 00) is added and other processes are the same as those in FIG. 36, the same step numbers are added and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the parts collation process, the parts identification information read from the parts 510 is compared with the model identification information corresponding to the model designation command (B1301), and the parts identification information (first identification information) is compared.
When the model identification information (second identification information) does not match, an error notification is issued to warn.
In the present embodiment, the parts collation process (B5000) is the reception command check process (B00).
It is executed after 14).

The parts collation process (B5000) is first executed when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and then repeatedly executed by the loop process from steps B0008 to B0021.

[Parts collation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the parts collation process (B5000) in the main process (FIG. 53)
) Will be described in detail. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the parts collation process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 updates -1 if the collation time timer (timekeeping means) is not 0 (B5001). The collation time timer reads the part identification information and collates it with the model identification information (
It determines the collation timing or collation time interval to be compared). Then, it is determined whether or not the collation time timer is 0 (B5002). When the collation time timer is not 0 (B5)
Since the result of 002 is "N") and it is not the collation timing, the parts collation process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the collation time timer is 0 (the result of B5002 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 reads the part identification information from the part 510 because it is the collation timing (B5).
003). Then, the part identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) are compared (verified) (B5004). The model identification information is set based on the model designation command as information indicating the type (model) of the gaming machine in the model setting process (B1302) when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on.

The effect control device 300 stores the reference table of FIG. 55 in the memory (for example, the program ROM 321). In the reference table of FIG. 55, the model designation command and the model identification information are associated with each other. In this way, the effect control device 300 holds the model identification information (second identification information) corresponding to the model of the gaming machine.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the part identification information and the model identification information match (B5005). When the parts identification information and the model identification information do not match (the result of B5005 is "N"), the error notification notifies that the parts identification information and the model identification information do not match (B5006). That is, it notifies that the part 510 is attached to the wrong model that does not conform to (corresponds to) the part 510. The effect control device 300 may execute error notification (warning) by generating sound from the speakers 19a and 19b or displaying characters on the display device 41. Further, here, the effect control device 300 may notify the correct model conforming to (corresponding to) the part 510 together with the error notification by referring to the reference table of FIG. 55. The correct model is a model that has the same model identification information as the part identification information of the part 510.

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 sets the initial value of the collation time timer (B5007), and ends the parts collation process. Therefore, the parts identification information and the model identification information are periodically compared (verified) each time the time corresponding to the initial value of the collation time timer elapses, starting from the time when the power is turned on. The initial value of the collation time timer is, for example, a time corresponding to several minutes, but is not limited to this.

On the other hand, in the effect control device 300, when the part identification information and the model identification information match (B5).
Since the result of 005 is "Y") and the part 510 is attached to the correct model that conforms to (corresponds to) the part 510, the initial value of the collation time timer is set without notifying the error (B50).
07), the parts collation process is terminated.

By the above parts collation process, for example, when the part 510B for the model B is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10 (FIG. 46 (B)), the model identification information (for example, "01111").
100 ") and the part identification information (for example," 01111101 ") do not match, and error notification is executed. Along with the error notification, the correct model (model B) compatible with the part 510B may be notified. On the other hand, for example, when the part 510A for the model A is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10 (FIG. 46 (A)), the model identification information (for example, "01111100").
And the part identification information (for example, "01111100") match, and the error notification is not executed.

As a modification, the effect control device 300 has a memory (for example, a program ROM 321).
) Does not store the reference table of FIG. 55, and model identification information corresponding to one type of model (second).
Only the identification information) may be retained. Also in this case, the effect control device 300 compares the part identification information read from the part 510 with the held model identification information, and compares the part identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information). ) Is inconsistent, it is notified as an error that it is inconsistent.

[Action / effect of the second embodiment]
According to the second embodiment, the game control means (game control device 1) capable of executing a game (for example, a variable display game in which identification information is variablely displayed based on the establishment of a start condition) in the game machine 10.
00) and an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing an effect related to the game. The gaming machine 10 includes removable parts (parts 510) to which electrically readable first identification information (parts identification information) is assigned. The effect control means holds the second identification information (model identification information) corresponding to the model of the gaming machine 10, reads the first identification information of the parts, and secondly.
Compared with the identification information, when the first identification information (part identification information) and the second identification information (model identification information) do not match, the mismatch is notified.

Therefore, even if the wrong part (part 510) is attached, it can be appropriately notified.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine 10 from operating due to a mistake in attaching the parts (parts 510) in the gaming field (game store).

According to the second embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, the effect control means is at least the gaming machine 10.
When the power is turned on, the first identification information of the part (part 510) is read and compared with the second identification information, and when the first identification information and the second identification information do not match, it is notified that the first identification information does not match. do.
Therefore, even if the wrong part (part 510) is attached, it can be notified when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine 10 from operating due to a mistake in mounting the parts (parts 510) in the gaming field (game store) at an early stage.

According to the second embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, the effect control means receives information about the model of the gaming machine 10 from the gaming control means when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and corresponds to the model of the gaming machine 10. Select the second identification information (model identification information) from the table (reference table) and select the parts (parts (reference table).
The first identification information of the part 510) is compared with the selected second identification information. Therefore, the gaming machine 10
If the wrong part (part 510) is attached to various models of the above, this can be notified. It can also inform you of the correct model to which the wrong parts should be installed.

According to the second embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, in the part (part 510), the first identification information (part identification information) can be set by one or a plurality of wirings pulled up to a predetermined voltage, so that it can be easily set. The first identification information can be set.

According to the second embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, in the parts (parts 510), the first identification information can be set by the DIP switch, so that the first identification information can be easily set.

[Third Embodiment]
A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 71. The configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first embodiment. The third embodiment relates to a fixed display period of the probability set value. The fixed display period is a period for displaying the fixed value of the probability set value.

[Game control device according to the third embodiment]
First, with reference to FIG. 56, the timing of external information output at the time of setting change according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the game control system of the game machine 10 according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 of the third embodiment is similar to the game control device 100 of the first embodiment, but the probability set value display device 143 attached to the game control device 100 is incorporated in the status display device 152. It has a shape. That is, the state display device 152 also functions as the probability set value display device 143 of the first embodiment. Further, the game control device 100 of the third embodiment is equipped with a RAM initialization switch 112 (RAM clear switch) in addition to the set value change switch 102 (set value change button).

[Transition state when power is turned on]
FIG. 57 is a diagram illustrating a transition state when the power of the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment is turned on (power restoration). Depending on the on / off state of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 at the time of turning on the power, the mode shifts to four states (modes) as shown in FIG. 57.

First, when the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on when the power is turned on, the setting variable state (setting change state, setting change) in which the probability setting value can be changed after the RAM is cleared. Mode) (A1036-A1041 in FIG. 5A). In the RAM clear here, the clear process of step A1036 is executed, and A1021 of FIG. 5C is executed.
The clear area # 2 is designated as the RAM area to be cleared by the RAM clear start address 2 set in. In the third embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, in steps A1024 and A1028 of FIG. 5A, it is determined whether or not both the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are on. Further, unlike the first embodiment, in step A1025 of FIG. 5A, the RAM initialization switch 11 is used instead of the set value change switch 102.
Determine if 2 is on.

Next, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is off when the power is turned on, the state shifts to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed. The transition to the setting confirmation state is performed in step A2 of the probability setting value confirmation process (FIG. 11) during the timer interrupt process after the normal power recovery (A1031-A1035) is performed.
It can be executed with 504-A2508.

Further, when the power is turned on, the setting key switch 93 is off, but the RAM initialization switch 11 is used.
When 2 is turned on, the RAM initialization process (R) in step A1042-1045.
(AM clear processing) is executed, and as shown in FIG. 5C, the clear area # 2 is designated as the RAM area to be cleared by the RAM clear start address 2, and the RAM is cleared. note that,
In RAM clear, the clear area # 3 may be designated as the RAM area to be cleared by the RAM clear start address 3.

If the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the power is turned on, the power is simply restored.

[Probability setting value change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the probability set value change process (A130) in the timer interrupt process.
The details of 8) will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability set value change process according to the third embodiment.

In the probability setting value changing process of the third embodiment, the processing positions of steps A2412, A2414, and A2415 are changed with respect to the probability setting value changing process of FIG. 10, and steps A2411, A
Since the process of 2413 is deleted and the other processes are the same as those in FIG. 10, the same step numbers are assigned and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of step A2416, the game control device 100 loads the value in the working probability setting value area and saves it in the probability setting value area when the setting key switch 93 is in the off state (the result of A2416 is “Y”). (A2412). By turning off the setting key switch 93, the set value is determined, and the values 0 to 5 corresponding to the determined probability set value are stored in the probability set value area.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a probability setting value changed flag indicating that the probability setting value has been changed (A2414), and issues a command for changing the probability setting value indicating that the probability setting value has been changed. It is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A2415). After that, the process of steps A2417 to A2421 is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment, the process returns to the main process (FIG. 5B), and the process proceeds to the process of step A1049. Here, step A2420
By saving the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value in the probability setting value display area, the determined probability setting value is the state display device 152 in which the probability setting value display device 143 is incorporated.
Can be displayed on.

[Processing when receiving set value]
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the set value reception processing (B1324) in the one-shot command processing.
) Will be described in detail. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the set value reception processing according to the third embodiment.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received command is a normal command (B5201). If the received command is not a normal command (the result of B5201 is "N"), the processing at the time of receiving the set value is terminated.

When the received command is a normal command, the effect control device 300 (B520).
The result of 1 is "Y"), the information indicating the current date and time (current time) is acquired from RTC338 (or the timer for time) (B5202), and whether or not the received command is the setting value information command at the end of setting change. (B5203). What is the setting value information command at the end of setting change?
This is a setting value information command transmitted from the game control device 100 together with a command for ending the probability setting change in step A2421 of the probability setting value change process. If the received command is not the setting value information command at the end of setting change (the result of B5203 is "N"), the processing at the time of receiving the setting value is terminated.

When the received command is a set value information command at the end of setting change (the result of B5203 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 stores the set value in the memory in association with the current date and time (current time). (B5204), and the processing at the time of receiving the set value is terminated. The memory here is FeRAM 323 that can hold the stored contents even if power is not supplied.

If the received command is not the setting value information command at the end of setting change, that is, the setting value information command (A1035) at the time of power failure recovery or the setting value information command (A1045) at the time of RAM initialization (A1045). The result of B5203 may be "N"), and the set value (probability set value) may be stored in the RAM 322 without being associated with the current date and time.

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the segment LED editing process (A1) in the timer interrupt process.
The details of 314) will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the segment LED editing process according to the third embodiment. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold display 54, the special figure 2 hold display 55, and the normal figure hold display 56 provided in the batch display device 50,
Settings related to driving of the segment LEDs constituting the first game state display unit 57, the second game state display unit 58, the third game state display unit 59, and the round display unit 60 are performed. Although not shown in FIG. 60, in the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the variable display unit 53 for the normal figure variable display game are controlled to emit light, except for the variable display game. In this case, the light emission control (light-off control, lighting control, blinking control) of the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the variable display unit 53 is executed in the same manner as the light emission control of the hold display 54-56. You can do it. In the variation display game, the control for causing the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the variation display unit 53 to emit light (blink) is executed by the symbol variation control process (FIG. 29).

First, the game control device 100 updates the blinking control timer by +1 (A9201), and determines whether or not the output is on timing (A9202). When the specific bit of the blinking control timer is 1, it is determined that the output is on timing. In the present embodiment, since the specific bit is bit 5, a blinking cycle of 128 ms can be created (see FIG. 2B).

When the game control device 100 is output on timing (the result of A9202 is "Y").
, When the normal figure hold number display table 1 is set (A9203) and the output is not on timing (
The result of A9202 is "N"), the normal figure hold number display table 2 is set (A9204), the display data corresponding to the normal figure hold number is acquired, and the segment of the normal figure hold display 56 (lamps D15, D16). Save to the area (A9205). If the number of holdings is 0 to 2, the display data will be the same in both the tables 1 and 2 of the number of holdings, so the normal figure holding indicator 56 will not blink, but if the number of holdings is 3-4, it will be normal. Since the display data of the figure hold number display table 1 and the display data of the normal figure hold number display table 2 are different, the normal figure hold indicator 56 blinks (see FIG. 2B).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the output is on timing (A920).
6). When the output is on timing (the result of A9206 is "Y"), the special figure 1 hold number display table 1 is set (A9207), and when the output is not on timing (the result of A9206 is "N"), the special figure 1 hold is set. The number display table 2 is set (A9208), display data corresponding to the number of special figure 1 hold is acquired, and the display data is saved in the segment area of the special figure 1 hold display 54 (lamps D11, D12) (A9209).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the output is on timing (A921).
0). When the output is on timing (the result of A9210 is "Y"), the special figure 2 hold number display table 1 is set (A9211), and when the output is not on timing (the result of A9210 is "N"), the special figure 2 is held. The number display table 2 is set (A9212), display data corresponding to the number of special figure 2 hold is acquired, and the display data is saved in the segment area of the special figure 2 hold display 55 (lamps D13, D14) (A9213).

After that, the game control device 100 sets a round display LED display table in which the display mode on the round display unit 60 (lamps D3-D7) is defined (A9214), and acquires display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer. And save it in the segment area of the round display unit 60 (A9215).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the game state display table 1 in which the display mode on the second game state display unit 58 (lamp D9), the third game state display unit 59 (lamp D17), and the like is defined (the game control device 100). A9216). Further, the display data corresponding to the game state display number is acquired and saved in the segment area of each game state display unit (A9217).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the game state display table 2 in which the display mode on the first game state display unit 57 (lamp D8) is defined (A9218). Further, the display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area of the first game state display unit 57 (A9219). After that, the segment LED editing process is terminated.

[Timing chart of the fixed display period of the probability setting value when changing the setting]
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described. FIG. 61 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting change according to the third embodiment.

After the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on at time x1, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on with the RAM initialization switch 112 turned on at time x2, the gaming machine 10 is turned on.
The state (game machine state) becomes the setting change mode (setting variable state), and the undetermined probability setting value (undetermined value) is displayed on the status display device 152 (probability setting value display (undetermined value)). ). In the probability set value display (undetermined value) of the status display device 152, the undetermined probability set value is displayed blinking. Further, in response to the setting change mode being set at the time x2, the display device 41 displays a display of a predetermined display mode indicating that the setting is being changed. Batch display device 50
The (first display device), the lamp display device 80 (fourth symbol), and the decorative device are maintained in the off state. The decoration device includes a frame decoration device 18 such as decoration devices 18a and 18b, and an upper effect unit 4.
In addition to the board decoration device 46 such as 0c, it has a light emitting unit (LED) for decoration. Further, the decorative device may be in a dimmed state instead of being turned off, or only a light emitting portion other than a specific color may be turned off.

When the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x3, the gaming machine state becomes a game-enabled state in which the game can be played, and the status display device 152 (second display device) has a fixed probability setting value (fixed value).
Is displayed (probability setting value display (confirmed value)). In the probability set value display (confirmed value) of the status display device 152, the confirmed probability set value is lit and displayed. When the gaming machine is in the playable state, the set value cannot be changed or confirmed. Further, in response to the game being enabled at time x3, the identification information of the off-target symbol is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 and / or the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50 (this special feature). (Figure display), a customer waiting demo is displayed on the display device 41. In addition, display units other than the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50 (
Lamps D3-D18) may also be blinked to display a customer waiting display. The lamp display device 80 and the decorative device are normally displayed. When the probability set value is determined at time x3, a notification may be given by sound or voice to notify that the probability set value has been determined.

The time x4 is a time when a predetermined time (predetermined period, for example, 2 to 3 sec) has elapsed from the time x3. When the time x4 is reached, the status display device 152 (second display device) ends the probability set value display and starts the full blinking display, and repeats the all-off display and all-on display of all segments at predetermined time intervals. .. The full blinking display of the status display device 152 is executed by using the blinking control timer used in the segment LED editing process of FIG. 60, and is the same as the blinking display of the display unit of the batch display device 50 (the above-mentioned customer waiting display). It may be synchronized with the same blinking cycle.

The time x4 is not limited to when a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 sec) has elapsed from the time x3, but also when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is closed or when the touch switch signal of the operation handle 24 is detected. good. In this way, when switching from the setting change state to the game-enabled state in which the set value cannot be changed, the set value confirmed by the status display device 152 is set for a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 s).
ec) Since it becomes possible to confirm, it is possible to see the confirmed set value without re-entering the setting confirmation mode after changing the setting, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency of the game hall manager.

The time x5 is a time when a predetermined time (predetermined period, for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed from the time x4. When the time x5 is reached, the status display device 152 ends the all blinking display and starts the performance display (feature ratio display), and the bonus ratio is displayed. In addition, instead of displaying the information on the bonus ratio on the status display device 152, the information on the ball ejection rate, the number of ejected balls, and the base value (the ball ejection rate in the normal game state) may be displayed (ball ejection rate). Rate display, number of ejected balls display, base value display). As described above, the bonus ratio and the payout rate (including the base value) are derived based on the number of prize balls obtained by winning, and are performance information indicating the performance of the gaming machine. Then, the status display device 152 can execute the performance display for displaying the performance information.

The probability set value display (unconfirmed value) from time x2 is displayed as blinking, and the probability set value display (confirmed value) of the status display device 152 from time x3 is displayed as lit. The display may be exchanged so that the probability set value display (unconfirmed value) is lit and the probability set value display (confirmed value) is blinking.

[Example of display screen of display device when changing settings]
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 (third display device) at the time of setting change (setting change mode, setting variable state) according to the third embodiment. In FIG. 62, along with the display screen of the display device 41, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c of the decoration device are also shown above the display screen.

As shown in FIG. 62 (sa), the effect control device 300 receives the command for which the probability setting is being changed (A1041), and the display screen of the display device 41 indicates that the setting is being changed. 721 is displayed. Further, as described above, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are turned off during the setting change. In addition, the effect control device 300 may perform a notification indicating that the setting is being changed by sound or voice together with the setting changing display 721.

In FIG. 62 (), the display device 41 corresponds to the state in which the game can be played after the setting is changed.
The customer waiting demo screen 722 is displayed on the display screen of. When the game becomes available, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are normally displayed, and as shown in black in FIG. 62, a part of the upper effect unit 40c lights up or blinks according to the customer waiting demonstration. .. As described above, the lamp display device 80 includes the lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) that execute variable display (blinking) as the fourth symbol (fourth special symbol), and the start storage number of each special symbol variable display game. Since it is composed of a lamp display unit 3-6 (LED) for notification, it is turned off in the normal display (off display), but a part of it may be turned on or blinked according to the customer waiting demo.

FIG. 62 (S) shows the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3202) or the special drawing 1 fluctuation start processing (A32).
This is the display screen of the display device 41 when the customer waiting demo is completed and the special figure variation display game (variation display game) is started according to 06). Customer waiting demo screen 722 shown in FIG. 62
Is hidden, and the variable display area 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B, middle area 610) is hidden.
In C), the decorative first symbols A to C are displayed in a variable manner. Further, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are partially lit or blinking in accordance with the special figure variation display game.
In the hold digestion area 640, the special figure change hold display 643 (starting memory display, special figure digestion hold display) corresponding to the special figure change display game being executed (during digestion) is displayed. Hold display unit 630
Displays the pending first start memory and second start memory. For example, when the special figure variation display game is started after the customer waiting demonstration, the hold display unit 630 has no pending first start memory or second start memory as shown in FIG. 62 (S). ..

[Modification example of the timing chart of the fixed display period of the probability setting value when the setting is changed]
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, a modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting change (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described. FIG. 63 is a timing chart showing a variation example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting change according to the third embodiment. In the following description of FIGS. 63, 64, 66 and 67, the description overlapping with FIG. 61 will be omitted as appropriate.

As described above, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at the time x3 and the gaming machine state is switched from the setting change mode to the game-enabled state, the status display device 152 starts blinking completely.

Then, the time x4'after a predetermined time (predetermined period, for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed from the time x3.
Then, the status display device 152 switches the display from all blinking to the probability set value display (confirmed value). The status display device 152 starts the performance display (feature ratio display and ball output rate display) at a time x 5'when a predetermined time (predetermined period, for example, 2 to 3 sec) has elapsed after switching the display to the probability set value display. Then, the character ratio is displayed. In this way, by turning off the setting key switch 93 and making the status display device 152 all blink in response to the setting change mode being made playable, the game hall management that the setting is confirmed. Can be clearly shown to the person. After that, the set value confirmed by the probability set value display is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 sec).
The game hall manager can confirm the fixed set value as it is, and can improve the work efficiency.

As in FIG. 61, after displaying the probability set value, all blinking may be performed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec) at time x 5', and then the performance display may be started.

[Second modification of the timing chart of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change]
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, a second modification example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting change (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described. FIG. 64 is a timing chart showing a second modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting change according to the third embodiment.

As described above, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at the time x3 and the gaming machine state is switched from the setting change mode to the game-enabled state, the status display device 152 starts displaying the probability set value.

Then, at the time x4 when a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 sec) has elapsed from the time x3, the status display device 152 switches the display from the probability set value display to the notification display. The notification display is a display for notifying that the setting has been confirmed, as will be described later in FIG. 65. After switching the display to the notification display, the status display device 152 starts the performance display (feature ratio display and ball ejection rate display) at the time x5 when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed, and displays the bonus ratio. indicate.

At time x3, before displaying the probability set value (determined value) on the status display device 152, all blinking or notification display may be performed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec). Further, at the time x3, if the notification display is to be performed before the probability set value is displayed (fixed value) on the status display device 152, the time x4 to the time x5 is performed after the probability set value is displayed (fixed value). Instead of displaying the notification, all blinking may be performed.

[Display mode when changing the settings of the status display device]
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the setting of the state display device 152 according to the second modification of the third embodiment is changed.

First, FIG. 65 (a) shows a display mode of the status display device 152 when the power is turned off by the time x2 of FIG. 64, and shows four 7 segments (point portions) of the status display device 152. 8 segments) are all turned off when included.

FIG. 65B is a display mode of the state display device 152 when the probability set value display (undetermined value, confirmed value) is displayed from the time x2 to the time x4, and is the display mode of the left end of the state display device 152. The current probability setting value (for example, "6") is displayed in the digit 3, and the 7 segments (digit 2, digit 1, digit 0) other than the digit 3 are turned off. The current probability setting value (for example, "6") displayed in the leftmost digit 3 of the status display device 152 is blinking in the probability setting value display (undetermined value) from time x2 to time x3. The probability set value display (confirmed value) from x3 to the time x4 is a lighting display.

FIG. 65C is a display mode of the state display device 152 when the notification is displayed from the time x4 to the time x5. The upper and lower bars indicating that the probability set value is confirmed are displayed in the digits 0 to 3 of the status display device 152. The notification display displayed on the digits 0 to 3 of the status display device 152 is not limited to the display by the upper and lower bars, and may be displayed in a display mode different from the probability set value and the performance display.

FIG. 65 (d) is a display mode of the state display device 152 whose performance is displayed after the time x5. As shown in FIG. 65 (d), the status display device 152 has the latest predetermined number (for example, 10,000 shots).
The ball ejection rate (for example, "b1.35") with respect to the number of ejected balls is displayed as a performance display. It should be noted that the overall ball ejection rate from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present on the status display device 152 (for example, FIG. 1).
The "bL.35") shown in 02, the base value, and the accessory ratio may be displayed, and these displays may be switched and displayed at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 to 3 sec).

[Third modification example of the timing chart of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change]
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, a third modification example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described. FIG. 66 is a timing chart showing a third modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting change according to the third embodiment.

As described above, after the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x3, time x4'
When the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) or the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3206) is performed in', the stop display is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50. This special figure display (display of identification information) starts variable display from the out-of-order symbol, and the special figure variable display game (variable display game) is started. At the same time, on the display screen of the display device 41, the customer waiting demonstration ends, and the decorative special figure variation display game (variation display game) starts. In response to the start of the special figure variation display game of the batch display device 50 (first display device) and the display device 41 (third display device), the lamp display device 80 has a special figure variation display game (variation display) using the fourth symbol. The game) and the holding number display are started, and the decorative device displays the effect corresponding to the effect of the special figure variation display game.

Then, at the time x5'' when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed from the time x4'',
The status display device 152 ends all blinking and starts performance display (character ratio display and ball ejection rate display). In this way, it is possible to display information about the game at an early stage by starting all blinking and performance display in response to the start of the special figure fluctuation display game without waiting for the elapse of a predetermined time. ..

It should be noted that the status display device 152 is subjected to the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) or the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3206), that is, the normal variable winning device 37 or the starting winning opening 3.
Not limited to the mode in which all blinking is started when the game ball is won in 6, but all when the game ball is won in the general winning opening 35 or when the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34. You may start blinking. Further, similarly to the above-mentioned example in FIG. 61, all blinking may be started when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is closed or when the touch switch signal of the operation handle 24 is detected.

[Fourth modification of the timing chart of the fixed display period of the probability setting value when the setting is changed]
Next, with reference to FIG. 67, a fourth modification example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting change (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described. FIG. 67A is a timing chart showing a fourth modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting change according to the third embodiment.

When the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on at time x2, the gaming machine state is changed to the setting change mode, and the batch display device 50, the lamp display device 80, and the decoration device of the fourth modification start all blinking. At that time, the blinking cycle of the batch display device 50 is controlled by the segment LED editing process of FIG. 60, and the blinking cycle of the lamp display device 80 and the decorative device is also controlled by the batch display device 50.
It is set to be the same as the blinking cycle of, and the blinking timing of each device is synchronized.
The game control device 100 may send a command to the effect control device 300 to synchronize the blinking timing between the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device controlled by the effect control device 300 and the batch display device 50. When the status display device 152 blinks to display the probability set value, the blinking of the status display device 152 is controlled by using the blinking control timer used in the segment LED editing process, and the batch display device 50 is used. The blinking timing may be synchronized with the blinking timing of the status display device 152.

As shown in FIG. 34F, all the blinking displays of the batch display device 50 may be performed by all the display units (light emitting unit, LED lamps D1-D18), and the display unit 51 for the special figure variation display game. , 52 (LED lamps D1 and D2) may be used alone. Further, the LED lamps (for example, LED lamps D3-D18) other than the display units 51 and 52 (D1 and D2) for the special figure variation display game may be used to perform full blinking display of the batch display device 50.

Then, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at the time x3, the gaming machine state is changed from the setting change mode to the game-enabled state, and the batch display device 50, the lamp display device 80, and the decorative device end all blinking. When the time x3 is reached, the identification information of the out-of-order symbols is stopped and displayed on the batch display device 50 (this special figure display), and the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device are normally displayed. In addition, the fixed probability setting value (fixed value) is displayed on the status display device 152 (probability setting value display).
On the display screen of the display device 41, the setting changing display ends and the customer waiting demo starts.

Subsequently, when a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 sec) elapses from the time x3 and the time x5'''is reached, the status display device 152 ends the probability set value display (fixed value) and performs the performance display (feature ratio display). And the payout rate display) is started. As described above, in the state display device 152 according to the fourth modification, the state display device 152
After finishing the probability setting value display (fixed value), the performance display (feature ratio display and ball output rate display) is displayed immediately by omitting all blinking, so the game hall manager can change the setting and then the ball output rate. Etc. can be confirmed at an early stage. By the time x5''', the batch display device 50 and the display device 41
The special figure fluctuation display game (variation display game) is started, the lamp display device 80 plays the special figure fluctuation display game (variation display game) and the holding number display by the fourth symbol, and the decoration device plays the special figure fluctuation display game. The display corresponding to the effect of is performed (display corresponding to the effect).

[Timing chart of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting confirmation]
Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state) will be described. FIG. 68 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the confirmation display period of the probability set value at the time of setting confirmation according to the third embodiment.

After the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on at time x11, RA at time x12
When the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on with the M initialization switch 112 turned off, the state of the gaming machine 10 (game machine state) becomes the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state), and the status display device 15
The confirmed probability setting value (confirmed value) is displayed in 2 (probability setting value display). Then, a stop symbol is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 as shown in FIG. 69, which will be described later (stop symbol display). When the gaming machine state is in the setting confirmation mode, the batch display device 50, the lamp display device 80, and the decorative device are, for example, in a fully lit state in which all segments and LEDs are fully lit (some lighting states). May be). Further, the batch display device 50 may display the stop symbol of the identification information of the previous special figure variation display game in the setting confirmation mode. Further, when shifting to the setting confirmation mode, the stop symbol displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 becomes the stop symbol of the identification information of the previous special figure variation display game.

When the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x13, the gaming machine status is changed from the setting confirmation mode to the game-enabled state, and the performance display (feature ratio display and ball ejection rate display) is displayed on the status display device 152.
Is displayed. Further, in response to the game machine state being changed to the game-enabled state at time x13, the symbol (identification information) displayed immediately before (when the power is cut off) is displayed as this special figure on the batch display device 50 (when the power is cut off). This special figure display (immediately before display pattern)). Then, a customer waiting demonstration is started on the display screen of the display device 41, and the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device are normally displayed. In this way, when the setting confirmation state is switched to the game-enabled state, the performance information can be immediately displayed as the performance display on the status display device 152 (second display device), so that the work efficiency of the game hall manager can be improved. Can be improved.

Although the performance display is immediately displayed on the status display device 152 at time x13, a predetermined time (for example, 0. 5 sec) All blinking may be performed. In this way, by displaying on the status display device 152 a display (full blinking display) in a mode different from the probability setting value and the performance display between the setting confirmation mode and the playable state, the game hall manager can perform. It will be easier to know more reliably that the game has been switched to the playable state.

[Example of display screen of display device when changing settings]
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 (third display device) at the time of setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state) according to the third embodiment. In FIG. 69, along with the display screen of the display device 41, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c of the decoration device are also shown above the display screen. In the following description of FIGS. 69 and 71, the description overlapping with FIG. 62 will be omitted as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 69 (se), the effect control device 300 receives the command during the probability setting confirmation (A2508, B1327) to fully turn on the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c of the decorative device. As described above, the lamp display device 80 and the decorative device have different light emission modes from those during the setting change (FIG. 62) during the setting confirmation. The effect control device 300 is
Along with all lighting of the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c, notification (by sound or the like) indicating that the setting is being confirmed may be performed. On the other hand, on the display screen of the display device 41, the stop symbol (stop result) of the identification information of the previous special figure variation display game is displayed, and the display mode is such that it is not known that the setting is being confirmed.

In FIG. 69 (so), the display device 41 corresponds to the fact that the game is ready after the setting is confirmed.
The customer waiting demo screen 722 is displayed on the display screen of. When the game becomes playable, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are normally displayed.

FIG. 69 (ta) shows the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3202) or the special drawing 1 fluctuation start processing (A32).
This is the display screen of the display device 41 when the customer waiting demo is completed and the special figure variation display game (variation display game) is started according to 06). Similar to FIG. 62 (su), the customer waiting demo screen 722
Is hidden, the decorative first symbols A to C are variablely displayed in the variable display area 620, and the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are turned on or blinked according to the special figure variable display game.

[Modification example of the timing chart of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting confirmation]
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, a modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state) will be described. FIG. 70 is a timing chart showing a variation example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability set value at the time of setting confirmation according to the third embodiment. In the following description of FIG. 70, the description overlapping with FIG. 68 will be omitted as appropriate.

As described above, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on with the RAM initialization switch 112 turned off at the time x12, the gaming machine state is switched to the setting confirmation mode. In the setting confirmation mode of this modification, on the display screen of the display device 41, for example, as will be described later in FIG. ,
It is a display mode that shows that the setting is being confirmed (setting confirmation display (setting history display)). In addition, the confirmed set value is displayed on the status display device 152 (probability set value display (confirmed value)).
The lamp display device 80 and the decorative device start all blinking. The batch display device 50 is maintained in the off state. The setting confirmation display is not limited to the setting history display, and may be any display mode that indicates that the setting is being confirmed, and may indicate that the setting is being confirmed, for example, by characters or the like. In addition to the setting confirmation display, it may be notified by sound or voice that the setting is being confirmed.

After that, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x13, the gaming machine state changes from the setting confirmation mode to the game-enabled state, and the display screen of the display device 41 ends the setting confirmation display (setting history display). Start a customer waiting demo. In response to the game machine state being made playable at time x13, the status display device 152 has a performance display (character ratio display and ball ejection rate display).
Is displayed, and the symbol (identification information) displayed immediately before (when the power is cut off) is displayed on the batch display device 50 as the special symbol (this special symbol display (immediately displayed symbol)). Further, the lamp display device 80 and the decorative device are normally displayed.

[Example of display screen of display device when changing settings]
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a modified example of the display screen of the display device 41 at the time of setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state) according to the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 71 (se'), the effect control device 300 receives the command during the probability setting confirmation (A2508, B1327), and the setting confirmation display 7 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41.
23 is displayed. The setting confirmation display 723 is a display that can list the setting history of the probability setting values so far. For example, as shown in FIG. 61 (se'), the setting history number, date, changed setting contents, etc. are displayed in a list. The date. As described with reference to FIG. 59, each time the effect control device 300 receives the setting value information command at the end of the setting change (the result of B5203 is "Y"), the setting value and the setting change date and time are fixed. FeRAM323 in association with (date and time of end of setting change)
It is stored in (B5204). Therefore, the effect control device 300 reads the set value and the setting change date / time from the FeRAM 323, and displays a list of the setting history of the probability set value on the setting confirmation display 723. The lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c of the decorative device all blink during the setting confirmation mode.

In FIG. 71 (so'), the display device 4 corresponds to the fact that the game is ready for play after the setting is confirmed.
The customer waiting demo screen 722 is displayed on the display screen of No. 1, and the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are normally displayed.

FIG. 71 (ta') shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the customer waiting demo ends and the special figure variation display game (variation display game) starts, as in FIGS. 62 (su) and 69 (ta). Is. As for the display screen of the display device 41, the customer waiting demo screen 722 is hidden, the decorative first symbols A to C are variablely displayed in the variable display area 620, and the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are displayed in a special figure variable display game. It becomes an effect mode that lights up or blinks according to.

[Action / effect of the third embodiment]
In the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the display result of the variable display game (special figure variable display game) that variablely displays the identification information (identification symbol, this special figure) is a special result (big hit result mode, big hit stop symbol, A control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a special game state that imparts a game value to the player when the special result mode is obtained is provided. The gaming machine 10 is provided in the gaming area 32, and has a winning area (general winning opening 35, starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, special variable winning device 39 large winning opening) in which a game ball can be won. When a ball wins in the winning area, a payout control means (payout control device 200) capable of paying out the number of prize balls determined for each winning area and a first display device (collective display) capable of displaying a display related to the game. Device 50) and setting changing means (setting changing device 42, RAM) capable of changing setting values (setting value, probability setting value) related to game conditions.
Initialization switch 112), set value, and performance information derived based on the number of prize balls obtained by winning (feature ratio, ball ejection rate for the latest predetermined number of ejected balls, overall ball ejection rate). , Base value) and a second display device (status display device 152) capable of displaying. The control means is a setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state) in which the setting value can be changed by the setting change means.
In response to this, the display of the first display device is changed to a predetermined display mode (for example, off display, all blinking display), and the set value cannot be changed by the setting change means from the setting change state to the game-enabled state. Correspondingly, the set value confirmed on the second display device can be displayed for a predetermined period (predetermined time, for example, 2 to 3 sec).

According to such a gaming machine 10, when the setting value is switched from the setting change state to the game-enabled state in which the set value cannot be changed, the set value confirmed by the second display device can be confirmed for a predetermined period (predetermined time), so that the game can be played. It is possible to improve the work efficiency of the place manager.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the control means (game control device 100) is changed from the setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state) to the game-enabled state.
A signal related to the game (for example, a detection signal when a game ball that has won a prize in the normal variable winning device 37, the starting winning opening 36, or the general winning opening 35) is detected by the set value confirmed in the second display device (status display device 152). , A signal indicating that the game ball has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34, a signal of the front frame opening detection switch 64, a touch switch signal of the operation handle 24) is displayed until it is detected. According to such a gaming machine 10, the performance information is displayed when a signal related to the game is detected, so that the gaming field manager can confirm the performance information immediately after changing the setting.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the display result of the variable display game (special figure variable display game) that variablely displays the identification information (identification symbol, this special figure) is a special result (big hit result mode, big hit stop symbol, A control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a special game state that imparts a game value to the player when the special result mode is obtained is provided. The gaming machine 10 is provided in the gaming area 32, and has a winning area (general winning opening 35, starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, special variable winning device 39 large winning opening) in which a game ball can be won. When a ball wins in the winning area, a payout control means (payout control device 200) capable of paying out the number of prize balls determined for each winning area and a first display device (collective display) capable of displaying a display related to the game. Device 50) and setting confirmation means (setting key switch 92, R) that can confirm the setting values (setting value, probability setting value) related to the game conditions.
AM initialization switch 112), set value, and performance information derived based on the number of prize balls obtained by winning (feature ratio, ball ejection rate for the latest predetermined number of ejected balls, total ball ejection) It is provided with a second display device (status display device 152) capable of displaying a rate (rate, base value) and. The control means displays the display of the first display device in a predetermined display mode (for example, full lighting display, previous time) in response to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the setting value can be confirmed by the setting confirmation means. (Display of the stop symbol of the identification information of the game), and the performance information is displayed on the second display device in response to the fact that the set value cannot be confirmed by the setting confirmation means. Can be displayed.

According to such a gaming machine 10, when the setting confirmation state is switched to the game-enabled state in which the set value cannot be confirmed, the performance information can be immediately displayed on the second display device, so that the game hall manager can display the performance information immediately. Work efficiency can be improved.

Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment has a setting changing means (setting change) that can change the setting value (setting value, probability setting value) when the setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state) is set. The device 42 and the RAM initialization switch 112) are further provided. Control means (game control device 10)
0) corresponds to the setting confirmation state, and the display when the display of the first display device (batch display device 50) is changed to the setting change state (probability setting value display) or the display related to the game. Is in a different mode (for example, full lighting display). According to such a gaming machine 10, since the display mode of the first display device is different between the setting confirmation state and the setting change state, the game hall manager can easily set the setting confirmation state and the setting change state. It is possible to distinguish between them and improve work efficiency.

Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment has a third display device (display device 41) capable of displaying an effect related to a variable display game (special figure variable display game), and a display of the effect on the third display device. It is provided with an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of controlling the above. The production control means is
Corresponding to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode), the history of setting change is displayed on the third display device. According to such a game machine 10, even if the first display device (batch display device 50) is not in a display mode that indicates that the setting is confirmed, the game hall manager can use the third display device.
It can be seen from the display device that the setting has been confirmed, and the setting history can be confirmed.

The control means (game control device 100) changes the display mode of the first display device (batch display device 50) to the immediately preceding variable display game (special figure variation) in response to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode). The display result (stop symbol, identification information) of the display game) is displayed. According to such a gaming machine 10, since the display mode of the first display device is different between the setting confirmation state and the setting change state, the game hall manager can easily set the setting confirmation state and the setting change state. It is possible to distinguish between them and improve work efficiency. Further, since it is not necessary for the first display device to perform a dedicated display mode in the setting confirmation state, it is possible to suppress the processing load and the amount of data by that amount.

The control means (game control device 100) provides performance information (feature ratio, latest) to the second display device (state display device 152) in response to the change from the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) to the game-enabled state. Immediately displays the payout rate, the total payout rate, and the base value for the predetermined number of ejected balls. According to such a gaming machine 10, the gaming field manager can immediately confirm the performance information by changing from the setting confirmation state to the game-enabled state, so that the work efficiency can be improved.

The control means (game control device 100) has changed the display of the second display device (status display device 152) to the setting confirmation state in response to the change from the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) to the game-enabled state. The display is different from the display of the time (probability set value display) or the performance information (feature ratio, ball ejection rate for the latest predetermined number of ejected balls, total ball ejection rate, base value), and the second After changing the display of the display device to a different mode, the performance information is displayed on the second display device. According to such a gaming machine 10, immediately after the game becomes playable, a display having a mode different from these displays is displayed second.
Since it is displayed on the display device, it becomes easier for the game hall manager to more reliably grasp that the game has been switched to the playable state.

[Fourth Embodiment]
A fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to third embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to third embodiments, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate.

FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the game control system according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an address of an input port in the game control device 100 according to the fourth embodiment and a signal input to each input port.

The game control system in the fourth embodiment is basically the same as that in the third embodiment (FIG. 56), but there are some differences as follows.

In the third embodiment, the setting key switch 93, the setting value change switch 102, and the RAM initialization switch 112 are all connected to the same input port (input port 123) (FIG. 56).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 72, in the fourth embodiment, the RAM initialization switch 112 is connected to the input port 123, and the setting value change switch 102 and the setting key switch 93 are connected to the input port 124. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112, the setting value change switch 102, and the setting key switch 93 are different from the third embodiment in that they are connected to different input ports.

As described above, when the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on when the power is turned on, the setting shifts to the variable setting state (see FIG. 57).

At that time, in the third embodiment, the game microcomputer 111 constituting the game control device 100 is
RAM initialization switch 11 from input port 123 by designating the address of input port 123
The on signal of 2 and the on signal of the setting key switch 93 are acquired.

On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the gaming microcomputer 111 has the address (8) of the input port 123.
1H, FIG. 73) is specified to acquire the ON signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 from the input port 123, and the address of the input port 124 (82H, FIG. 73) is specified to be the input port 124.
The ON signal of the setting key switch 93 is acquired from.

That is, in the fourth embodiment, the input ports (122, 123, 124) from which the on-signal is acquired as described above may be different from each other. For example, a game microcomputer 111
Does not specify the address of the input port 124 (82H, FIG. 73) to acquire the ON signal of the RAM initialization switch 112, but the address of the input port 123 (82H, FIG. 73) to acquire the ON signal of the setting key switch 93. 81H, FIG. 73) is not specified.

As shown in FIG. 73, input port 122 (address: 80H (hexadecimal notation)), input port 123 (address: 81H (hexadecimal notation)), input port 124 (address: H82).
(Hexadecimal notation)) have different addresses from each other.

Further, various signals (on signal, off signal) are assigned to each input port so as to be input. In the same input port, various signals can be identified by the position of the bit (b0-b6). By increasing or decreasing the number of bits, the number of signals that can be connected to one input port can be increased or decreased.

In addition, in the following, negative logic (whether or not there is an abnormality in the signal, whether or not there is a switch operation, etc.)
For example, when the signal is off, there is an abnormality or there is an operation) and positive logic (when the signal is on, there is an abnormality or there is an operation) is mixed, but it is unified to either negative logic or positive logic. May be good.

The input port 122 (80H) has, for example, a frame radio wave invalid signal (b0), a payout busy signal (b1), a payout abnormality status signal (b2), a shoot ball out switch signal (b3), an overflow switch signal (b4), and the like. The touch switch signal (b5) and the out ball detection switch signal (b6) are input. In addition, various signals including the following are described in the first embodiment.

The frame radio wave invalid signal (b0) indicates that a frame radio wave error has occurred if it is on (High: 1), and indicates that it is normal (no abnormality) if it is off (Low: 0). There is.

The payout busy signal (b1) indicates that the payout command transmission is prohibited when it is on (High: 1), and indicates that the payout command transmission is possible when it is off (Low: 0).

The payout abnormality status signal (b2) indicates that there is an abnormality in the payout when it is on (High: 1), and indicates that it is normal (no abnormality) when it is off (Low: 0).

The shoot ball out switch signal (b3) indicates that the shoot ball is out when it is on (High: 1), and indicates that it is normal (no abnormality) when it is off (Low: 0). ..

The overflow flow switch signal (b4) indicates that it is in the overflow state when it is on (High: 1), and indicates that it is normal (no abnormality) when it is off (Low: 0).

The touch switch signal (b5) indicates that the operation handle 24 (FIG. 3) is touched if it is on (High: 1), and indicates that it is not touched if it is off (Low: 0). There is.

The out-ball detection switch signal (b6) indicates that an out-ball is detected when it is on (High: 1), and indicates that an out-ball is not detected when it is off (Low: 0). There is. In addition, a configuration for detecting a launching ball may be applied instead of a configuration for detecting an out ball.

In the input port 123 (81H), for example, a panel radio wave sensor signal (b0), an abnormality detection signal (b1), a magnetic sensor signal (b2), a glass frame opening detection switch signal (b3), and a main body frame opening detection switch signal ( b4), RAM initialization switch signal (b5), power failure monitoring signal (b6)
) Is entered.

When the panel radio wave sensor signal (b0) is on (High: 1), it indicates normal (no abnormality), and when it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that a panel radio wave error has occurred.

When the abnormality detection signal (b1) is on (High: 1), it indicates that an abnormality has occurred related to the abnormality detection signal (first embodiment), and when it is off (Low: 0), it is normal (no abnormality). It shows that.

When the magnetic sensor signal (b2) is on (High: 1), it indicates that it is normal (no abnormality), and when it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that a magnetic error has occurred. (FIG. 72) shows that it was detected.

If the glass frame open detection switch signal (b3) is ON (High: 1), the glass frame 1
5 (FIG. 1) indicates that the glass frame open detection switch 63 (FIG. 72) has detected that it is in the closed state, and Off (Low: 0) indicates that it has detected that it is in the open state. There is.

If the main body frame open detection switch signal (b4) is ON (High: 1), the front frame open detection switch 64 (FIG. 72) detects that the main body frame (front frame 12, FIG. 1) is in the closed state. If it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that the open state is detected.

The RAM initialization switch signal (b5) indicates that the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off (not pressed) state when it is on (High: 1), and is on (Low: 0) when it is off (Low: 0). It indicates that it is in the (pressed) state (setting changeable transition state).

When the power failure monitoring signal (b6) is on (High: 1), it indicates that it is normal (no abnormality), and when it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that a power failure has occurred.

The input port 124 (82H) has, for example, a gate switch signal (b0), a winning port switch signal (b1), a large winning port switch signal (b2), a starting port 1 switch signal (b3), and a starting port 2 switch signal ( b4), the setting value change switch signal (b5), and the setting key switch signal (b6) are input.

If the gate switch signal (b0) is on (High: 1), the normal start gate 34 (High: 1)
It indicates that the gate switch 34a (FIG. 72) has detected the game ball passing through FIG. 2), and if it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that it has not been detected.

If the winning opening switch signal (b1) is ON (High: 1), the general winning opening 35 (FIG. 2).
) Is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (FIG. 72), and is turned off (L).
If it is ow: 0), it means that it has not been detected.

If the big winning opening switch signal (b2) is on (High: 1), the game ball that has won the big winning opening (special variable winning device 39) is the big winning opening switch 39a (count switch 39a).
(FIG. 72) indicates that it has been detected, and if it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that it has not been detected.

If the start port 1 switch signal (b3) is on (High: 1), it indicates that the start port 1 switch 36a has detected that the game ball has won a prize in the start winning port 36, and is off (Low: 0).
) Indicates that it has not been detected.

If the start port 2 switch signal (b4) is on (High: 1), the normal variable winning device 3
It indicates that the start port 2 switch 37a has detected that the game ball has won a prize in 7, and it is turned off (Lo).
If it is w: 0), it indicates that it has not been detected.

The set value change switch signal (b5) indicates that the set value change switch 102 is in the off (not pressed) state when it is on (High: 1), and is on (Low: 0) when it is off (Low: 0). It indicates that it is in the pressed state.

If the setting key switch signal (b6) is ON (High: 1), the setting key switch 9
3 indicates an off state (setting change prohibition state), and if it is off (Low: 0), it indicates an on state (setting change allowable state).

Here, when the setting key switch signal (b6) input to the input port 124 when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on is ON (Low: 0) (setting change allowable state), the input port 1
By turning on (Low: 0) the RAM initialization switch signal (b5) input to the 23, the setting changeable transition state is set, and the setting value can be changed by operating the setting value change switch 102.

Among the above signals, the signals related to the setting change are the setting value change switch signal input to the input port 124, the setting key switch signal input to the input port 124, and the input port 123.
The RAM initialization switch signal is input to, and each signal can be arbitrarily input to any of the input port 122, the input port 123, and the input port 124.

However, if the switch is connected so that the setting value change switch signal, setting key switch signal, and RAM initialization switch signal are input to the same input port, the same setting will be made when a malicious player or the like illegally changes the setting. There is a risk that the fraud can be easily done just by crafting the input port of.

Therefore, the setting value change switch signal (setting value change switch 102), the setting key switch signal (setting key switch 93), and the RAM initialization switch signal (RAM initialization switch 1).
It is preferable that at least one of 12) is designed to input to another input port.

Alternatively, it is preferable to design the setting key switch signal (setting key switch 93) and the RAM initialization switch signal (RAM initialization switch 112) to be input to different input ports.

The setting key switch signal (setting key switch 93) and the setting value change switch signal (setting value change switch signal).
It is also preferable that the setting value change switch 102) is designed so as to input to the same input port. As a result, the RAM initialization switch 112 becomes, for example, the front frame open detection switch 64.
It is connected to the same input port 123 as. Therefore, the setting key switch 93
If the game control device 100 of the fourth embodiment is mounted by eliminating the wiring from the setting value change switch 102 to the input port 124, the game machine can be operated as a game machine having no setting change function. Therefore, the versatility of the game control device 100 can be enhanced.

[Action / effect of the fourth embodiment]
As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment has at least two switches (any two of the setting key switch 93, the RAM initialization switch 112, and the setting value change switch 102).
The setting change means (setting key switch 93, RAM initialization switch 112, setting value change switch 102) that can change the setting value corresponding to the setting related to the game, and the result of the game can be controlled based on the setting value. It is provided with a control means (gaming microcomputer 111). Signals from the two switches are input to the control means (gaming microcomputer 111) via different input ports (for example, input port 123 and input port 124).

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment allows the setting change setting means (gaming microcomputer 111) in which the setting value according to the setting related to the game is set and the setting value setting means (game microcomputer 111). Setting permission / rejection switching means (setting key switch 93) that can be switched to the state and setting change prohibited state, and setting value setting means (game microcomputer 111) can be changed by operating under the setting change permission state. It is provided with a setting changeable transfer means (RAM initialization switch 112). The setting permission / rejection switching means (setting key switch 93) and the setting changeable transition means (RAM initialization switch 112) are set value setting means (game) via different input ports (for example, input port 123 and input port 124). Microcomputer 1
It is connected to 11).

With the above configuration, a switch related to setting change (setting permission / rejection switching means (setting key switch 9)
3) Since the setting changeable transition means (RAM initialization switch 112)) are connected to different input ports, it is possible to prevent a malicious player from illegally changing the settings.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the setting value setting means (game microcomputer 111) in which the setting values according to the settings related to the game are set, and the set value setting means (game microcomputer 111).
The setting change permission state (setting key switch 93) that can be switched between the setting change allowable state and the setting change prohibition state, and the setting value setting means (game microcomputer 111) can be changed by operating under the setting change allowable state. Setting changeable transition means (RAM initialization switch 112) and setting operation means (setting value change) that can be operated to change the setting value for the setting value setting means (gaming microcomputer 111). A switch 102) is provided. The setting permission / rejection switching means (setting key switch 93), the setting changeable transition means (RAM initialization switch 112), and the setting operation means (setting value changing switch 102) are input ports (input ports 122-12).
It is connected to the set value setting means (game microcomputer 111) via 4). At least one of the setting permission / rejection switching means (setting key switch 93), the setting changeable transition means (RAM initialization switch 112), and the setting operation means (setting value changing switch 102), and the rest are different from each other. It is connected to an input port (for example, input port 123, input port 124).

With the above configuration, a switch related to setting change (setting permission / rejection switching means (setting key switch 9)
3) Since at least one of the setting changeable transition means (RAM initialization switch 112) and the setting operation means (setting value change switch 102) is connected to another input port, malicious players and the like are fraudulent. It is possible to prevent the setting change due to.

In the fourth embodiment, the setting permission / rejection switching means (setting key switch 93) and the setting operating means (setting value changing switch 102) are connected to the same input port (input port 124).

With the above configuration, the setting changeable transition means (RAM initialization switch 112) is connected to, for example, the same input port 123 as the front frame open detection switch 64. Therefore, if the game control means (game control device 100) is implemented by eliminating the wiring from the setting permission / rejection switching means and the setting operation means to the input port 124, the gaming machine having no setting change function can be used.
Since the gaming machine can be operated, the versatility of the gaming control means (gaming control device 100) can be enhanced.

[Fifth Embodiment]
A fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fourth embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to fourth embodiments, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate. A fifth embodiment relates to a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value corresponding to a setting related to a game.

Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that performs a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value under specific conditions.
On the other hand, the player has a problem that when a hot production appears, the launch of the game ball is stopped even in a situation where the hold is accumulated. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, it is an object to improve the interest of the game by performing an effect in which the suggestion of the set value and the hold are associated with each other.

FIG. 74 is a front view of the game board 30 according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 75 shows the relationship between the number of holds and the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion effect according to the fifth embodiment (FIG. 75 (A)) and the relationship between the number of holds, the set value, and the lighting probability of red lighting (FIG. 75 (B)). ).

As shown in FIG. 74, the LED 36b is attached to the starting winning opening 36 arranged at the bottom of the game board 30.
(Direction means, lighting means) are arranged. The game board 30 in FIG. 74 has an LED 36b.
It is the same as the game board 30 of FIG. 2A except that. The LED 36b is configured, for example, as a part of the board decoration device 46 (FIG. 4), and is based on lighting information (information on setting suggestion effect) transmitted from the effect control device 300 (main control microcomputer 311) as described later. The setting suggestion effect for suggesting the set value is performed.

The LED 36b includes, for example, a light emitting member (LED) that emits red light and a light emitting member (LED) that emits white light.
LED), a light emitting device that can individually drive a light emitting member (LED) that emits blue light.
Each light emitting member (LED) emits light according to the lighting information.

The LED 36b can be attached to, for example, a general winning opening 35 or a normal variable winning device 37 instead of the starting winning opening 36, or the large winning opening LED 39d can be used instead.

As shown in FIG. 75 (A), the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 shows the relationship between the number of holds (the number of first start storage or the number of second start storage) and the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion effect. The table is stored in, for example, RAM 322 (FIG. 4). In addition, the table also includes the probability of occurrence in the case of an overflow larger than the maximum number of start storages (4).

Further, the main control microcomputer 311 selects the occurrence probability from the table shown in FIG. 75 (A) based on the hold number command (decorative special figure hold number command) transmitted from the game control device 100, and the selected occurrence. It also has a calculation function that determines whether or not to perform a setting suggestion effect by drawing a lot with probability.

Then, when the main control microcomputer 311 wins the lottery and determines that the setting suggestion effect is to be performed, the information (lighting information) of the setting suggestion effect is transmitted to the LED 36b (FIG. 4) via the board decoration LED control circuit 332 (FIG. 4). It is transmitted to the board decoration device 46).

In FIG. 75A, the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion effect increases as the number of holds increases. For example, the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion effect when the number of hold is zero is 1/500, the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion effect when the number of hold is 1 is 1/300, and the setting when the number of hold is 2. The probability of occurrence of the suggestion effect is 1/100, the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion effect when the number of hold is 3 is 1/30, and the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion effect when the number of hold is 4 is 1/10. year,
The probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion effect when the number of holds is overflow is set to 1/5. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, even if a hot effect appears during the game, by accumulating the number of holds, it is possible to provide the fun of determining the set value in addition to the fun of generating the look-ahead. It can enhance the interest. In particular, when the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion effect increases as the number of holds increases, the motivation for accumulating the number of holds can be further increased, and the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

The game control device 100 (FIG. 72) can transmit not only the hold number command but also the set value information representing the set value to the effect control device 300. The main control microcomputer 311 (FIG. 4) of the effect control device 300 lights the LED 36b a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) based on the lighting information, and how many times, for example, red (may be another color) is turned on. The setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value is performed, and the set value and the number of holdings are reflected in the setting suggestion effect. That is, the lighting probability of red lighting in the LED 36b changes depending on the set value and the number of holdings.

As shown in FIG. 75 (B), the main control microcomputer 311 stores, for example, a table showing the relationship between the number of reserved lighting probabilities of red lighting and the set value in the RAM 322 (FIG. 4).
Here, in FIG. 75 (B), the lighting probability is set on the premise that the higher the set value is, the higher the jackpot probability and the small hit probability are as shown in FIG. 24 (A).

The main control microcomputer 311 generates lighting information (information on setting suggestion effect) in which the LED 36b is lit 20 times, and at each lighting, a predetermined lighting signal for illuminating any of red lighting, white lighting, and blue lighting is performed. Incorporate with probability. Among them, the lighting probability of red lighting is extracted from the table of FIG. 75 (B) by using the information of the set value and the information of the number of holdings transmitted from the game control device 100. For example, if the lighting probability of red lighting is determined to be 20%, the lighting probability of white lighting and the lighting probability of blue lighting can be set to 40%, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 75 (B), when the number of holds is zero, the setting value 1-3 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 20%, and the setting value 4-6 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 40%. As a result, among the 20 times of lighting, the red lighting is lit 4 times on average at the set value 1-3, lit 8 times on average at the set value 4-6, and is one of the set values 1-3 depending on the difference in the average number of times of lighting. It is possible to suggest whether it is any of the set values 4-6.

When the number of holds is 1, the setting value 1-2 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 10%, the setting value 3 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 20%, and the setting value 4-6 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 40. It is set as a percentage. As a result, the red lighting is the set value 1-2 out of 20 lightings.
Lights up twice on average, lights up 4 times on average at setting value 3, and lights up 8 times on average at setting value 4-6.
Depending on the difference in the average number of lightings, it is possible to suggest whether the setting value is 1-2, the setting value 3, or the setting value 4-6.

When the number of holds is 2, the setting value 1 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 5%, the setting value 2 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 15%, and the setting value 3 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 25%. At the value 4-6, the lighting probability of red lighting is 40%. As a result, out of 20 lightings, the red lighting is lit once on average at the setting value 1 and 3 on average at the setting value 2.
It lights up 5 times on average at the setting value 3, and lights up 8 times on average at the setting value 4-6. Yes, set value 4-6
It is possible to suggest which of the above.

When the number of holds is 3, the setting value 1 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 5%, the setting value 2 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 15%, and the setting value 3 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 25%. At the value 4, the lighting probability of red lighting is 35%, and at the set value 5-6, the lighting probability of red lighting is 40%. As a result, among the 20 times of lighting, the red lighting is lit once on average at the setting value 1, lit three times on average at the setting value 2, and 5 on average at the setting value 3.
It lights up 7 times on average at the setting value 4, and lights up 8 times on average at the setting value 5-6. It is possible to suggest whether there is, the set value 4, or the set value 5-6.

When the number of holds is 4, the setting value 1 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 5%, the setting value 2 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 15%, and the setting value 3 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 25%. At the value 4, the lighting probability of red lighting is 35%, at the setting value 5, the lighting probability of red lighting is 40%, and at the setting value 6, the lighting probability of red lighting is 45%. As a result, among the 20 times of lighting, the red lighting is lit once on average at the setting value 1, lit 3 times on average at the setting value 2, lit 5 times on average at the setting value 3, and lit 7 times on average at the setting value 4. However, the set value 5 is lit 8 times on average, the set value 6 is lit 9 times on average, and it is possible to suggest which of the set values 1-6 is due to the difference in the average number of times of lighting.

As described above, the interval (5%) of the difference between the lighting probabilities of red lighting of the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting value 6 is the interval of the difference of the lighting probability of red lighting of the setting value 1-4 (10). It is possible to make it smaller than (percentage) so that the set value 6 having the highest jackpot probability and small hit probability cannot be easily suggested.

In the above description, the LED 36b is lit in three colors of red, white, and blue, but only red may be lit and the number of times of lighting may be changed according to the set value regardless of the number of holdings. For example, the set value and the number of lightings may be associated with each other by some function, such as the number of lightings = set value +2 and the number of lightings = set value × 2. More simply, the number of lightings may be equal to the set value. However, in the above aspect, the set value is indirectly and directly specified, and there is a risk that the player will concentrate on the gaming machine 10 which has a set value with a high jackpot probability. (Probability of occurrence of lighting information) is preferably set lower than the probability of occurrence shown in FIG. 75 (A).

In the fifth embodiment, the effect control device 300 can execute the setting suggestion effect (transmission of lighting information) at a predetermined timing related to the game. For example, as shown in FIG. 74, when a game ball wins a prize in the start winning opening 36, the effect control device 300 can transmit lighting information based on the probability of occurrence in FIG. 75 (A) to light the LED 36b. be. More specifically, when the effect control device 300 receives the hold number command (decorative special figure hold number command) transmitted from the game control device 100, the lighting information (setting suggestion) is based on the occurrence probability of FIG. 75 (A). Direction information) L
It will be transmitted to ED36b. As a result, the setting suggestion effect can occur with the winning of the game ball to the starting port 36 with a predetermined probability of occurrence. Can be improved. In particular, when the hold is in the overflow state, the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion effect (1/5) becomes extremely high, and the average number of lightings described above becomes easy to understand, so that the interest of the game can be further improved.

As other timings, when the power supply device 400 (FIG. 4) is turned on, when the special figure fluctuation display game is executed at a predetermined number of revolutions after the power is turned on, the special figure fluctuation display game is predetermined after the first (or last) big hit. When executed a number of times, when a miss after reach occurs a predetermined number of times, during a small hit, during a big hit, during a big hit ending, during a music performance during a big hit, RTC338
There are regular productions according to (FIG. 4), character productions during normal operation, and waiting for customers, and even if the lighting information is transmitted with the probability of FIG. 75 (A) at any of these timings. good. Moreover, the timing of these events may be combined as appropriate.

In the fifth embodiment, in addition to the LED 36b, the frequency of occurrence of small hits, the frequency of occurrence of delayed effects,
The setting suggestion effect may be performed according to the stop frequency of the specific symbol in the special figure variation display game and the occurrence frequency of the specific roll (specific missed stop symbol) in the special figure variation display game, or at the above timing. At the same time, the display device 41 may perform some setting suggestion effect.

It should be noted that the setting suggestion effect, which is the effect of suggesting the set value (B1323) according to the setting related to the game, may be executed by the following method. An example of the setting suggestion effect will be described below.

As another example, the setting suggestion effect is the display device 41 in the big hit state (special game state).
It may be performed in, which enhances the fun of the game. The effect control device 300 is used every time a game ball wins a prize in the special prize opening of the special variable winning device 39, that is, a large winning opening count command (B).
Each time a 1321 count command) is received, a coin image (an image imitating a coin) colored in each color is displayed on the display device 41. For example, the color of the coin image is red when the set values are 1 and 6, yellow when the set values are 2 and 5, and blue when the set values are 3 and 4. Here, each color of the coin image corresponds to each combination of the low setting value (1, 2, 3) and the high setting value (4, 5, 6). The color of the coin image has set values of 1, 2, and 3.
In the case of, it may be red, and when the set values are 4, 5, and 6, it may be yellow. As a part of the ending effect set in the ending effect setting process (B2111), the display device 41 notifies the total number of coin images displayed in the big hit state.

The color of the coin image may be determined by lottery. Red when the set values are 1 and 6, yellow when the set values are 2 and 5, and blue when the set values are 3 and 4 may be drawn with a higher selection probability than other colors. For example, when 120 game balls are won in the big prize opening in the big hit state, 60 red coin images, 30 yellow coins, and 30 blue coins are displayed, the player sets. It can be inferred that the value is 1 or 6.

Further, as another example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed on the display device 41 during the setting notification period (for example, 10 minutes) provided at predetermined time (for example, 1 hour), thereby improving the interest of the game. .. The effect control device 300 executes the setting suggestion effect using the out-of-order stop symbol (B2012) of the decorative special figure variation display game during the setting notification period. The effect control device 300 can determine from the RTC 338 and the time timer whether or not the set notification period is reached.

For example, if the set value is 5, the effect control device 300 sets the out-of-order stop symbol of the first decoration special figure fluctuation display game in the setting notification period to "1, 2, 3", and sets the second decoration special. The out-of-order stop symbol of the figure variation display game is set to "1,3,3", and the out-of-order stop symbol of the third decorative special figure variation display game is set to "2,5,6". In this way, the effect control device 300 gradually adjusts the value near the set value to be included in the number of the stop symbol with the passage of time, and the number corresponding to the set value is removed at the end of the setting notification period. Be included in the number of the stop symbol. It should be noted that the number of the out-of-order stop symbol may be increased or decreased to approach the set value.

Further, not limited to the above, the effect control device 300 executes the setting suggestion effect using only the out-of-order stop symbol (B2012) of the decorative special figure variation display game at a specific predetermined time (for example, the first time) during the setting notification period. You may try to do it.

[Action / effect of the fifth embodiment]
As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment can execute the game control means (game control device 100) capable of controlling the result of the game based on the set value corresponding to the setting related to the game, and the effect. Directing means (LED36b, display device 41) and directing means (LED36b, display device 4)
It is possible to execute a variable display game in which the effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of controlling 1) is provided and the identification information is variablely displayed as a game. The gaming machine 10 includes a starting storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing the starting memory that is the right to execute the variable display game. The game control means (game control device 100) transmits set value information indicating a set value to the effect control means (effect control device 300), and the effect control means (effect control device 300) is based on the set value information.
The setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value can be executed by the effect means, the setting suggestion effect is executed with a predetermined probability (occurrence probability), and the probability (occurrence probability) is set to the number of start memories (holding number). Set based on.

With the above configuration, even if a hot effect appears during the game, by accumulating the number of holds,
In addition to the fun of pre-reading, it is possible to provide the fun of discriminating the set value, which can enhance the fun of the game.

In the fifth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) sets the probability (occurrence probability) higher as the number of start memories (holding number) increases.

As a result, the motivation for accumulating the number of reservations can be further increased, and the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

In the fifth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) changes the setting suggestion effect based on the number (holding number) (and set value) of the start storage.

This makes it possible to perform various setting suggestion effects such as a setting suggestion effect that makes it easy to determine the set value and a setting suggestion effect that makes it difficult to determine the set value, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In the fifth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute the setting suggestion effect at a predetermined timing related to the game.

As a result, the chances of suggesting the set value are increased, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In the fifth embodiment, the effect means (LED36b) emits light as a setting suggestion effect (LED36b).
A lighting means (LED36b) capable of suggesting a set value by (for example, lighting 20 times) is provided, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) is a lighting means (LE) based on lighting information indicating a light emitting mode.
D36b) is controlled, lighting information is generated based on the above probability (probability of occurrence), and lighting means (LED).
It is possible to transmit toward 36b).

This makes it possible to suggest the set value with a simple configuration.

In the fifth embodiment, the lighting means (LED36b) can light a plurality of colors of light different from each other, and the lighting information is a plurality of lights each time the lighting means is turned on a plurality of times (for example, 20 times). It is information for selecting one of the colors of light, and suggests a set value by the number of times of lighting of a specific color (red) light.

With the above configuration, it is possible to suggest the set value more clearly with a simple configuration.

In the fifth embodiment, the lighting means (LED36b) is attached to a start opening (starting winning opening 36) capable of generating start memory (holding) when the game ball wins a prize, and the effect control means (LED36b).
The effect control device 300) can generate lighting information based on the probability (probability of occurrence) at the time of winning a prize at the starting port (starting winning opening 36) of the game ball and transmit it to the lighting means (LED 36b).

With the above configuration, the setting suggestion effect can occur with the winning of the game ball to the starting port with a predetermined probability of occurrence, so it naturally gets into the eyes of the player and attracts the attention of the player to make the game more interesting. Can be improved.

[Sixth Embodiment]
A sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fifth embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to fifth embodiments, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate. The sixth embodiment relates to an error code that collectively displays the presence or absence of a plurality of errors.

FIG. 76 shows the relationship between the error priority and the error code bit according to the sixth embodiment (FIG. 76 (A)), and the notation of the error code (binary) and the error code (hexadecimal) (FIG. 76 (FIG. 76). B
)). FIG. 77 is a display example of the error code and the error content according to the sixth embodiment, and when there are two errors (left: binary notation, right: hexadecimal notation) (FIG. 77 (A)).
When one error is resolved (FIG. 77 (B)), when all the errors are resolved (FIG. 77 (C))
) Is shown.

The sixth embodiment is characterized in that when an error occurs in the gaming machine 10, an error code (error code 341, 342) including the error is displayed on the display device 41 (FIG. 77).

As shown in FIGS. 76 (A) and 76 (B), the error code collectively displays the presence / absence information in which the presence / absence of a plurality of error contents generated in the gaming machine 10 is coded, respectively, and is expressed in binary notation. , Can be displayed in hexadecimal notation. In hexadecimal notation, b0 to b3 in binary notation
Is the lower bit, and b4 to b7 in binary notation are the upper bits.

Here, the error content displayed in FIG. 76 (A) is a display of a part of the error content generated in the gaming machine 10 as an example, and there are actually more error contents, but the explanation will be given. Other error details are omitted for the sake of simplicity. Therefore, 2 depending on the number of error contents
The number of bits in decimal notation and hexadecimal notation also changes.

Priority information is associated with the error content displayed in FIG. 76 (A). The priority information is an arrangement of the priorities of the error contents to be resolved by the game hall manager or the staff. Therefore, the relationship between each error content and the priority is unchanged in principle.

On the other hand, the relationship between the priority (error content) and the bit (b0-b6) is arbitrary. Therefore, in FIG. 76 (A), the order of the bits and the priority (error content) are matched, but the priority (error content) can be randomly set for the bits.

The RAM 322 or FeRAM 323 of the effect control device 300 (FIG. 4) includes FIG. 76 (A).
) Is stored in the table information. The information in the table also includes character information (character information 343) indicating the error content.

The effect control device 300 generates error codes 341 and 342 (FIG. 76 (B)) based on the error command transmitted from the game control device 100.

The game control device 100 performs error detection of the game machine 10. The game control device 100 is
Magnet fraud monitoring process to detect magnetic error, which is an abnormality detection of the magnetic sensor switch 61 (FIG. 6)
, A1315), panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (Fig. 6, A1316) that detects anomaly detection of the radio wave sensor 62, fraud & prize management that detects a grand prize opening error that is an illegal winning to the grand prize opening Processing (FIG. 8, A2004, A2006), fraudulent & winning management processing for detecting a radio wave error, which is an illegal winning to the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening) (FIG. 8, A200).
8) is performed, and error commands (including invalid commands) corresponding to each error are transmitted. Further, by referring to the game state monitoring table 1 (first embodiment), the frame radio error, which is an abnormality in the frame radio illegal signal, and the glass, which is the detection of the open state of the glass frame 15 by the glass frame open detection switch 63. Detects frame opening error, main body frame opening error that detects the open state of the front frame 12 (main body frame) by the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch), and switch abnormality error that is the generation of an abnormality detection signal. Then, an error command indicating the presence or absence of each error content is transmitted (FIG. 9, A2204, A2207). By executing the error / invalid setting process (FIG. 39, B1316), the effect control device 300 receives the error command.

As shown in FIG. 77 (A), the effect control device 300 has an error code 341 on the display device 41.
, 342 can be displayed. At that time, the error code 341 can be expressed in binary notation as shown on the left side, and the error code 342 can be expressed in hexadecimal notation as shown on the right side. As a result, by grasping the correspondence between the error codes 341 and 342 and the error contents in advance, the error codes 341 and 342 can be displayed and the error contents can be grasped immediately. Further, by using the binary notation, the presence or absence of each error and the number of errors can be immediately grasped.

The error code 341 (binary notation: 00010010) and the error code 342 (hexadecimal notation: 12) in FIG. 77 (A) indicate that a "panel radio wave error" and a "frame radio wave error" occur at the same time. Are shown respectively.

Further, as shown in FIG. 77 (A), the effect control device 300 has error codes 341 and 34.
Character information 343 indicating the error content can be displayed adjacent to 2. This character information 3
Reference numeral 43 indicates, for example, the error content having the highest priority among the error contents corresponding to the code (presence / absence information) having the error code 341, that is, “1” in the binary notation. According to FIG. 77 (A), since the error content having the highest priority here is the "panel radio wave error", the character information 343 of the "panel radio wave error" is displayed on the display device 41. By displaying the character information 343 in this way, it is possible to immediately grasp the error content to be resolved with priority.

The error codes 341 and 342 and the character information 343 are always displayed if any error occurs after the power is turned on, and the same applies during the game. Further, even during the variable display game, the variable display area 6 in which the large symbol among the decorative special symbols is variablely displayed.
The error code 341, 342 and the character information 343 may be superimposed on 10 (the first variable display area), but the variable display area 615 in which the small symbol among the decorative special symbols is variablely displayed.
It is not displayed on top of the (second variable display area).

By the way, the process of preparing the above error command (A1315, A1316, A2004)
, A2006, A2008, A2204, A2207), and error / invalid setting processing (B).
1316) is executed with its contents constantly updated. That is, if the error content is updated, the error code 341, 342 and the character information 343 are also updated.

Therefore, for example, when the "panel radio wave error" is resolved, the error code 341 (binary notation: 00010010) and the error code 341 (binary notation: 00) are as shown in FIG. 77 (B).
It is updated to 010000), and the error code 342 (hexadecimal notation: 12) is changed to the error code 3.
It is updated to 42 (hexadecimal notation: 10), and the character information 343 is updated from "board radio wave error" to "frame radio wave error".

Then, when the "frame radio wave error" is resolved, all the errors are resolved, and the error codes 341 and 342 and the character information 343 are not generated. At this time, the presence / absence information of the binary notation constituting the error code 341 is all "0". As a result, FIG. 77 (
As shown in C), the display of the error code 341, 342 and the character information 343 is erased in the display device 41. This makes it easy to know that all the errors have been resolved.

FIG. 78 is an example of switching the display of the error content according to the sixth embodiment, in which an example of displaying a panel radio wave error as an initial state (FIG. 78 (A)) and a frame radio wave error by operating the operation unit once. (FIG. 78 (B)), and an example (FIG. 78 (C)) in which a switch abnormality error is displayed by operating the operation unit once are shown. In the present embodiment, the operation unit (operation means) is the effect button 25.
However, a cross key (not shown) may be used.

In the sixth embodiment, when the error code 341 and the character information 343 are displayed on the display device 41, the error content having the highest priority is initially displayed as the character information 343. In FIG. 78 (A), the error code 341 indicates that, for example, a “panel radio wave error”, a “frame radio wave error”, or a “switch abnormality error” has occurred (see FIG. 76). Initially, the highest priority "panel radio wave error" is displayed as character information 343.

Further, the effect control device 300 can display an underlined 344 (predetermined image) adjacent to the presence / absence information "1" of the error code 341 corresponding to the displayed character information 343.
In FIG. 78 (A), an underline 344 (predetermined image) indicating the presence / absence information “1” of the second error code 341 (bit: b1) corresponding to the character information 343 of the “panel radio wave error” is displayed. Will be done. The underline 344 is displayed adjacent to the presence / absence information "1". As a result, the correspondence between the character information 343 and the presence / absence information "1" in the error code 341 becomes clear.
In addition to the underlined 344, a predetermined image such that the presence / absence information "1" is surrounded by a square or a circle may be applied.

By the way, the effect control device 300 (main control microcomputer 311) is connected to the effect button 25 (effect button switch 25a), which is an operation unit operated by the player in a variable display game or the like, via a switch input circuit 336. (Fig. 4). Then, each time the effect control device 300 receives the signal transmitted by the button operation of the effect button 25, the effect control device 300 can switch and display the character information 343 corresponding to the plurality of presence / absence information that is present in the error code 341. It has become. As a result, all the error contents that have occurred can be grasped by the character information 343.

Therefore, when the effect button 25 is pressed once, the character information 34 is as shown in FIG. 78 (B).
"Frame radio wave error" is displayed as 3, and the error code 34 corresponding to the character information 343 is displayed.
An underline 344 is displayed under the presence / absence information "1" which is the fifth (bit: b4) from the right of 1.

Further, when the effect button 25 is pressed once, the character information 34 is displayed as shown in FIG. 78 (C).
A "switch abnormality error" is displayed as 3, and an underline 344 is displayed under the presence / absence information "1" of the error code 341 corresponding to the character information 343, which is the first (bit: b7) from the left. Then, when the effect button 25 is further pressed once, the display returns to the display of FIG. 78 (A).

If the error code 341 and the character information 343 are displayed even during the variable display game, the operation related to the effect of the variable display game by the effect button 25 is restricted, and the character information 343 is switched by the effect button 25. The operation will be given priority.

[Action / effect of the sixth embodiment]
As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment has a gaming control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a command related to the game and a display means (display device 41) for displaying an effect corresponding to the command.
In the game machine 10 including the effect control means (effect control device 300) that can be displayed on the screen, the game control means (game control device 100) causes any one of a plurality of errors that may occur in the game machine 10. If this is the case, an error command related to the error is transmitted to the effect control means (effect control device 300), and the effect control means (effect control device 300) collectively displays the presence or absence of a plurality of errors with an error code (341, 1). 342) is generated based on the error command and displayed on the display means (display device 41).

With the above configuration, by grasping the correspondence between the error codes 341 and 342 and the error contents in advance, the error codes 341 and 342 can be displayed and the error contents can be grasped immediately at once.

In the sixth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) has an error code (34).
1) is generated by a plurality of presence / absence information (binary notation) indicating the presence / absence of an error individually.

As a result, the presence or absence of each error and the number of errors can be immediately grasped by using the binary notation.

In the sixth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) arranges the presence / absence information in the error code based on the priority of the error.

As a result, it is possible to grasp the error to be dealt with preferentially in the error code.

In the sixth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) includes character information 343 indicating the content of the error, and has the highest priority among the presence / absence information "1" that is present in the error code 341. The character information 343 related to the error is displayed on the display means (display device 41).

As a result, even if the correspondence between the presence / absence information of the error code 341 and the error content is not grasped, the error content having the highest priority can be notified by the character information 343, so that the error content can be easily grasped. Can be done.

In the sixth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) includes character information 343 indicating the content of the error and priority information (FIG. 76 (A)) indicating the priority of the error.
Among the errors that are present in the error codes 341 and 342, the character information 343 related to the error having the highest priority is displayed on the display means (display device 41) based on the priority information.

As a result, the error content having the highest priority can be notified by the character information 343 without grasping the content of the error codes 341 and 342 at all, so that the error content can be easily grasped.

In the sixth embodiment, the operation means (effect button 25) capable of generating a signal according to the operation of the player is provided, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) receives the signal from the operation means (effect button 25). Each time, the character information 343 related to the error that is present in the error codes 341 and 342 is switched and transmitted to the display means (display device 41).

As a result, all the error contents that have occurred can be grasped by the character information 343.

In the sixth embodiment, the operation means (effect button 25) capable of generating a signal according to the operation of the player is provided, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) receives the signal from the operation means (effect button 25). Each time, the character information 343 related to the presence / absence information "1" that is present in the error code 341 is switched and transmitted to the display means (display device 41) and displayed on the display means (display device 41). A predetermined image (underlined 344) showing the presence / absence information "1" related to the character information 343 is displayed.

As a result, the correspondence between the character information 343 and the presence / absence information "1" in the error code 341 becomes clear.

In the sixth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) has an error code 341.
, 342, if a plurality of errors are all eliminated, error codes 341 and 342 are not generated.

As a result, the error codes 341, 342 and the character information 343 displayed on the display means (display device 41) are erased, so that it is possible to easily grasp that all the errors have been resolved.

[7th Embodiment]
A seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 85. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to sixth embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to sixth embodiments, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate. The seventh embodiment relates to the attachment of the part 510 as in the second embodiment.

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an example in which the removable part 510 according to the seventh embodiment is attached to the gaming machine 10. The seventh embodiment is a modification of the second embodiment. The collation procedure between the part identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) of the seventh embodiment is the second.
It is the same as the embodiment.

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46B, the part 510B for the model B having the part identification information (first identification information) that does not match the model identification information (second identification information) of the model A is When the effect control device 300 is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10, the effect control device 300 is the speaker 19a.
, 19b and the display device 41 are used to notify the error.

On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, when the part 510B for the model B is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10, the effect control device 300 is the board decoration device 46 (or the frame decoration device 18).
(Here, light emission) is allowed, and the frame decoration device 18 (or the board decoration device 46)
(FIG. 4) is configured to prohibit driving (light emission here). That is, as shown in FIG. 79, the frame decoration device 18 (decoration device 18b) is a game board 3 due to lighting (light emission) of an LED or the like.
Although 0 is decorated, when the part 510B for the model B is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10, the lighting (light emission) of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 is prohibited.

Specifically, the effect control device 300 has a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 (or a board decoration L) when the part identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) do not match.
By stopping the drive of the ED control circuit 334) (FIG. 4), the drive (light emission) of the frame decoration device 18 (or the board decoration device 46) (FIG. 4) is prohibited.

As a result, the lighting member such as the LED included in the frame decoration device 18 (or the lighting member such as the LED included in the board decoration device 46) does not emit light to indicate that the unit is incorrect. Therefore, it becomes easier for the game hall manager or the staff to understand the installation error of the unit, and the cause can be smoothly removed. In addition, since it will not be used incorrectly, it is possible to reduce the factors that cause failure and extend the service life.

As shown in FIG. 79, also in the seventh embodiment, the unit error can be notified by the voice information (voice of "unit error") using the speakers 19a and 19b. Here, the output of the voice information can be stopped by operating the effect button 25 (FIG. 4). In addition, the display device 41 can display the notification information 345 that notifies the "unit error" by characters. The notification information 345 is displayed with priority over the image related to initialization (for example, the character 431 of "initializing" in FIG. 90 of the eighth embodiment described later) or the image related to power failure recovery (A1035). To.

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an example of displaying the notification information 345 according to the seventh embodiment on the display device 41 displaying the out-of-order stop symbol of the special figure variation display game. As shown in FIG. 80, the notification information 345 for notifying the "unit error" is displayed on the display device 41 as long as the part 510B whose part identification information is different from the model identification information is attached, and is displayed during the game (variation). The same applies to (during the display game).

In the special figure variation display game, the notification information 345 is superimposed on the variation display area 610 (first variation display area) where the variation display of the large symbol is performed, but the variation display area where the variation display of the small symbol is performed. It is not displayed on top of 615 (second variable display area). This will result in
Even if the notification information 345 (“unit error”) is displayed, the player can confirm the progress and result of the special figure variation display game in the variation display area 615.

FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an example in which the display mode of the broadcast information according to the seventh embodiment is changed according to the operation of the movable body. The notification information 345 of the seventh embodiment is displayed on the display device 41 even during the initial operation when the movable bodies 44c and 44d (movable accessories) are turned on. Movable body 44c, 4
Details of the initial operation of 4d will be described in the eighth embodiment described later.

As shown in FIG. 81 (A), the movable bodies 44c and 44d are arranged at positions such that a part thereof slightly overlaps the front surface of the display device 41 in the initial state (standby state).
As shown in FIG. 81B, the movable bodies 44c and 44d move to the center of the front surface of the display device 41 during the initial operation. Therefore, the notification information 345 is the movable body 44c, 44 in the display device 41.
It is displayed at a position that does not overlap with d so that the notification content (“unit error”) can be reliably notified.

On the left side of FIG. 81 (A), the notification information 345 is displayed large in the central portion of the display device 41, but in FIG. 81 (B), the notification information 345 is, for example, the upper left of the display device 41.
It may be displayed in another place), which is smaller than the display mode of FIG. 81 (A). By changing the display mode of the notification information 345 according to the positions of the movable bodies 44c and 44d in this way, it is possible to strongly call attention to the game hall manager or the staff.

Further, the notification information 345 is displayed on the display device 41 as shown on the right side of FIG. 81 (A).
The movable bodies 44c and 44d may be displayed from the beginning at positions where they do not overlap even if they move. At least, by arranging the notification information 345 in a region different from the region covered by the movable bodies 44c and 44d in the display device 41, it is possible to call attention to the game hall manager or the staff.

FIG. 82 is a parts collation process according to the seventh embodiment, and is a drive (light emission) of the frame decoration device 18.
It is a figure which shows the example of the case of prohibiting. The parts collation process of the seventh embodiment is the second embodiment (
It is almost the same as FIG. 54), but as shown in FIG. 82, a process (B50) for prohibiting the driving of the frame decoration device 18 (may be the board decoration device 46) after (or before) the error notification (B5006).
06a) has been added. The prohibition of driving the frame decoration device 18 is the main control microcomputer 311 (
FIG. 4) stops the output of the signal to the frame decoration device 18, or the frame decoration LED control circuit 33.
This is done by stopping the drive of 3.

FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the identification board 513 of the part 510 according to the seventh embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 83, the identification board 513 (I ² CI / O expander 815) of the part 510 of the seventh embodiment is the same as the identification board 513 of the second embodiment, but the bus controller 834 has ROM 8 in which the part identification information (first identification information) of the identification board 513 is stored.
It is equipped with 34a.

Therefore, the bus controller 834 has a unique address (A3, A2, A1, A0) in which the address of the data input from the connection line SDA is set in the I ² CI / O expander 815.
It is determined whether or not it matches the address determined by), and if it matches, the connection line SDA
Parts identification information (first identification information) stored in ROM 834a in the master IC 300a
Is output.

FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a reference table (FIG. 84 (A)) for associating the model designation command according to the seventh embodiment with the model identification information and a reference table (FIG. 84 (B)) showing the classification of nonconforming models. ..

As shown in FIG. 84 (A), the memory of the effect control means 300 (RAM 322 or FeRAM).
In 323 (FIG. 4) and the like), a table of models compatible with the gaming machine 10 and model identification information corresponding to the models is stored. In FIG. 84 (A), the models AD are registered as the models that the gaming machine 10 can be identified. For example, if the model of the gaming machine 10 is model A (any of models A and D may be used), the frame indicates that the part identification information of the attached parts 510 does not match the model identification information of model A. Driving (light emission) of the decoration device 18 (or the board decoration device 46)
Will be prohibited and error notification etc. will be performed.

Here, if the parts identification information matches any of the model identification information of the models A to D, it is determined that the part 510 is a standard product conforming to the gaming machine 10, and if they do not match any of them, it is determined.
It can be determined that the part 510 is a non-standard product that is not suitable for the gaming machine 10.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, when the part 510B for the model B is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10, the effect control device 300 is the frame decoration device 18 (or the board decoration device 4).
6) The drive of (Fig. 4) can be prohibited.

By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, as a device for providing the gaming machine at low cost, a part (part 510) has been changed as a part (model element) of the frame decoration device 18. If the parts (parts 510) are not correct when changed on the spot, it may cause a failure. In addition, the frame decoration device 18 may be used incorrectly.

However, in the seventh embodiment, even if the wrong unit (part 510B) is attached, it is not always necessary to prohibit the driving of the frame decoration device 18 (or the board decoration device 46), and it affects the progress of the game. By allowing a part of the parts 510 to be driven within the range where there is no such thing, it is possible to reduce the cause of failure.

As shown in FIG. 84 (B), the memory of the effect control device 300 (RAM 322 or FeRAM).
In 323 (FIG. 4) and the like), when the part 510 is not compatible with the gaming machine 10, a reference table for classifying the parts into three types is stored. The part 510 is the gaming machine 1.
The case of not conforming to 0 is a case where the part identification information of the part 510 and the model identification information (specific model identification information) of the gaming machine 10 to which the part 510 is attached do not match.

The part 510 decorates the game board 30 (FIG. 2), and includes an LED and a movable member that can be controlled by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG. 84 (B), the part 51
0 can be classified into those having only an LED and those having an LED and a movable member according to the corresponding part identification information.

For example, if the last two digits of the part identification number are "00" or "01", the part 51
It can be determined that 0 is provided only with the LED. Further, when the last two digits of the part identification information are "10" or "11", it can be determined that the part 510 includes the LED and the movable member.

As shown in FIG. 84 (A), the model A- in which the part identification information corresponds to the last two digits.
Although the form is such that D can be identified, the form may be such that the models AD can be identified by the first two digits. In this case, does the part 510 have only the LED in the first two digits of the part identification information?
It is possible to determine whether the LED and the movable member are provided. By comparing a part of the part identification information in this way, the type of the part 510 can be classified.

From the above, the effect control device 300 (main control microcomputer 311) includes the part identification information (first identification information) transmitted from the parts 510 and the specific model identification information (second identification information) included in the effect control device 300. , And the parts 510 can be classified into a conforming product that matches the specific model identification information and a non-conforming product that does not match.

In the case of a conforming product, the part 510 can be driven without any limitation.

On the other hand, if it is a non-conforming product, it is a standard product according to the reference table of FIG. 84 (B) and L.
It can be classified into the first category having only ED, the second category which is a standard product and has an LED and a movable member, and the third category which is a non-standard product.

Regarding the first classification, as long as the part 510 is a standard product, the LED rating of the part 510 corresponds to the gaming machine 10, so that the lighting of the LED can be allowed.

Regarding the second classification, the LED and the movable member of the part 510 can be driven because the rating also corresponds to the gaming machine 10 as long as the part 510 is a standard product. However, if the operation mode of the movable member corresponding to the gaming machine 10 is different due to the difference in the model such as the reciprocating operation and the orbiting operation, the part 510 may be damaged. Therefore, in the second category, LED drive (
It is necessary to prohibit the driving (movement, rotation, etc.) of the movable member of the part 510 while allowing (light emission).

Regarding the third category, if the parts 510 are non-standard products, the ratings of the LEDs and movable members may differ from those of the gaming machine 10, and if they are driven, the board on the gaming machine 10 side may be damaged. Therefore, it is necessary to prohibit the driving of the LED and the movable member of the part 510 regardless of their presence or absence.

When the part 510 is configured as a part of the board decoration device 46, the main control microcomputer 311 may limit only the signal related to the part 510 among the signals transmitted to the board decoration device 46, for example. , When the part 510 belongs to the second category, the L of the part 510
The transmission of the signal related to the ED is permitted and the transmission of the signal related to the movable member is prohibited, for example.
When the part 510 belongs to the third category, the transmission of the signal related to the LED and the movable member of the part 510 may be prohibited.

For example, when the I ² CI / O expander 815 shown in FIG. 83 drives the board decoration device 46, for example, the PORT 1 is a port for driving the LED of the part 510, and the PO
When RT2 is a port for driving a movable member (motor) of part 510, PORT1
And the output of the signal belonging to the address of PORT2 may be prohibited.

Further, when the part 510 is configured to be independent of the board decoration device 46,
When the part 510 belongs to the second category, the main control microcomputer 311 is L of the part 510.
The transmission of the signal related to the ED is permitted and the transmission of the signal related to the movable member is prohibited, and the part 5
When 10 belongs to the third category, transmission of a signal related to the LED and the movable member of the part 510 may be prohibited.

FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example of a part collation process according to the seventh embodiment in which the driving mode is changed by classifying the parts 510. The parts collation process of the seventh embodiment is the same as the parts collation process of the second embodiment (FIG. 54), but when the parts identification information and the model identification information do not match (the result of B5005 is "N"), an error occurs. Notification (B5006) is performed, and error classification processing of part identification information is performed (B5006b). As in FIG. 82,
It is also possible to execute the process of step B5006a in order to prohibit the driving of the frame decoration device 18 between steps B5006 and B5006b.

When it is determined in the error classification process (B5006b) that the part identification information belongs to the first classification, the LED of the part 510 is allowed to be driven (B5006c).

When it is determined in the error classification process (B5006b) that the part identification information belongs to the second classification, the driving of the LED of the part 510 is permitted, while the driving of the movable member of the part 510 is prohibited (B5006d).

When it is determined in the error classification process (B5006b) that the part identification information belongs to the third classification, the driving of the LED and the movable member of the part 510 is prohibited (B5006e).
..

In this way, even if the attached parts 510 are used in the wrong state, the progress of the game is not affected and the factors of failure can be reduced, which can lead to a longer life.

[Action / effect of the 7th embodiment]
As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment has a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game and an effect control means (effect control device 3) capable of executing an effect related to the game.
00) and a decorative device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) driven by an effect control means (effect control device 300) to perform a light emission effect. In the gaming machine 10, removable parts (parts 5) to which electrically readable first identification information (part identification information) is assigned.
10) is included. The effect control means (effect control device 300) holds the second identification information (model identification information) corresponding to the model of the gaming machine 10, and reads the first identification information (part identification information) of the part (part 510). When the first identification information (part identification information) and the second identification information (model identification information) do not match with the second identification information (model identification information), a part of the decoration device (frame decoration device 18, frame decoration device 18, Alternatively, the drive of the board decoration device 46) is prohibited.

As a result, a part of the decoration device (part 510) can be attached by attaching the wrong part (part 510).
For example, since the drive of the frame decoration device 18) is prohibited, it is easy for the game hall manager or the staff to quickly and easily determine that the attached part (part 510) is incorrect, and the part (part 510) is replaced. By doing so, the cause can be removed smoothly.

In the seventh embodiment, the decoration device (frame decoration device 18, board decoration device 46) is the gaming machine 10.
The effect control means (effect control device 300) includes a frame decoration device 18 for performing a light emission effect for decorating the frame of the machine, and a board decoration device 46 for performing a light emission effect for decorating the game board 30 of the gaming machine.
Allows the driving of the board decoration device 46 and prohibits the driving of the frame decoration device 18 when the first identification information (part identification information) and the second identification information (model identification information) do not match.

As a result, the game hall manager or the staff can easily understand that the attached parts (parts 510) are incorrect depending on whether or not the frame decoration device 18 is driven, so that the parts (parts 510) can be easily understood.
) Can be replaced to remove the cause smoothly.

In the seventh embodiment, the part (part 510) is configured as a part of the board decoration device 46. The effect control means (effect control device 300) includes a light emitting member (LED) whose parts (parts 510) are standard products compatible with the gaming machine 10 and can be driven by the effect control means (effect control device 300). The first category, the second category, which is a standard product and includes a light emitting member (LED) and a movable member that can be driven by the effect control means (effect control device 300), and a non-standard product (non-standard product). It is possible to classify into the third classification. In the case of the first category, the effect control means (effect control device 300) allows the drive of the component (part 510), and in the case of the second category, the light emitting member (LED) of the component (part 510). The drive is allowed and the drive of the movable member is prohibited, and in the case of the third category, the drive of the part (part 510) is prohibited.

As a result, even if the attached parts (parts 510) are used in the wrong state, the progress of the game is not affected and the factors of failure can be reduced, which can lead to a longer life.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment is a gaming control means (game control device 1) capable of executing a game.
00), an effect control means (effect control means 300) capable of executing an effect related to the game, and a decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) for performing a light emission effect. Pachinko machine 1
At 0, the detachable part (part 510) configured as part of the decorative device and to which the electrically readable first identification information (part identification information) is assigned is included. Production control means (
The effect control device 300) holds the second identification information (model identification information) corresponding to the model of the gaming machine 10, reads the first identification information (part identification information) of the part (part 510), and second identification information. When the first identification information (part identification information) and the second identification information (model identification information) do not match with each other (model identification information), the part (part 510) is a standard product that conforms to the gaming machine 10. The first category includes a light emitting member (LED) that can be driven by the effect control means (effect control device 300), and the standard product, the light emitting member (LED) and the effect control means (effect control device 300). It can be classified into a second category including a movable member that can be driven by the LED and a third category that is not a standard product (becomes a non-standard product). The effect control means (effect control device 300) allows the parts (parts 510) to be driven in the case of the first category, and the parts (parts 510) in the case of the second category.
The drive of the light emitting member (LED) of the part 510) is allowed and the drive of the movable member is prohibited, and in the case of the third category, the drive of the part (part 510) is prohibited.

As a result, even if the attached parts (parts 510) are used in the wrong state, the progress of the game is not affected and the factors of failure can be reduced, which can lead to a longer life.

In the seventh embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes a display device 41 that displays an image related to the game, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) includes a first identification information (part identification information) and a second.
When the identification information (model identification information) does not match, the notification information 345 (“unit error”) indicating the mismatch is displayed on the display device 41.

As a result, the error can be reliably notified to the game hall manager or the staff by displaying the notification information 345 on the display device 41.

In the seventh embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) displays a variable display game in which the identification information is variablely displayed on the display device 41, and the display device 4 of the variable display game.
As the display area in 1, the first variable display area (variable display area 6) for displaying the variable display of a large symbol is performed.
10) and a small symbol (61) that is smaller than the first variable display area and smaller than the large symbol.
2nd variable display area (variable display area 615) for displaying variable display of 5A, 615B, 615C)
The notification information 345 is displayed so as to be superimposed on the first variation display area without being superimposed on the second variation display area.

As a result, even if the notification information 345 (“unit error”) is displayed, the player can confirm the progress and result of the variable display game in the variable display area 615.

In the seventh embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes a board effect device 44 including an operable movable body (44c, 44d). The effect control means (effect control device 300) can drive the movable body (44c, 44d) of the board effect device 44, and the first identification information (part identification information) and the second identification information (model identification information) do not match. In this case, the notification information 345 is displayed in the display device 41 in a region that does not overlap with the region covered by the movable body (44c, 44d) by the drive of the board effect device 44.

As a result, the notification information 345 is not hidden by the movable body (44c, 44d), so that the notification information 345 can always be visually recognized.

In the seventh embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) changes the display mode of the notification information 345 according to the position of the movable body (44c, 44d).

Thereby, the display mode of the notification information 345 can be optimized to the state with the highest visibility according to the change in the position of the movable body (44c, 44d).

In the seventh embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes sound output means (speakers (19a, 19b)) that output sound effects according to the gaming state. The effect control means (effect control device 300) is used when the first identification information (part identification information) and the second identification information (model identification information) do not match.
The voice information (“unit error”) indicating the mismatch is output to the sound output means (speakers 19a, 19b).

As a result, the game board 30 (frame decoration device 18 or board decoration device 46) and the notification information 34
It is possible to inform the game hall manager or the staff member who is in a position where the display device 41 on which 5 is displayed cannot be visually recognized that the error has occurred.

[Eighth Embodiment]
The eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 96. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to seventh embodiments. A seventh embodiment relates to an initial operation control process.

[Game board according to the eighth embodiment]
First, the game board 30 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86
Is a front view of the gaming board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment. The game board 30 according to the eighth embodiment is obtained by adding a light guide plate 251 and internal accessories 44c and 44d (inner movable members) to the game board 30 (FIG. 2A) of the first embodiment.

The light guide plate 251 is attached to the center case 40, is irradiated from a light emitting member (for example, an LED) attached to the end portion, and reflects a part of the guided light forward so as to be visible from the front. A pattern or the like (for example, a spark-like pattern as shown in FIG. 86) is made to emerge on the surface as is known (see JP-A-2016-83463 and JP-A-2017-148150).
.. The light guide plate 251 is arranged in front of the display device 41 (on the player side).

The internal accessories 44c and 44d (internal movable members) are provided in the board effect device 44, and the display device 4 is provided.
It is an accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display in 1.

The internal accessory 44c is for making the character "extreme" of the internal accessory 44c stand out with a motor or the like (not shown) capable of positioning the character "extreme" in front of the display device 41 (on the player side). Is provided with a light emitting member (for example, an LED) capable of emitting light around the character.

Further, the internal accessory 44d is referred to as "heat" with a motor or the like (not shown) capable of locating the character "heat" of the internal accessory 44d in front of the display screen of the display device 41 (on the player side). A light emitting member (for example, an LED) capable of emitting light around the character is provided in order to make the character stand out.

Therefore, since the internal accessories 44c and 44d are both movable, the characters "extreme heat" visible to the player are arranged in front of the display device 41 (FIGS. 86, 90, and 93). reference). As shown in FIG. 86, in the game board 30 according to the eighth embodiment, when the pattern is raised on the surface of the light guide plate 251 and the internal accessories 44c and 44d are moved, the pattern and the internal accessory are moved. 44c and 44d are overlapped with each other in front of the display screen of the display device 41.

[Light guide plate control process]
FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the light guide plate control process according to the eighth embodiment. The light guide plate control process may be executed by the effect control device 300, for example, as a part of the decoration control process (B0020) in the main process (FIG. 36).

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the power is turned on (B7001). It should be noted that it may be determined whether or not the power failure is restored.

When the effect control device 300 determines that the power is not turned on (the result of B7001 is "N"), the effect control device 300 performs a normal control process according to the effect content set in the variable effect setting process (FIG. 44). It starts (B7003) and ends the light guide plate control process. On the other hand, the effect control device 300 is
When it is determined that the power is turned on (the result of B7001 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the command for which the probability setting is being changed is received (B7002).

In the process of step B7002, when the command whose probability setting is being changed represents the setting change system by the command whose probability setting is being changed in the one-shot command process (FIG. 39) (the result of B1325 is "Y"), It is determined that the command has been received. That is, the front frame 12 (main body frame, main body portion) is opened (the result of A1023 or A1027 in FIG. 5A is "Y"), and the setting key switch 93 of the setting change device 42 is turned on (A1024 or A1).
The result of 028 is "Y"), and the command during which the probability setting is being changed is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (A1041 in FIG. 5B). Setting change device 42 while changing the probability setting
By pressing the setting value change switch 102 of, the setting value related to the game condition is changed. Further, the information of the set value regarding the changed game condition is displayed on the probability set value display device 143.

Then, when the effect control device 300 determines that the command during the probability setting change has not been received (the result of B7002 is "N"), that is, when the power is normally turned on, the internal accessory 44c, It is determined whether or not 44d is in the initial operation (B7005).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the effect control device 300 has received the command for which the probability setting is being changed (the result of B7002 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the command for completing the probability setting change is received. Judgment (B7004).

In the process of step B7004, the command for ending the probability setting change is a single-shot command process (FIG. 39) when the MODE section represents the setting change system by the command for ending the probability setting change (the result of B1325 is "Y"). It is determined that the command has been received. That is, the probability setting value has been changed (the result of A2406 in FIG. 10 is "Y"), and the setting key switch 93 is turned off (the result of A2416 is "Y"), so that the command to end the probability setting change is a game. It is transmitted from the control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (A2421).

Then, when it is determined that the effect control device 300 has not received the command to end the probability setting change (the result of B7004 is "N"), that is, when the probability setting is being changed, the light guide plate control process is terminated. do.

On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the command for ending the probability setting change is received (the result of B7004 is "Y"), that is, when the probability setting change is completed (after the setting is completed). It is determined whether or not the internal accessories 44c and 44d are in the initial operation (B7005).
..

In the process of step B7005, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the internal accessories 44c and 44d are in the initial operation (B7005). The details of the initial operation of the internal accessories 44c and 44d will be described later with reference to FIG. 88.

When it is determined that the internal accessories 44c and 44d are in the initial operation (the result of B7005 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 ends the light guide plate control process. In this way, the internal accessory 4
During the initial operation of 4c and 44d, the light emission (initial operation) of the light guide plate 251 is not executed. During the initial operation of the internal accessories 44c and 44d, the effect control device 300 may not perform not only the light emission due to the initial operation of the light guide plate 251 but also the light emission due to the light emission effect.

On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the internal accessories 44c and 44d are not in the initial operation (the result of B7005 is "N"), the effect control device 300 performs the initial operation control process of the light guide plate 251 (.
B7006).

In the initial operation control process (B7006) of the light guide plate 251, as shown in FIG. 89, for example, the effect control device 300 causes all the light emitting members attached to the ends of the light guide plate 251 to emit light as the initial operation, and emits light. Control is performed to reflect the light from the member forward from the light guide plate 251 (.
Initial operation control).

FIG. 89 is a front view of the game board 30 when the light guide plate 251 according to the eighth embodiment operates initially. The game hall manager and the like (including the hall staff) can confirm that the light guide plate 251 and the light emitting member operate normally by visually recognizing the pattern floating on the surface of the light guide plate 251. When the initial operation control process (B7006) of the light guide plate 251 is completed, the effect control device 300 ends the light guide plate control process. If the initial operation control condition of the external accessory 95a described later in FIG. 88 is satisfied (the result of B7109 is "N"), as shown in FIG. 89, the external accessory 95a is controlled together with the initial operation control of the light guide plate 251. The initial operation control of may be performed. The external accessory 95a is a part of the frame effecting device, and is an accessory that can be operated so as to project from above the glass frame 15 (open portion), for example. Further, although the display screen of the display device 41 is turned off so that the pattern of the light guide plate 251 can be easily seen, the display may be displayed in a state where the brightness is lower than usual, and the basic color is a dark color such as black. On the screen, characters such as "Initializing" (for example, character 4 in FIG. 90) are placed at a position that does not overlap with the pattern of the light guide plate 251 (a position that can be visually recognized from the front by the game hall manager or the like).
31) may be displayed.

[Movable body control process]
FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the movable body control process according to the eighth embodiment.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the power is turned on (B7101). It should be noted that it may be determined whether or not the power failure is restored.

When the effect control device 300 determines that the power is not turned on (the result of B7101 is "N"), the effect control device 300 performs a normal control process according to the effect content set in the variable effect setting process (FIG. 44). It starts (B7103) and ends the movable body control process. On the other hand, the effect control device 300 is
When it is determined that the power is turned on (the result of B7101 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the command for which the probability setting is being changed is received (B7102).

When the effect control device 300 determines that the command for which the probability setting is being changed has been received (B).
The result of 7102 is "Y"), and it is determined whether or not the command for completing the probability setting change is received (B7104). On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the command during the probability setting change has not been received (the result of B7102 is "N"), that is, when the power is normally turned on, the light guide plate 251 It is determined whether or not the initial operation is in progress (B7105).

In the process of step B7104, when the effect control device 300 determines that the command for ending the probability setting change is received (the result of B7104 is "Y"), that is, when the probability setting change is completed (setting end). Later), it is determined whether or not the light guide plate 251 is in the initial operation (B7105). On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the command for ending the probability setting change has not been received (the result of B7104 is "N"), that is, when the probability setting is being changed, the internal accessory 44c, The initial operation control process is started only for 44d (B7107).

In the initial operation control process (B7107) of the internal accessories 44c and 44d, for example, the motor for moving the internal accessories 44c and the motor for moving the internal accessories 44d of the board effect device 44 are driven to drive the characters "extreme heat". After operating the internal accessories 44c and 44d in front of the display screen of the display device 41 so that the internal characters 44c and 44d can be recognized, control is performed to operate the internal accessories 44c and 44d to the initial position (initial operation control). For example, after the initial operation control of the internal accessory 44c is completed, the internal accessory 44d
The initial operation control of the internal accessory 44c and the initial operation control of the internal accessory 44d may be sequentially executed so that the initial operation control of the internal accessory 44c is performed. Further, when other internal accessories different from the internal accessories 44c and 44d are further attached, the initial operation control of each internal accessory is similarly executed in order.

Further, in the process of step B7105, when the effect control device 300 determines that the light guide plate 251 is in the initial operation (the result of B7105 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 is step B7109.
It is determined whether or not a main body frame opening error has occurred due to the main body frame being opened (B7109). On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the light guide plate 251 is not in the initial operation (the result of B7105 is "N"), the process proceeds to step B7106, and a main body frame opening error occurs. Whether or not it is determined (B7106). For example, when a state on command indicating a main body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is received as an error / illegal command (B1315), it can be determined that a main body frame opening error is occurring.

In the process of step B7106, when the effect control device 300 determines that the main body frame opening error has occurred (the result of B7106 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 starts the initial operation control process only for the internal accessories 44c and 44d (the result of B7106 is "Y"). B7107). On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the main body frame opening error has not occurred (the result of B7106 is "N"), as shown in FIG. 90, the internal accessories 44c and 44d and the external accessories 95a Start initial operation control processing (B710)
8).

FIG. 90 is a front view of the game board 30 when the internal accessories 44c and 44d and the external accessories 95a according to the eighth embodiment are initially operated. In the process of step B7108, the effect control device 300 performs the initial operation control process of the external accessory 95a together with the initial operation control process of the internal accessory 44c and 44d, as shown in FIG. 90, for example. Further, as shown in FIG. 90, when the internal accessories 44c and 44d move to the front of the display screen of the display device 41, the positions do not overlap from the front (positions that can be visually recognized from the front by the game hall manager or the like). The character 431 "Initializing" is displayed. Initial operation control processing of internal accessories 44c, 44d and external accessories 95a (B7108)
) Is completed, the effect control device 300 ends the movable body control process.

Further, in the process of step B7109, when it is determined that the main body frame opening error has occurred (the result of B7109 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 ends the movable body control process.
On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the main body frame opening error has not occurred (B).
The result of 7109 is "N"), and the initial operation control process is started only for the external accessory 95a (B711).
0). While the light guide plate 251 is in the initial operation (the result of B7105 is "Y"), the initial operation control process of the external accessory 95a is started, so that the game hall manager and the like can perform the external combination as shown in FIG. The operation of the object 95a and the pattern of the light guide plate 251 can be confirmed at the same time. After that, the effect control device 300 ends the movable body control process. Further, during the initial operation of the light guide plate 251 (B7).
Although the result of 105 is "Y"), the initial operation is executed only for the external accessory 95a (when the result is "Y").
B7110), the initial operation of the internal accessories 44c and 44d is not executed. The light guide plate 251
During the initial operation of, the effect control device 300 is not limited to the initial operation of the internal accessories 44c and 44d, and may not be moved by the effect, and the light emitting members of the internal accessories 44c and 44d may also emit light. You may not do it.

[Timing chart of initial operation control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the timing of the initial operation control processing of the effect control device 300 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 91 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the initial operation control process according to the eighth embodiment.

When the power is turned on in a normal state at time T71, the initial operation control process of the light guide plate 251 is started (B7006), and as shown in FIG. 89, the light emitting member (LED) at the end of the light guide plate 251.
Starts emitting light.

Further, when the initial operation control process of the light guide plate 251 is started (the result of B7105 is "Y".
”), The initial operation control process of the external accessory 95a is started by the movable body control process (B711).
0), the external accessory 95a moves (operates) to a position protruding from above the game board 30. On the other hand, the internal accessories 44c and 44d are stopped without initial operation control, and the display screen of the display device 41 is turned off (off state).

At time T72, when the initial operation control process of the light guide plate 251 is completed (the result of B7105 is "N"), the light emitting member of the light guide plate 251 ends the light emission, and the initial operation control of the internal accessories 44c and 44d is performed. It is started (B7108), and as shown in FIG. 90, the internal accessories 44c and 44d move (operate) to the front of the display screen of the display device 41. The initial operation control process of the external accessory 95a is continuously performed. Further, on the display screen of the display device 41, the characters 431 "initializing" are displayed at positions that do not overlap the internal accessories 44c and 44d (for example, at the lower right of the screen).
Initialization display).

At time T73, the movement (operation) of the external accessory 95a and the internal accessory 44c, 44d ends, the light emitting members of the internal accessory 44c, 44d start emitting light at the respective positions, and the light emission ends at time T74. , The movement of the external accessory 95a and the internal accessory 44c, 44d starts to return to the original position. As described above, while the internal accessories 44c and 44d (movable accessories) themselves are moving (during operation), the light emitting members of the internal accessories 44c and 44d emit light (initial operation) in front of the display device 41.
Do not execute. The movement of the external accessory 95a and the movement of the internal accessories 44c and 44d do not have to be started or ended at the same time.

When the movement of the internal accessories 44c and 44d is completed at the time T75, the initialization display displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 disappears and the screen changes to the normal display screen (normal display). After that, at time T76, the movement of the external accessory 95a is completed, and the initial operation control process of the effect control device 300 is completed. The display screen of the display device 41 may be switched to the normal display when the movement of the external accessory 95a at the time T76 is completed.

It is decided that the initial operation control processing of the internal accessories 44c and 44d is performed after the initial operation control processing of the light guide plate 251 is completed, but the order may be reversed. That is, the internal accessory 44
The initial operation control process of the light guide plate 251 may be performed after the initial operation control process of c and 44d is completed.

[Game board when a variable display game is played during normal times]
Next, a case where the variable display game is played in the normal time of the effect control device 300 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 and 93. FIG. 92 is a front view of the game board 30 when the variable display game according to the eighth embodiment is being executed.

When a variable display game is played during normal times (when the initial operation control process is being performed, the probability setting is being changed, or the probability setting is not being confirmed), the display of the game board 30 according to the eighth embodiment is displayed as shown in FIG. On the display screen of the device 41, a plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B) are displayed.
, Medium area 610C), the decorative first symbols A to C (identification information, identification symbol, decorative special symbol) are displayed in a variable manner. For example, the first decorative symbols A to C are displayed as "7 ↓ 7" in a reach state as shown in FIG. 92. Further, the internal accessories 44c and 44d are stopped at the position (initial position) before they are movable (operated), and a part of the lower portion of the internal accessories 44c overlaps the upper end of the display screen of the display device 41. A part of the upper part of the internal accessory 44d overlaps with the lower end of the display screen.

FIG. 93 is a front view of the game board 30 when a reach effect, which is an effect corresponding to the reach state, is performed while the variable display game according to the eighth embodiment is being executed.

When the reach effect is performed, for example, as shown in FIG. 93, a light emission effect is performed in which the lighting members around the frame decoration devices 18a and 18b and the upper speaker 19a emit light, and the internal accessories 44c and 44b are emitted.
Moves (moves, moves) to the front of the display screen of the display device 41, and the player can recognize that the characters "super heat" are displayed side by side. In addition, a light emitting effect is performed in which the light emitting members of the internal accessories 44c and 44b emit light, and an effect corresponding to the reach effect is also displayed on the display screen of the display device 41.

Then, by performing the reach effect from the state of FIG. 92, as shown in FIG. 93,
The decorative first symbols A to C of the variable display area 610 are displayed small at the lower right of the display screen. Instead of the decorative first symbols A to C in the variable display area 610, the decorative reduced symbol (small symbol) in the variable display area 615 may be displayed small at the lower right of the display screen.

[Game board when a variable display game is played during the initial motion control process]
Next, a case where a variable display game is played during the initial operation control process of the effect control device 300 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 94. FIG. 94 is a front view of the game board 30 when the reach effect is performed in the variable display game while the initial operation control process according to the eighth embodiment is being executed.

When a variable display game is played during the initial operation control process, as shown in FIG. 94, the lower right of the display screen of the display device 41 of the game board 30 according to the eighth embodiment is decorated in the same manner as in the normal case. 1 While the variation display "7 ↓ 7" of symbols A to C is displayed small, the display screen effect corresponding to the reach effect of FIG. 93 is not displayed. For example, the display screen of the display device 41 is decorated with the first symbols A to C.
It is displayed on a black screen with no display other than. In addition, on the display screen of the display device 41, the decoration first
The initialization display may be displayed together with the variation display "7 ↓ 7" of the symbols A to C, or the entire screen may be displayed dark when the initialization display is performed.

Further, in the internal accessories 44c and 44d that are stopped at the initial position, a light emitting effect is performed in which the light emitting member emits light on the spot without moving. Therefore, from the player, the internal character 44
It can be visually recognized that a part of the lower end of c and a part of the upper part of the internal accessory 44d are emitting light.

The light emitting member of the internal accessories 44c and 44d emits light even during the initial operation control process, but unlike the light emission effect accompanying the reach effect, the internal accessories 44c and 44d move to the front of the display screen of the display device 41. After that, light emission is performed by the initial operation control process. Further, the time for light emission by the initial operation control process (from time T73 to time T74 shown in FIG. 91) may be any time as long as the game hall manager or the like can confirm the light emission operation (for example, 5 sec), and the reach effect is achieved. It is a relatively short time as compared with the time for emitting light (for example, 30 sec) due to the accompanying light emission effect.
Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the light emitting effect of the light emitting members of the internal accessories 44c and 44d, he / she can recognize that the light emitting effect is not due to the initial operation control process but is due to the reach effect.

[Modification example of the game board when a variable display game is played during the initial motion control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, a modification in the case where the variation display game is performed during the initial operation control process of the effect control device 300 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 95 is a modified example of the front view of the game board 30 when the reach effect is performed in the variable display game while the initial operation control process according to the eighth embodiment is being executed.

When a variable display game is played during the initial operation control process, as shown in FIG. 95, the lower right of the display screen of the display device 41 of the game board 30 of the modified example according to the eighth embodiment is the same as in the normal state. While the variation display "7 ↓ 7" of the first symbols A to C is displayed small, the display screen effect corresponding to the reach effect of FIG. 93 is not displayed. For example, the display screen of the display device 41 is displayed as a black screen without any display other than the decorative first symbols A to C. In addition, on the display screen of the display device 41,
The initialization display may be displayed together with the variation display "7 ↓ 7" of the decoration first symbols A to C, or the entire screen may be displayed dark when the initialization display is performed.

Further, in accordance with the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 95, a light emission effect is performed in which the lighting members around the frame decoration devices 18a and 18b and the upper speaker 19a emit light. On the other hand, the internal accessory 44c
, 44d keeps stopping at the initial position, and the light emitting member keeps turning off. The frame decoration device 1
The time (for example, 5 sec) for emitting light by the initial operation control processing of the lighting members around the 8a and 18b and the upper speaker 19a is the light emitting effect accompanying the reach effect, as in the internal accessories 44c and 44d described with reference to FIG. It is a relatively short time as compared with the time for emitting light (for example, 30 sec). Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the light emission effect of the lighting members around the frame decoration devices 18a and 18b and the upper speaker 19a, the player recognizes that the light emission effect is not due to the initial operation process but is due to the reach effect. Can be done.

[Modification example of the game board when a variable display game is played during the initial motion control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, a second modification in the case where the variation display game is played during the initial operation control process of the effect control device 300 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 96 is a second modification of the front view of the game board 30 when the reach effect is performed in the variable display game while the initial operation control process according to the eighth embodiment is being executed.

When a variable display game is played during the initial operation control process, as shown in FIG. 96, a normal time is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the display device 41 of the game board 30 of the second modification according to the eighth embodiment. Similarly, the variation display "7 ↓ 7" of the decoration first symbols A to C is displayed in a small size, and the effect corresponding to the reach effect (original reach effect) of FIG. 93 is displayed on the entire display screen. therefore,
The player can recognize that the reach effect is being performed by visually recognizing the effect displayed on the display screen of the display device 41.

On the other hand, the internal accessories 44c and 44d continue to stop at the initial position, and the light emitting member also keeps turning off. Further, the lighting members around the frame decoration devices 18a and 18b and the upper speaker 19a are also maintained in the extinguished state.

[Action / effect of the eighth embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment is an effect related to a variable display game (special symbol variable display game) that changes identification information (identification symbol, decorative special symbol, decorative first symbols A to C, this special symbol). Is provided on the display device 41 with an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying the above. The gaming machine 10 has a movable accessory (internal accessory 44c, 44d) capable of executing a predetermined operation in front of the display device 41, and a light emission effect means (guidance) capable of executing a predetermined light emission effect in front of the display device 41. A light plate 251 and a light emitting member thereof, or a light emitting member of internal accessories 44c and 44d) are provided. The production control means is
By turning on the power to the gaming machine 10, the initial operation of the movable accessory and the light emitting effect means can be executed, and during the initial operation of the light emitting effect means, the initial operation of the movable accessory and a predetermined operation are performed. Do not execute.

According to such a gaming machine 10, movable accessories (internal accessories 44c, 44d) and light emitting effect means (light guide plate 251 and its light emitting members, or internal accessories) are used as a plurality of members for producing a game-related effect. Since the initial operation of the light emitting members of 44c and 44d can be easily confirmed, maintenance can be performed efficiently.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the light emitting effect means (light guide plate 251 and its light emitting member, or the light emitting member of the internal accessories 44c and 44d) is predetermined based on the irradiation of light from the end portion. The light guide plate 251 in which the pattern of the light guide plate 251 emerges and the light guide plate 2 so as to face the opposite surface of the light guide plate 251.
It has an irradiation means (light emitting member of the light guide plate 251) which is arranged at the end of the 51 and can irradiate the light guide plate 251 with light. The effect control means (effect control device 300) performs the initial operation and the predetermined operation of the movable accessory (internal accessory 44c, 44d) while the irradiation means of the light emission effect means irradiates the light by the initial operation. Do not execute. According to such a game machine 10, the game hall manager and the like can confirm the initial operation of the light guide plate 251 and the movable accessory separately, so that maintenance can be performed efficiently.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the light emitting effect means is a movable accessory (internal accessory 44).
It is a light emitting source (light emitting member) installed in c, 44d). According to such a gaming machine 10,
Since the operation of the movable accessory itself and the light emission operation of the light emitting effect means of the movable accessory can be confirmed separately as initial operations, maintenance can be performed efficiently in the same manner as described above.

The gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment is an effect related to a variable display game (special symbol variable display game) that changes identification information (identification symbol, decorative special symbol, decorative first symbols A to C, this special symbol). Is provided on the display device 41 with an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying the above. The gaming machine 10 has a movable accessory (internal accessory 44c, 44d) capable of executing a predetermined operation in front of the display device 41, and a light emission effect means (guidance) capable of executing a predetermined light emission effect in front of the display device 41. A light plate 251 and a light emitting member thereof, or a light emitting member of internal accessories 44c and 44d) are provided. The production control means is
By turning on the power to the gaming machine 10, the initial operation of the movable accessory and the light emitting effect means can be executed, and during the initial operation of the movable accessory, the light emitting effect and the initial operation of the light emitting effect means are executed. do not.

According to such a gaming machine 10, movable accessories (internal accessories 44c, 44d) and light emitting effect means (light guide plate 251 and its light emitting members, or internal accessories) are used as a plurality of members for producing a game-related effect. Since the initial operation of the light emitting members of 44c and 44d can be easily confirmed, maintenance can be performed efficiently.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the light emitting effect means guides the light guide plate 251 at which a predetermined pattern emerges based on the irradiation of light from the end portion so as to face the opposite surface of the light guide plate 251. It has an irradiation means (light emitting member of the light guide plate 251) which is arranged at the end of the light plate 251 and can irradiate the light guide plate 251 with light. The effect control means (effect control device 300) is a movable accessory (effect control device 300).
During the initial operation of the internal accessories 44c, 44d), the irradiation means is not irradiated with light. According to such a game machine 10, the game hall manager and the like can confirm the initial operation of the light guide plate 251 and the movable accessory separately, so that maintenance can be performed efficiently.

[9th Embodiment]
A ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 97. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to eighth embodiments. The ninth embodiment relates to the production of a variable display game before and after the recovery from a power failure.

[Timing chart of the display mode of the variable display game according to the ninth embodiment]
FIG. 97 shows a display mode (effect mode) of the variation display game before and after the power failure recovery according to the ninth embodiment.
It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of.

At time T81, when there are two hold and hit hold in this order in the start memory,
When the variable display game based on the off hold is started, the special figure LED (special figure display (special figure 1 display 51 or special figure 2 display 52), light emitting unit) used to execute the variable display game. Light emission starts (on), and on the display screen of the display device 41, the decorative identification symbol (identification information, identification symbol,
The variable display by the decorative special symbol, the decorative first symbols A to C, and the present symbol) is started. Note that the off hold is a hold (start memory) in which the display result (stop result) of the variable display game is the off stop mode, and the hit hold is the hold when the display result of the variable display game is the big hit result (special result). Is.

On the other hand, the gaming state is not a special gaming state (big hit state) but a normal gaming state, and the internal accessories (44c, 44d) are stopped.

Then, the power is turned off at time T82 due to the power failure, and after the power failure state continues until time T83, when the power is turned on (recovery) at time T83, the fluctuation display game based on the outage hold is restarted, and the special figure The LED emission starts again (on). On the other hand, on the display screen of the display device 41, a power failure recovery screen (startup screen) is displayed instead of the decorative identification symbol. After that, the initial operation control processing of the internal accessories 44c and 44d is started with the power recovery, so that the internal accessories 44c
, 44d's initial operation is performed as the first operation.

In the game control device 100 (starting storage means), a power failure occurs in a state where the starting storage stored in the RAM includes a starting memory in which the display result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit result (special result). In such a case, the backup power supply unit 420 can retain the start memory that has the special result.

At time T84, when the variable display game based on the out-of-order hold ends, the special figure LED is turned off (off). It should be noted that the special figure LED may be made to emit light (on) in a state where the detachment is stopped.

Then, when the variable display game based on the hit hold is executed at the time T85, the special figure LED starts to emit light (on). Further, on the display screen of the display device 41, when the power failure recovery screen ends, the decorative identification symbol is variablely displayed in accordance with the variable display game based on the hit hold, and the reach effect is started. After that, the effects of the internal accessories 44c and 44d corresponding to the reach effect are executed as the reach operation (second operation).

At time T86, when the variation display game based on the hit hold ends, the special figure LED is turned off (off), and the reach operation of the internal accessory 44c44d ends. In addition, the big hit result mode (
The special figure LED may be made to emit light (on) in the state of the special result mode). Then, the decorative identification symbol on the display screen of the display device 41 stops the variable display, displays a jackpot result mode (special result mode) such as "777", and produces a fanfare effect from time T86 to time T87 (not shown). ), The big hit effect (big hit medium screen, big hit round effect) is started from time T87.

When the big hit effect is started at time T87, the game state becomes the big hit medium (big hit state, special game state), and the effects of the internal accessories 44c and 44d corresponding to the big hit effect are the big hit medium operation (third operation). Will be executed. In this way, the internal accessories 44c and 44d, which are the same movable accessories, operate in each of the first operation, the second operation, and the third operation.

In addition, when the variable display game based on the hit hold is executed, the internal characters 44c, 44
If the initial operation (first operation) of d is not completed, the reach operation (second operation) is skipped without being executed, and the jackpot operation (third operation) is performed as the first operation. It may be executed after.

Further, when the power is turned on (recovered) at the time T83, the fluctuation display game based on the out-of-order hold may not be restarted, but may be restarted from the beginning. In this way, by starting over from the beginning, even if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game based on the out-of-order hold is short (in the case of non-reach fluctuation), there is a time margin, and during the fluctuation display game, the internal characters 44c, 44
Since the initial operation (first operation) of d is likely to be completed, the operation during reach (second operation) is performed after the initial operation.
Operation) can be executed without skipping.

In addition, the same movable accessory (internal accessory 44c, 44d) is operated in both the initial operation (first operation) and the reach operation (second operation), and the movable accessory is a big hit. Medium operation (
The third operation) may not be executed. Further, the big hit middle operation (third operation) may be executed by another movable accessory (movable accessory other than the internal accessory 44c and 44d (for example, the external accessory 95a)). Even in such an aspect, since the initial operation of the movable accessory is executed during the variable display game based on the off hold, the reach operation by the movable accessory is immediately started during the reach production of the variable display game based on the hit hold. It can improve the fun of the game.

[Action / effect of the ninth embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment is a variable display game (special figure variable display game) in which identification information (identification symbol, decorative special symbol, decorative identification symbol, decorative first symbols A to C, main special figure) is changed. When the display result of is a special result (big hit result mode), a special game state (during big hit, big hit game state) that gives the player a game value can be generated. The game machine 10 has a start memory (hold) that is a right to execute a variable display game based on the establishment of a start condition (for example, a prize in a start winning opening) and a movable accessory (internal accessory 44c, 44d) that performs a game effect. The start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing the start memory, the control of the movable accessory, and the control of displaying the start memory display (hold display 643 during special figure change, hold display 633) corresponding to the start memory. The effect control means (effect control device 300) that can be executed is provided. The start storage means holds the start memory that becomes the special result when a power failure occurs in the state that the start memory that the display result of the variable display game becomes a special result is included in the stored start memory. The effect control means recovers from the power failure when a power failure (power off) occurs in a state where the start memory stored by the start storage means includes a start memory in which the display result of the variable display game is a special result. Later, the movable accessory is operated in the first motion (initial motion), and in the variable display game executed after the first motion, the movable accessory is operated in the second motion (movement during reach), and the second motion is performed. In the special gaming state executed after the movement of, the movable accessory is operated in the third movement (movement during big hit), and is the same in any of the first movement, the second movement, or the third movement. Operate the movable accessory of.

According to such a gaming machine 10, after a power failure recovery (recovery), a movable accessory (internal accessory 44c,
By performing the first operation (initial operation) according to 44d), the second operation (operation during reach)
Since it becomes possible to immediately start the production of a movable accessory by the third movement (movement during a big hit), it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is
A variable display game (held) stored in the start storage (hold) stored by the start storage means (game control device 100).
When a power failure (power off) occurs while the start memory that the display result of the special figure fluctuation display game) is a special result (big hit result mode) is included, a movable accessory (movable accessory (power off) after the power failure is restored.
The internal accessory 44c, 44d) is operated in the first operation (initial operation), and in the variable display game executed after the first operation, the movable accessory is operated in the second operation (operation during reach). , The same movable accessory is operated in both the first operation and the second operation. Such a gaming machine 1
According to 0, after the power failure is restored (recovery), the first operation (initial operation) by the movable accessory (internal accessory 44c, 44d) is performed, so that the movable accessory (operation during reach) is movable. Since the production of the character can be started immediately, the interest of the game can be improved in the same way.

[10th Embodiment]
The tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to ninth embodiments. The tenth embodiment relates to the display of identification information (decorative special symbol, decorative identification symbol) when a big hit occurs.

[An example of the display screen of the display device according to the tenth embodiment]
FIG. 98 shows the display device 41 when the identification information (identification symbol, decorative special symbol, decorative identification symbol, decorative first symbols A to C, present special symbol) is displayed in each display mode in the tenth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a display screen.

First, FIG. 98 (a) shows a normal gaming state, that is, when the gaming state is in the first period.
This is a display screen of the display device 41 when the stop result (display result) of the variable display game (special figure variable display game) is the jackpot result mode (special result mode), that is, the first display mode. The first decoration of the variable display area 610 (left area 610A (left variable display area 610A), right area 610B (right variable display area 610B), middle area 610C (center variable display area 610C)).
Symbols A to C (left symbol 611a, right symbol 611b, middle symbol 611c) are, for example, "777".
The character "! Big hit!" Is displayed at the top of the display screen.

The decoration of the first display mode In the first symbols A to C, the character (tiger taro) and the character of the character name "tiger taro" are displayed together with the identification information (design) "7".

When the variable display game is stopped, the start memory (hold) corresponding to the variable display game is digested, and the special figure of the reserved digestion area 640 (specific display unit, changing hold display area) is being changed. The hold display 643 (starting memory display, hold display during special drawing digestion) is hidden. Further, although the hold display unit 630 (start storage display unit) and the hold display 633 (hold, start storage) are hidden, the hold display unit 630 may be displayed. Further, the effect control device 300 uses the decorative first symbols A to C of the first display mode to cause a character (tiger taro, etc.) to perform a predetermined operation at the time of temporary stop, thereby causing a jackpot symbol (for example, "777"). May be made to stop.

Next, FIG. 98 (b) shows the stop result of the variable display game (special figure variable display game) when the game state is in the specific gaming state (probability change state, probability fluctuation state, time saving state), that is, during the second period. This is a display screen of the display device 41 when (display result) is a jackpot result mode (special result mode), that is, a second display mode. Variable display area 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B)
, Middle area 610C) decoration 1st symbols A to C (left symbol 611a, right symbol 611b, middle symbol 6)
11c) is stopped in the jackpot result mode, for example, "777", and "!" At the top of the display screen.
Big hit! Character is displayed. When the gaming state is the specific gaming state, for example, a right-handed instruction notification 691 which is a notification for instructing right-handed may be displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. Further, as in the first display mode, the pending display 643 and the like during the change of the special figure are hidden.

In the decorations 1st symbols A to C of the second display mode, only the identification information (symbol) "7" is displayed in large size, and the characters and the characters of the character's name are not displayed.

FIG. 98 (c) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the gaming state is a special gaming state (big hit state), that is, during the third period. On the display screen, a round effect is displayed as an operation related to the effect during the big hit. In the upper left corner of the display screen, a round number display 676 that displays the current number of big hit rounds is displayed, for example, "8 ROUND".

Further, as the identification information (design) of the third display mode, the variable display area 6 in the lower left corner of the display screen
10D (stop symbol display area 610D), a variable display game when the jackpot result mode is reached (
Only one identification information (stop symbol 611d) of the stop result (display result) of the special figure variation display game is displayed (for example, "7"). Therefore, the player can visually confirm which symbol is the big hit by visually recognizing the identification information (stop symbol 611d) of the third display mode during the round. As a result, the player can easily recognize the type of the specific gaming state (probability change state, probability fluctuation state, time saving state) that shifts after the end of the round from the symbol type (probability change jackpot symbol or normal jackpot symbol) even during the round. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. The identification information (stop symbol 611d) of the third display mode may be displayed in substantially the same display mode as the first display mode or the second display mode. Further, the identification information (design) of the third display mode may be displayed on the display screen not only during the round but also during the ending. Further, the identification information of the third display mode may be produced by rotating the axis as it is (for example, "7"). Further, the identification information of the third display mode may be axially rotated according to the effect during the round with the design as it is (for example, "7").

In either case of the big hit state (special result) in the first display mode or the big hit state in the second display mode, the effect control device 300 is in the big hit gaming state (special gaming state). The identification information (stop symbol 611d) can be displayed in the third display mode during (round, fanfare effect, ending effect). Therefore, the player can confirm the stop symbol 611d every time when the special game state is reached, and it is easy to grasp in advance the advantageous state (specific game state, privilege) that occurs after the end of the special game state. Become.

Further, the identification information (design) may be configured to include one or more common elements in any of the first to third display modes, for example, all the numbers of the symbols are displayed in red. good.

[Screen transition diagram of the display screen of the display device according to the tenth embodiment]
FIG. 99 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in the tenth embodiment, and the display result of the variable display game (special figure variable display game) is a special result mode (big hit result mode). This is an example of the screen transition of the entire game from the time when the game becomes, until the special game (big hit round) is started.

FIG. 99 (b1) is the same diagram as in FIG. 98 (a), and when the game state is the normal game state (during the first period), the stop result (display result) of the variable display game is the jackpot result mode (display result). (Special result mode), that is, the display screen of the display device 41 in the case of the first display mode.

As shown in FIG. 99 (b2), the effect control device 300 hides the decorative first symbols A to C of the first display mode. Further, the effect control device 300 is a decorative first symbol B (decorative pattern B) of the variable display area 610B displayed when the big hit result mode is obtained as a part of the fanfare effect.
The identification information (stop symbol 611d) of the third display mode of the variable display area 610D is displayed at the position where the number (identification information, symbol) (for example, “7”) of the right symbol 611b) is present. Although the characters "! Big hit!" Are left at the top of the display screen, they may be hidden.

Then, as shown by the broken line arrow in FIG. 99 (b3), the effect control device 300 smoothly moves the identification information (stop symbol 611d) of the third display mode of the variation display area 610D to the lower center of the display screen. As a result, the player can visually recognize the mode in which the "7" of the stop symbol 611d moves.

After that, as shown in FIG. 99 (b4), the effect control device 300 smoothly moves the identification information (stop symbol 611d) of the third display mode of the variable display area 610D to the lower left corner of the display screen by the start of the round. By doing so, the stop symbol 61 of the third display mode described above in FIG. 98 (c)
Like 1d, "7" is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen, and the round effect is started ("1".
"ROUND" is displayed).

In this way, when the display result of the variable display game is the jackpot result mode, the decoration first symbol B (right symbol 611b) of the first display mode is applied from the fanfare effect to the round effect.
The identification information (stop symbol 611d) of the third display mode is displayed in the place where is displayed, and the stop symbol 611d is smoothly moved to the lower left corner of the display screen as it is, so that the specific game after the end of the round is completed. Not only can the player easily recognize the type of state, but also the visual effect can be produced, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

In FIG. 99, the identification information (stop symbol 611d) of the third display mode is displayed in the place where the decorative first symbol B (right symbol 611b) is displayed among the identification information (symbols) of the first display mode. Is displayed, and the stop symbol 611d is moved to the lower left corner of the display screen, but the decorative first symbol A (left symbol 611a) or the decorative first symbol C (middle symbol 611c) of the first display mode is displayed. The stop symbol 611d may be displayed at the displayed place, and the stop symbol 611d may be moved to the lower left corner of the display screen.

[Action / effect of the tenth embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment is an effect related to a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that changes identification information (identification symbol, decorative special symbol, decorative first symbols A to C, this special figure). Is provided on the display device 41 with an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying the above. The effect control means displays the identification information in the first display mode (big hit result mode in the normal game state (FIG. 98 (a))) during the first period (normal game state), and the second period. The identification information is displayed in the second display mode (big hit result mode in the specific game state (FIG. 98 (b))) in the middle (specific game state), and the display result of the variable display game is a special result (big hit). During the special game state (big hit game state) in which the game value is given to the player when the state is reached), the identification information is displayed in the third display mode (display mode in the special game state (FIG. 98 (c)). )) Display.

According to such a gaming machine 10, by changing the display mode of the identification information according to the gaming state, it is possible to notify the player whether or not the gaming state is advantageous to the player, so that the interest of the game can be improved. Can be done. Further, by displaying the identification information during the special gaming state, it becomes easy to grasp in advance the advantageous state (specific gaming state, privilege) that occurs after the end of the special gaming state.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) has identification information (identification symbol, decorative special symbol, decorative first symbols A to C, main special figure) as the first. During the period(
The first display mode (big hit result mode in the normal game state) (FIG. 98 (a))
)) When a special result (big hit state) is obtained, and during the second period (specific gaming state), a special result is obtained in the second display mode (big hit result mode in the specific gaming state (FIG. 98 (b)). In any case, the identification information is displayed in the third display mode (display mode in the special game state (FIG. 98 (c))) during the special game state (big hit game state). According to such a gaming machine 10, regardless of whether the special result is obtained in the first display mode or the special result is obtained in the second display mode, the third display mode is in the third display mode. Since the identification information is displayed in the display mode of, it becomes easy for the player to grasp in advance the advantageous state (specific game state, privilege) that occurs after the end of the special game state.

[11th Embodiment]
The eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 103. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to tenth embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to tenth embodiments, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate.

The eleventh embodiment relates to a configuration mode (configuration mode) of the decoration special symbol of the decoration special symbol variation display game executed by the display device 41 and a variation mode (variation display mode) of the decoration special symbol.

[Structure and variation of special decorative patterns]
FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a configuration mode and a variation mode of the decorative special symbol (decorative identification information, decorative symbol) displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. On the display screen, as a special decorative pattern
The left symbol 611a (first identification information), the right symbol 611b (second identification information), and the middle symbol 611c (third identification information) can be displayed in a variable manner. Left symbol 611a, right symbol 61
The variation display of 1b and the middle symbol 611c is displayed in the variation display area 610A on the left, the variation display area 610B on the right, and the variation display area 610C in the center, respectively. These variation displays are set as part of the variation effect by the effect control device 300 in steps B2010 and B2013 of the variation effect setting process. Regarding the fluctuation of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game, the fluctuation before the reach is established may be called the first half fluctuation, and the fluctuation after the reach is established (during the reach) may be called the second half fluctuation.

As shown in (A1) of FIG. 100, in the variation display before the reach state is reached, that is, before the reach is established, the left symbol 611a is a character image 612a (character component, character portion) and a number (character) showing a character. It is composed of a character image 613a (character component, character part) indicating. Similarly, in the variable display before the reach is established, the right symbol 611b is composed of a character image 612b (character component, character part) showing a character and a character image 613b (character component, character part) showing a number. The numbers are characters representing numbers, and include Chinese numerals and Roman numerals in addition to the Arabic numerals shown in the figure.

In the present embodiment, when the decorative special symbol includes a character and a number as an image, the character has a one-to-one correspondence with the number and is different for each number, but this is not limited to this, and the same character is used for different numbers. May be used.

On the other hand, in the fluctuation display before the reach is established in (A1), the middle symbol 611c displayed in the center.
Is composed of only a character image 613c (character component, character portion) showing a number. In this way, the middle symbol 611c is displayed smaller than the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b, and the central variation display area 610C is the left variation display area 610A and the right variation display area 610B.
Becomes smaller (narrower) than. Therefore, on the display screen, the area other than the variable display area 610 is expanded, and the effect area for performing the effect other than the variable display can be effectively secured, and the fun of the game is improved. Further, since the middle symbol 611c is composed only of the character image 613c showing the numbers and is small, it does not overlap with the left symbol 611a or the right symbol 611b (or the left variable display area 610A or the right variable display area 610B). The player has the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b.
, And, it becomes easier to visually recognize each variation display of the middle symbol 611c, and the fun of the game is improved.

In (A1), not only the middle symbol 611c but also the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611.
One of b may be composed of only character images 613a and 613b showing numbers. In this case, the area other than the variable display area 610 is further expanded on the display screen.

In addition, in order to impress the character to the player, the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611 are assumed.
When the three decorative special symbols b and the middle symbol 611c each include a character image showing a character, the three decorative special symbols occupy most of the display screen of the display device 41 and are displayed in a variable display area. There is a possibility that the effect cannot be effectively displayed except for 610.

Further, before the reach of (a1) is established, the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b are displayed in a variable manner by vertical scrolling. For example, in a vertically scrolled game, 9 corresponds to a number from 1 to 9.
A series of multiple symbols (decorative identification symbols) appear on the display screen in order, move vertically (vertically) across the display screen, and then disappear from the display screen. The left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b may be displayed in a variable manner by side-scrolling in which a series of symbols move in the horizontal direction.

On the other hand, before the reach of (a1) is established, the middle symbol 611c (third identification information) has the left symbol 611a (first identification information) and the right symbol 611b (second identification information) and the direction of variable display. Is different, and the fluctuation is displayed according to the rotation fluctuation visually recognized by the player so as to rotate around the axis. The rotation variation may be not only a mode in which one symbol rotates, but also a mode in which a series of a plurality of symbols are switched and displayed each time the rotation is performed. In addition, instead of the rotation fluctuation, the front-back movement (back-and-forth scroll) that shows a series of overlapping symbols to move in the front-back direction by perspective, or simply switching the series of multiple symbols in order at the same position. Switching fluctuations to be displayed or shaking fluctuations such that one symbol shakes slightly may be performed.

The rotation fluctuation of the middle symbol 611c (forward / backward fluctuation, switching fluctuation, and shaking fluctuation are also possible) is a fluctuation in which the symbol does not cross the display screen, and unlike the vertical scroll of the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b, the left variation display. It does not require a wide variable display area that extends long in one direction (scrolling direction) as in the area 610A and the variable display area 610B on the right. Therefore, due to the rotational variation of the middle symbol 611c, the central variation display area 610C becomes smaller (narrower) than the left variation display area 610A and the right variation display area 610B. Therefore, it is possible to effectively secure an effect area for producing an effect other than the variable display, and the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 6 are used.
It becomes easier to visually recognize each variation display of 11c, and the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in (a1), at the lower part of the display screen, two hold displays 633 are displayed in the hold display unit 630 corresponding to the hold (here, the first start storage). Further, the reserved digestion area 640 of the rectangular frame is displayed at the lower center of the display screen. The variable hold display 633a indicating the hold related to the running special figure change display game (starting memory that was the execution right of this special figure change display game) is displayed in the hold digestion area 640. However, due to the rotational fluctuation of the middle symbol 611c, the central fluctuation display area 610C becomes smaller and does not overlap with the hold display unit 630 or the hold digestion area 640. Therefore, the middle symbol 611c also has the hold display 633 or the change hold display 63.
Medium symbol 611c, hold display 633, or changing hold display 63 without overlapping with 3a
The visibility of 3a becomes good, and the interest of the game is improved. Furthermore, special figure 1 holding number display 6
50 displays the number "2" of the current special figure 1 hold (first start memory), and the special figure 2 hold number display 66.
0 displays the number "0" of the current special figure 2 hold (second start storage).

As shown in (A2) of FIG. 100, when the reach is established (when the reach is established), the left symbol 6
Since 11a and the right symbol 611b are temporarily stopped and sway and fluctuate, the fluctuation mode (that is, the fluctuation display mode) is changed from the vertical scroll before the reach is established. The configuration of the left symbol 611a does not change, and the left symbol 611a is composed of a character image 612a showing a character and a character image 613a showing a number, as in (a1). Similarly, the configuration of the right symbol 611b does not change, and the right symbol 611b is composed of a character image 612b showing a character and a character image 613b showing a number, as in (a1). However, the overall size of the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b is smaller than that before the reach is established (before the temporary stop).

On the other hand, when the reach is established in (a2), the middle symbol 611c is displayed in a variable manner by vertical scrolling, and the variation mode is changed from the variation display in the rotation variation before the reach is established. The direction of the variation display of the middle symbol 611c is the same as the direction of the variation display before the temporary stop of the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b (that is, the vertical direction or the vertical direction of the display screen). (The direction of the variable display is aligned). Therefore, it is possible to surprise the player and enhance the interest of the game by eliminating the discomfort of the player due to the rotation fluctuation of the middle symbol 611c. note that,
In (A2), a series of multiple symbols (decorative identification symbols) that move on the display screen by vertical scrolling.
Of these, the middle symbol 611c of the number 5 and the middle symbol 611c'of the number 6 are shown.

Further, when the reach of (a2) is established, the configuration mode of the middle symbol 611c is changed and changed, and the character image 612c showing the character and the character image showing the numbers are changed from the configuration mode before the reach is established only for the character image 613c. It changes to a configuration mode composed of 613c. Therefore, the configuration of the middle symbol 611c becomes the same as the configuration of the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b, and these three (three types) decorative special symbols have commonality to eliminate the discomfort of the player. In addition, it is possible to surprise the player and enhance the interest of the game. Further, the player can add the character image 612c (612c') and change the configuration to a new configuration mode.
Since attention is paid to (611c'), it becomes easy to understand the progress of the game such as the establishment of reach.

By reducing the overall size of the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b from before the reach is established (before the temporary stop), the middle symbol 611c composed of the character image 612c and the character image 613c is displayed in a vertically scrolled manner. Also, it does not overlap with the left symbol 611a or the right symbol 611b (or the left variation display area 610A or the right variation display area 610B).

In addition, the small symbol, which is a decorative special symbol that is variablely displayed in the small variable display area 615 before the reach is established and after the reach is established, does not change in the configuration mode and the variable mode, and may give the player a sense of security. can. The left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c are set as large symbols, and are variablely displayed in the small variable display area 615 as compared with the large symbol variable display area 610.
A special decorative design that is smaller than a large design is a small design. The small symbol is the above-mentioned fourth special symbol (fourth)
It may be a design).

[Modification example of the configuration mode and variation mode of the decorative special pattern]
FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a modified example of the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decorative special symbol displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. Configurations other than those described below are common to both FIGS. 101 and 100.

In (a1) of FIG. 101, the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decorative special symbol before the reach is established are changed from (a1) of FIG. 100.

As in (a1), in the variable display before the reach is established, the left symbol 611a is composed of only the character image 613a showing the numbers. Further, the right symbol 611b is a character image 6 indicating a number.
It consists of only 13b. The left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b are displayed in a variable manner by the rotation fluctuation visually recognized by the player so as to rotate about the axis. Instead of the rotation fluctuation, the above-mentioned back-and-forth fluctuation and switching fluctuation may be used.

In (a1), the left fluctuation display area 610A and the right fluctuation display area 610B become smaller (narrower) than the central fluctuation display area 610C due to the rotational fluctuation of the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b. For this reason, it is possible to effectively secure an effect area for producing an effect other than the variation display, and it becomes easier to visually recognize each variation display of the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c, and the interest of the game is improved.

On the other hand, in (a1), in the variable display before the reach is established, the middle symbol 611c is composed of a character image 612c showing a character and a character image 613c showing a number. The middle symbol 611c is displayed in a variable manner by vertical scrolling.

In (a2) of FIG. 101, when the reach is established (when the reach is established), the left symbol 611
Since a and the right symbol 611b are temporarily stopped and sway and fluctuate, the fluctuation mode is changed from the rotation fluctuation before the reach is established. Further, the configuration mode of the left symbol 611a is changed and changed, and the character image 612 showing the character is changed from the configuration mode before the reach is established only for the character image 613a.
It changes to a configuration mode composed of a and a character image 613a showing a number. In addition, the right symbol 61
The configuration mode of 1b is also changed and changed from the configuration mode before the reach is established only for the character image 613b to the configuration mode composed of the character image 612b showing the character and the character image 613b showing the numbers. By changing the configuration of the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c, it is possible to surprise the player and enhance the interest of the game.

Further, in (a2), when the reach is established, the middle symbol 611c is displayed in a variable manner due to the rotation fluctuation, and the variable mode is changed from the variable display in the vertical scroll before the reach is established. Instead of the rotation fluctuation, the above-mentioned back-and-forth fluctuation and switching fluctuation may be used. The direction of the variation display of the middle symbol 611c corresponds to the direction of the variation display of the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b before the temporary stop (that is, the circumferential direction around the axis). By changing the variation mode of the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c, it is possible to surprise the player and enhance the interest of the game.

Similarly, in (a2), due to the rotational variation of the middle symbol 611c, the central variation display area 610C becomes smaller (narrower) than the left variation display area 610A and the right variation display area 610B. Therefore, it is possible to effectively secure an effect area for performing an effect other than the variation display, and it becomes easy to visually recognize each variation display of the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c.
The interest of the game is improved.

[Reference table]
The table of FIG. 102A is, for example, the steps B2010 and B2013 of the variation effect setting process.
It is a reference table referred to by the effect control device 300 in the above. Such a reference table is a storage unit of the effect control device 300 (memory such as RAM 322 and FeRAM 323).
Is remembered in. The effect control device 300 sets the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decorative special symbol as a part of the variation effect with reference to the table of FIG. 102A. The table in FIG. 102A is
Corresponds to the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decorative special symbol of FIG. 100.

The effect control device 300 can determine whether or not there is a reach in the decorative special figure variation display game to be executed from the variation pattern type (B1904, B2001). When there is a reach, that is, when a reach occurs, as in the table of FIG. 102A, the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decorative special symbol before and after the reach is established are set. As a result, as shown in FIG. 100, the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b change from the vertical scroll before the reach is established to the temporary stop state when the reach is established, but the configuration mode including the numbers and characters does not change. Medium design 611
c changes from the rotation fluctuation before the reach is established to the vertical scroll when the reach is established, and also
The configuration mode changes from one containing only numbers to one containing numbers and characters.

In the present embodiment, the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decoration special symbol do not change from the start of the decoration special figure variation display game to the reach establishment before the reach is established, but the configuration can be changed. That is, just before the reach is established, the configuration mode and the variation mode before the reach as shown in the table of FIG. 102A may be obtained.

When there is no reach, that is, when reach does not occur, as in the table of FIG. 102A, the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decoration special symbol are set so as not to change from the start to the end of the decoration special symbol variation display game. From the start to the end of the decorative special symbol variation display game, the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b are variablely displayed by vertical scrolling, and the middle symbol 611c is variablely displayed by rotation variation.

It is also possible that the effect control device 300 determines the variation mode of the decorative identification symbol by lottery. For example, if there is no reach, the middle symbol 611c is vertically scrolled with a high winning probability.
The rotation may be changed with a low winning probability (unlike FIG. 102A, the middle symbol 611c can also be vertically scrolled). On the contrary, when there is a reach, the middle symbol 611c may be vertically scrolled with a low winning probability and rotated with a high winning probability before the reach is established (unlike FIG. 102A).
The middle symbol 611c can also be vertically scrolled). In this way, at the start of the decorative special figure variation display game, the expected degree of reach and the expected degree of big hit can be notified by the rotation variation (variation mode) of the middle symbol 611c. That is, if there is a rotation fluctuation of the middle symbol 611c, the player can expect the occurrence of reach and eventually the occurrence of a big hit, and the interest of the game is improved.

Further, it is also possible to set the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decorative special symbol according to the game state such as the normal game state and the time reduction / probability change state (specific game state). For example, since it is difficult to understand even if the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decoration special symbol change in the time reduction / probability variation state where the fluctuation time is short, the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decoration special symbol are changed from the start to the end of the decoration special symbol variation display game. It may be set so as not to change. In addition, since many decorative special figure 2 variable display games occur in a short / probable state and the variable time is shortened, in the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, the decorative special figure variable display game is started regardless of the presence or absence of reach. It may be set so that the composition mode and the variation mode of the decoration special symbol do not change from to the end. That is, it may be set so that the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decoration special symbol change before and after the reach is established only in the decoration special figure 1 variation display game.

Further, the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decorative special symbol after the reach is established may be set according to the reach system (N reach, SP reach, etc.) known from the variation pattern type (B1904, B2001). By doing so, it is possible to notify the degree of expectation of a big hit depending on the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decorative special symbol.

FIG. 102B is a modification of the reference table corresponding to FIG. 101. According to this reference table, as shown in FIG. 101, the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b change from the rotation fluctuation before the reach is established to the temporary stop state when the reach is established, and the configuration mode is changed from the one containing only the numbers to the numbers. And change to include characters. When the reach is established, the middle symbol 611c changes from the vertical scroll before the reach is established to the rotation fluctuation, and the configuration mode changes from the one including the numbers and the characters to the one containing only the numbers. When there is no reach (when no reach occurs), as in the table of FIG. 102B, the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decoration special symbol are set so as not to change from the start to the end of the decoration special symbol variation display game.

In FIGS. 102A and 102B, the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 61 before the reach is established.
One of the configuration modes and the variation mode of 1b may be the same as that of the medium symbol 611c. In this case, on the display screen before the reach is established, the area other than the variable display area 610 is further expanded.

〔Screen transition〕
103A and 103B are screen transition diagrams showing the display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order with respect to the eleventh embodiment.

FIG. 103A (c) is a display screen when starting a decorative special figure variation display game. As a result of stopping the previous decorative special symbol variation display game, the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c are displayed in the variation display area 610. In addition, the three small symbols that have stopped coming off are displayed in the small variation display area 615. Then, the hold display 633 displayed corresponding to the hold (here, the first start storage) is moved to the right side (hold shift), and the hold display 633 at the right end of the hold display unit 630 is placed in the hold digestion area 640 of the rectangular frame. Moves (hold shift). Further, in the special figure 1 hold number display 650, the special figure 1 hold (
The number of the first start storage) changes from "3" to "2", and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 displays the current number "0" of the special figure 2 hold (second start memory).

(C) of FIG. 103A is the same as (A1) of FIG. 100, but the fluctuations of the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c as the decorative special symbol (large symbol) are variable.
It is being executed at 0, and the variation of the small symbol as the decorative reduced symbol is being executed in the variation display area 615. The left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b are larger in size than the stop symbol, which is the stop result of the decorative special symbol variation display game in which the reach of (c1) occurred, and are changed by vertical scrolling (configuration). The aspect does not change). Further, the middle symbol 611c is a configuration mode (character image 6) of the stop symbol which is a stop result of the decorative special figure variation display game in which the reach of (c) 1 has occurred.
It changes from (consisting of 12c and a character image 613c), and changes in rotation in a configuration mode consisting of only a character image 613c showing a number.

(C) As shown in (c) and (c), after the fluctuation display continues, reach occurs as shown in (c) of FIG. 103A, and the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b are temporarily stopped (sway fluctuation). With
The configuration mode and variation mode of the middle symbol 611c change. In addition, (c) of FIG. 103A is shown in FIG.
It is the same as (A2) of 00, and detailed description is omitted.

Then, as shown in (c), after the reach fluctuation continues, as shown in (c7), the left symbol 61.
In addition to 1a and the right symbol 611b, the middle symbol 611c is also temporarily stopped (sway fluctuation), and the three symbols are temporarily stopped (sway fluctuation). After that, as shown in (c), the three symbols are completely stopped and the off-stop symbols are displayed.

In addition, in the detached stop symbol of (c) 8, the size of the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b is enlarged from the decorative symbol at the time of temporary stop (sway fluctuation) of (c7). In addition, medium symbol 6
11c changes from the configuration mode (composed of the character image 612c and the character image 613c) at the time of the temporary stop (sway fluctuation) of (c) 7 and changes to the configuration mode consisting of only the character image 613c showing the numbers.

After that, in (c9), the decorative special figure variation display game is executed again. and,(
Since reach does not occur after the decorative special symbol variation display game continues as in c. 10), the configuration mode and variation mode of the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c change in (c 11). No, the off-stop symbol is displayed.

As described above, the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decorative special symbol have been described, but when the pseudo continuous effect is executed, every time the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b are temporarily stopped even before the reach is established. In addition, the configuration mode and the variation mode of the middle symbol 611c may be changed. In addition, the pseudo continuous effect is a pseudo-variation (sub-variation) in which the decorative special symbol that is variablely displayed is temporarily stopped (pseudo-stop) between the start and the end of one special figure variation display game. Is a production that is continuously performed a predetermined number of times. At the time of temporary stop, the pseudo-continuous symbol suggesting the pseudo continuous effect may be stopped and displayed as the middle symbol 611c.

Further, the configuration mode of the decorative special pattern is not only a mode consisting of only a character image or a character image and a character image, but also a mode consisting of a character image and a frame image surrounding the character image, and a character image and a character image. It may include an aspect consisting of a frame image (a character image and an image surrounding a character image). Further, it is possible to use another image such as a frame image instead of the character image.

[Action / effect of the eleventh embodiment]
According to the eleventh embodiment, the gaming machine 10 has the first identification information (for example, the left symbol 611a).
The second identification information (for example, the right symbol 611b) and the third identification information (for example, the middle symbol 611).
The display device 41 is provided with an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying a variable display game for variable display of c) on the display device 41. The effect control means can display the first identification information or the second identification information of the configuration mode including the component indicating a character (character image) and the component indicating a number (character image) on the display device 41. .. The effect control means, together with the first identification information and the second identification information, provides the third identification information of the configuration mode including the component indicating the number (character image) and not including the component indicating the character (character image). , Can be displayed on the display device 41.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the third identification information (for example, the middle symbol 611c) has a configuration mode including a component indicating a number (character image) and not including a component indicating a character (character image). On the display screen of the display device 41, an area other than the variable display area 610 for displaying each identification information is expanded. Therefore, in this expanded area, it is possible to effectively secure an effect area for performing an effect other than the variable display, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, since the third identification information (for example, the middle symbol 611c) is composed only of character images showing numbers and is small, the first identification information (for example, the left symbol 611a) and the second identification information (for example, the right symbol 611b) , And the third
Identification information (for example, middle symbol 611c) can be displayed without overlapping with each other, and the player can display.
It becomes easier to visually recognize the variable display of each identification information, and the fun of the game is improved. Therefore, in order to make the player recognize a character such as a character which is a motif of the effect of the gaming machine 10, the character image is used as the first identification information (for example, the left symbol 611a) or the second identification information (for example, the right symbol 61).
Even if it is included in the configuration of 1b), the variable display game can be reliably executed on the display device 41.

Further, according to the eleventh embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) changes and displays the configuration mode of the third identification information (for example, the middle symbol 611c) when the reach is established for the variable display game. It can be displayed on the device 41. Therefore, it is possible to surprise the player and enhance the interest of the game. Further, since the player pays attention to the third identification information changed to the new configuration mode, it becomes easier to understand the progress of the game such as the establishment of reach.

Further, according to the eleventh embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) has a third identification information (for example, the middle symbol 61) as a variation mode before the reach is established for the variation display game.
The variation mode of 1c) is different from that of the first identification information (for example, the left symbol 611a) and the second identification information (for example, the right symbol 611b). Further, the effect control means (effect control device 300).
) Temporarily suspends the first identification information and the second identification information when the reach is established for the variable display game, and changes the variation mode of the third identification information to the first identification information and the second identification information. Corresponds to the fluctuation mode before the temporary stop.

Therefore, before the reach is established, the direction of the variation display of the third identification information (for example, the middle symbol 611c) is the first identification information (for example, the left symbol 611a) and the second identification information (for example, the right symbol 6).
The discomfort of the player due to the difference from the direction of the variation display in 11b) is reduced when the reach is established. Further, by changing the direction of the variable display of the third identification information (for example, the middle symbol 611c), it is possible to surprise the player and enhance the interest of the game.

[12th Embodiment]
A twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 108. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to eleventh embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to eleventh embodiments, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate.

The twelfth embodiment relates to a hitting method notification for notifying a player to recommend (or instruct, guide, or notify) a specific hitting method such as left-handed or right-handed. As described above, the striking method is a launching mode of the ball launching device, and corresponds to a region in the gaming region 32 where it is recommended to launch and flow down the gaming ball. In particular, for hitting method notifications that notify information on how to hit
Right-handed instruction display 657, 658 or left-handed instruction display 6 displayed on the display screen of the display device 41.
A hitting instruction display such as 59, or a mode display that indirectly recommends a specific hitting method to the player 64
5 and the like are included.

Of the hitting method notifications, the right-handed hitting notification recommends to the player that the game ball is fired in the right area (first game area), which is the area on the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32. Of the hitting method notifications, the left-handed hitting notification (normal hitting notification) is the center case 40 in the game area 32.
It is recommended to the player to launch the game ball into the left area (second game area), which is the area on the left side of the game.

In the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state, it is recommended to launch the game ball to the left area of the game area 32, and the player is notified of the left-handed information for recommending the left-handed. also,
In a special gaming state (big hit state, small hit state) that is more advantageous to the player than in the normal gaming state, and in a specific gaming state (time saving state or probable change state), the game ball is fired in the right area of the game area 32. Is recommended, and right-handed information for recommending right-handed is notified to the player.

[Main processing (effect control device)]
The main process according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the main process executed by the effect control device 300. Figure 1
The main process of 04 is a process in which step B0014a is added to the main process of FIG. The same process as in FIG. 36 is assigned the same step number and the description thereof will be omitted.

In step B0014a, a hitting method notification process for notifying the player of the hitting method such as left-handed or right-handed is executed based on the game state determined from the command received in the received command check process of step B0014.

[How to hit]
FIG. 105 shows a striking method notification process (B0014a) in the above-mentioned main process (FIG. 104).
) Will be described in detail. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the striking method notification process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the current gaming state is a special gaming state (big hit state or the like) or a time saving / probability change state (specific gaming state) (B3501). When the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (the result of B3501 is "N"), the striking method notification process is terminated.

In addition, the effect control device 300 has information on the most recently received hit system command, information on the most recently received symbol system command (special symbol type of B1801 and symbol type of B1802), and the number of continuations of the probability change state (for example, 50 times). The current game state is the normal game state or the special game state (until the next time), the number of times the time saving state is continued (for example, 70 times), the number of times the special figure fluctuation display game is executed after the big hit ends, the probability information (B1313), etc. It is possible to determine whether it is a jackpot state, etc.), a probability change state, or a time saving state. From the symbol type of B1802, it can be seen whether it is a probabilistic big hit that becomes a probable change state after the end of the big hit or a normal big hit that becomes a time-saving state after the end of the big hit. Further, the current game state can be determined from the stop symbol pattern, the effect mode (B1318) corresponding to the probability state, and the like.

When the current game state is a special game state (big hit state, etc.) or a time saving / probability change state (specific game state) (the result of B3501 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 serves as a hitting method notification. , The right-handed instruction display 657 (first display) in the normal mode of the hitting instruction display is set to be displayed on the display device 41 (B3502). Next, it is determined whether or not it is currently after a predetermined timing (B3503). When it is not after the predetermined timing (the result of B3503 is "
N "), the hitting method notification process is terminated.

Here, the predetermined timing is at the start of the jackpot ending, at the start of the time saving / probability change state,
Or, it is the timing in the middle of the time saving / probability change state. The start of the jackpot ending is when the ending command is received (B2111). The start of the time saving / probability change state is when the variable command (variable command) is received for the first time after receiving the ending command (B1206). In this embodiment, either the time saving state or the probable change state always occurs after the end of the big hit state. The timing in the middle of the time reduction / probability change state is, for example, when a variable system command (variable command) is received only a predetermined time (for example, 10 times) after the start of the time reduction / probability change state.

On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 is currently after a predetermined timing (the result of B3503 is "Y"), the mode display (second display) corresponding to the current gaming state is used as a striking method notification.
Is set to be displayed on the display device 41 (B3504), and the striking method notification process is terminated. The mode of the mode display may correspond to the effect mode that reflects the probability change state.

The right-handed instruction display 657 (first display) is used as a right-handed notification that the player is recommended to launch the game ball into the right area (first game area) of the game area 32 by such a hitting method notification process. The mode display (second display) can be displayed on the display device 41. If the current gaming state that can be seen from the mode display is a time saving / probability change state (specific gaming state), the player can recognize that the player should hit right, so that the mode display is also a right-handed notification. Therefore, right-handed instruction display 6
Both the 57 (first display) and the mode display (second display) can reliably execute the right-handed notification.

By the processing of steps B3501 and B3502, the right-handed instruction display 657 will be continuously displayed in the special gaming state and the time reduction / probability change state (specific gaming state) that shifts after the special gaming state. Therefore, the right-handed instruction display 657 can continuously execute the right-handed notification for the required period (special game state and the time reduction / probability change state), and the player overlooks the right-handed notification. There is no.

Further, by the processing of steps B3503 and B3504, the mode display (second display) is changed.
It will be displayed after a predetermined timing (at the end of the special gaming state, at the start of the specific gaming state, or in the middle of the specific gaming state). By displaying the mode display,
Since the player can grasp the probability change state and the normal electric support state and can also recognize that the game ball is launched in the right area, the interest of the game is enhanced. Further, if the predetermined timing is the end of the special gaming state or the start of the time reduction / probability change state, the mode display can be displayed in an appropriate period. In addition, if the predetermined timing is in the middle of the time reduction / probability change state, the mode display can be displayed without being disturbed by other effects, avoiding the ending effect at the end of the special game state and the effect at the start of the specific game state. Can be displayed.

[Single-shot command processing]
The one-shot command process (B1212) according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing a procedure of one-shot command processing executed by the effect control device 300 in the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 38). The one-shot command process of FIG. 106 is obtained by adding steps B1333 and B1334 to the one-shot command process of FIG. 39. The same process as in FIG. 39 is assigned the same step number and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the effect control device 300, when the MODE unit does not represent a command to stop the symbol (B13).
The result of 29 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the MODE section represents a striking instruction command (B1).
333). The striking instruction command is a right-handed instruction notification command (A2705) or a left-handed instruction notification command (A7703). If the MODE section does not represent a command to indicate how to type (the result of B1333 is "N"), the single-shot command processing is terminated.

When the MODE unit represents a striking instruction command (the result of B1333 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 executes a striking instruction receiving process (B1334), which is a process when the striking instruction command is received. ), Ends single-shot command processing.

[Processing when receiving instructions on how to hit]
FIG. 107 describes in detail the process (B1334) at the time of receiving a striking instruction in the above-mentioned single-shot command process (FIG. 106). FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the striking method notification process executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the command of the MODE unit is a normal command (B3701). When the command of the MODE part is not a normal command (B370)
The result of 1 is "N"), and the processing at the time of receiving the striking instruction is completed.

In the effect control device 300, when the command of the MODE section is a normal command (B370).
The result of 1 is "Y"), and it is determined whether or not the right-handed instruction notification command is received among the hitting instruction commands, that is, whether or not the received hitting instruction command is a right-handed instruction notification command ( B3702). When a right-handed instruction notification command is received (the result of B3702 is "Y"".
), The right-handed instruction display 658 (first display) of the special aspect is displayed and set (B3703), and the processing at the time of receiving the right-handed instruction is terminated.

When the left-handed instruction notification command is received among the hitting instruction commands (the result of B3702 is "N"), the left-handed instruction display 659 (third display) of the hitting instruction display is set as the hitting method notification. (B3704), and the processing at the time of receiving the hitting instruction is terminated.

〔Screen transition〕
FIGS. 108A to 108C are screen transition diagrams illustrating the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order with respect to the twelfth embodiment.

FIG. 108A (d1) is a display screen during execution of the decorative special figure variation display game in the variation display area 610. Here, the special figure variable display game is a special figure 1 variable display game. The variable hold display 633a indicating the hold related to the special figure change display game being executed is displayed in the hold digestion area 640. Further, one hold display 633 is displayed on the hold display unit 630a corresponding to the hold (here, the first start storage) related to the special figure variation display game before execution. The hold display unit 630a displays the hold display 633 (start memory display) corresponding to the first start memory. Further, the special figure 1 hold number display 650 is the number "1" of the current special figure 1 hold (first start storage).
Is displayed, and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 displays the number “0” of the current special figure 2 hold (second start storage).

After that, in (d2), the decorative special figure variation display game is completed, and the big hit stop symbol "3, 3, 3" corresponding to the big hit result is derived. Here, the variable pending display 633a is erased.

Then, in (d3), the big hit fanfare effect is executed, "Congratulations on the big hit !!" is displayed in the center of the display screen, and the big hit stop symbol "3, 3, 3" moves to the upper left corner. It is displayed small. The jackpot stop symbol here will be described below, assuming that it is a 6R probability variation jackpot symbol. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the jackpot state (special gaming state) starts from the time when the effect control device 300 receives the jackpot fanfare command and starts the jackpot fanfare effect.

Further, in (d3), the right-handed instruction display 657 (first display) in the normal mode is displayed in the upper right corner of the display device 41 by the process of step B3502 of the hitting method notification process (FIG. 105). In the right-handed instruction display 657 of the normal mode, a character image 657a "right-handed" (character display) showing characters and a graphic image 657b "⇒" (graphic display) showing an arrow figure (or symbol) are displayed together. It is a thing. In the big hit state (special game state), it is advantageous to launch the game ball into the right area of the game area 32 where the special variable winning device 39 exists. Therefore, it is recommended (instruction, guidance) that the player launches the game ball into the right area (first game area) by the right-handed instruction display 657 of the hitting method notification.

The entire image of the right-handed instruction display 657 is a combination of the character image 657a and the graphic image 657b, and is stored in the image ROM 325 of the effect control device 300. Alternatively, when displaying the right-handed instruction display 657, the character image 657 stored in the image ROM 325
A and the graphic image 657b may be combined and displayed as a right-handed instruction display 657.

Subsequently, in (d4) and (d5), the jackpot round starts, and the jackpot round effect is executed from the first round to the sixth round. Here, the jackpot is a 6R probability variation jackpot, and the jackpot round is up to 6 rounds, but the right-handed instruction display 657 is continuously displayed from the 1st round to the 6th round.

After that, in (d6), the jackpot ending effect is executed. Here, too, the right-handed instruction display 657 in the normal mode consisting of the character image 657a "right-handed" showing the characters and the graphic image 657b "⇒" showing the figure of the arrow is continuously displayed.

Next, in (d7) of FIG. 108B, the probabilistic state starts in the time saving / probable change state. Here, too, the right-handed instruction display 657 in the normal mode is continuously displayed (B3502). Probability change state (
In the high probability state), since the Fuden support is executed, it is advantageous to let the Fuzu start gate 34 pass the game ball to execute the Fuzu fluctuation display game. Therefore, it is advantageous to launch the game ball into the right area of the game area 32 where the normal start gate 34 exists. Therefore,
The player is recommended (instructed, guided) to shoot a game ball into the right area (first game area) by the right-handed instruction display 657 of the hitting instruction display.

Further, in (d7), since it is a predetermined timing (here, at the start of the specific game state), the probability change state (probability) which is the current game state is obtained by the process of step B3504 of the striking method notification process (FIG. 105). The mode display 645 "entering the probability fluctuation mode !!" (second display, character image) indicating the fluctuation state) is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen together with the right-handed instruction display 657. The mode display 645 may be simply a character image "probability fluctuation mode".

Further, in (d7), one hold display 633 is displayed on the hold display unit 630b corresponding to the hold (here, the second start storage) related to the special figure variation display game before execution. Hold display unit 6
30b displays a hold display 633 (start memory display) corresponding to the second start memory. Further, the special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the number "0" of the current special figure 1 hold (first start storage).
The special figure 2 hold number display 660 displays the number "1" of the current special figure 2 hold (second start storage).

After that, in (d8), the hold shift is executed, the decorative special figure change display game is started, and the change hold display 633a indicating the hold related to the running special figure change display game is set in the hold digestion area 640. It is displayed. Here, the special figure variation display game is a special figure 2 variation display game. In addition, the mode display 645 "probability fluctuation mode" (second display) indicating the probability change state is displayed small at the position of the upper left corner of the display screen together with the right-handed instruction display 657, and the probability change state (second display) is displayed.
The form changes from the start of the specific game state). The mode display 645 recommends (instructs) the player to hit right by indicating that the state is in a probable change state. Right-handed instruction display 65 in normal mode
7 is displayed on the front side (upper layer) in preference to the decoration special symbol of the decoration special figure variation display game.

Next, in (d9), although the right-handed instruction display 657 recommends right-handed, the player is left-handed. Therefore, the right-handed instruction notification command (A2705) from the game control device 100 is issued by the effect control device 300 due to the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 (second predetermined area) flowing down the left area. Received at (B133 in FIG. 106)
4). Then, by the process of step B3703 of the process at the time of receiving the striking instruction (FIG. 107), the right striking instruction display 658 (first display) of the special aspect is displayed at the center position of the display screen for a predetermined period. The right-handed instruction display 658 of the special aspect is displayed on the front side (upper layer) in preference to the decorative special symbol of the decorative special figure variation display game.

The entire image of the right-handed instruction display 658 is a combination of a character image 658a "right-handed" showing characters and a graphic image 658b "⇒" showing an arrow figure (or symbol), and is an image of the effect control device 300. It is stored in ROM 325. Alternatively, when displaying the right-handed instruction display 658, the character image 658a stored in the image ROM 325 and the graphic image 658b may be combined and displayed as the right-handed instruction display 658.

In the present embodiment, the right-handed instruction display 658 of the special aspect has a shape similar to the right-handed instruction display 657 of the normal aspect and differs only in size, but is not limited to the right-handed instruction display 657 of the normal aspect. It may have a different shape. In addition, a special aspect of right-handed instruction display 658
May have the same shape as the right-handed instruction display 657 of the normal aspect, but differ only in color.

If the player is left-handed even though right-handedness is recommended (instructed), the player is strongly recommended (instructed) to right-handed by the right-handed instruction display 658 of a special aspect. .. Therefore, the right-handed instruction display 658 of the special aspect is the right-handed instruction display 657 of the normal aspect.
It is displayed larger and more prominently. Further, the right-handed instruction display 657 (first image) in the normal mode and the right-handed instruction display 658 in the special mode larger than the right-handed instruction display 657 in the normal mode are used.
Both (second image) allow the player to strongly recommend (instruct) right-handed strikes.

Further, in (d9), there is no change in the mode display 645 "probability fluctuation mode" indicating the probability change state. In addition, there is no change in the display mode (display position and form) of the right-handed instruction display 657, and both the character image 657a "right-handed" showing characters and the graphic image 657b "⇒" showing the figure of the arrow are the same upper right. It is continuously displayed at the position of the corner of. However, a special aspect of right-handed instruction display 65
Under predetermined conditions (predetermined case) such that 8 is displayed, the right-handed instruction display 657 in the normal mode is displayed.
May display only the graphic image 657b "⇒" showing the figure of the arrow on the display screen so as not to get in the way or to secure the area of the effect of the display screen.

Next, in (d10), the right-handed instruction display 658 of the special aspect is displayed at the center position of the display screen for a predetermined period and then erased. In addition, here, the normal variable winning device 37 (
A hold (second start memory) is generated by winning a prize in the second start winning opening), and a hold display 633 corresponding to this hold is generated, but a hold change notice (look-ahead effect) is executed for the hold display 633. The hold display 633b is displayed, which is changed from the normal mode (for example, white) to the suggestion mode (for example, green) suggesting that the expectation of the big hit is high. In addition, the pending change notice is
When the expectation of the big hit of the special figure variation display game related to the hold is high, the command is executed by the process of step B1716 of the look-ahead variation command process (FIG. 41).

Further, in (d10), in response to the high expectation (reliability) of the hold changing to the suggestion mode, the effect control device 300 has the display mode (shape and shape) of the mode display 645 “probability fluctuation mode”. The size, color) is changed from the normal mode to the special mode, but the display mode (display position and form) of the right-handed instruction display 657 is maintained. In this way, the mode display 6 depends on the expectation of the big hit.
Since 45 changes, the fun of the game increases.

Instead of the expected degree of hold, the display mode of the mode display 645 "probability fluctuation mode" may be changed in response to the high expectation of the jackpot of the special figure variation display game currently being executed.

Subsequently, in (d11), SP reach is generated and the SP reach effect (predetermined effect) is executed at the center position of the screen. Mode display 6 to secure the production display area for SP reach production
45 "Probability fluctuation mode" is hidden. As a result, the SP reach effect can be executed in a wide area of the display screen, which enhances the fun of the game.

After that, by executing the special figure variation display game several times, in (d12), the special figure variation display game was executed for the number of continuations of the probabilistic state (for example, 50 times) from the start of the probabilistic state. , The probability change state ends, and "Probability fluctuation mode end" is displayed. In this example,
The gaming machine 10 is an ST machine.

As described above, through the special game state and the subsequent time saving / probability change state (specific game state).
There is no change in the display mode (display position and form) of the right-handed instruction display 657 (first display), and the display is always continuously displayed in a constant display mode. On the other hand, the mode display 645 (second display) that recommends the player to hit right by indicating that it is in a probable change state may change the display mode depending on the situation as in (d7) and (d10). , (D11) may be switched to a non-display state and displayed intermittently.

In addition, through the special game state and the subsequent time reduction / probability change state, the right-handed instruction display 657 is displayed.
It does not have to be a constant display mode at all times, and may be gradually dimmed or the display position may change with the passage of time. Further, in order to prevent the player from stopping the game and taking a break in the time saving / probability change state, the mode display 645 (second display) is performed when both the hold display 633 and the changing hold display 633a disappear. You can also urge them to play the game by blinking.

After that, in (d13) of FIG. 108C, the normal gaming state starts instead of the probabilistic state.
The recommended way of hitting changes from right-handed to left-handed. At the start of the normal game state, the game control device 100 may transmit a left-handed instruction notification command. When the effect control device 300 receives the left-handed instruction notification command (B1334 in FIG. 106), the effect control device 300 processes when receiving the hitting instruction (FIG. 10).
By the process of step B3704 of 7), the left-handed instruction display 65 as the way-of-striking instruction display
9 is displayed at the center position of the display screen for a predetermined period. The left-handed instruction display 659 (third display, third image) is larger than the right-handed instruction display 657 (first image) in the normal aspect, but the right-handed instruction display 658 (second image) in the special aspect. It is almost the same size as. Therefore, the left-handed instruction display 659 is displayed in a large and conspicuous manner. The left-handed instruction display 659 is displayed on the front side in preference to the decorative special symbol of the decorative special figure variation display game.

The entire image of the left-handed instruction display 659 is a combination of a character image 659a "left-handed" showing characters and a graphic image 659b showing an arrow figure (or symbol), and is an effect control device 30.
It is stored in the image ROM 325 of 0. Alternatively, when displaying the left-handed instruction display 659, the character image 659a and the graphic image 659b stored in the image ROM 325 are combined to form a composite image.
It may be displayed as a left-handed instruction display 659.

Further, in (d13), the hold display 6 corresponds to the hold related to the special figure fluctuation display game before execution.
One 33 is displayed on the hold display unit 630a. The hold display unit 630a displays the hold display 633 (start memory display) corresponding to the first start memory. The variable hold display 633a indicating the hold related to the special figure change display game being executed is displayed in the hold digestion area 640. Further, the special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the number "1" of the current special figure 1 hold (first start storage), and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 hold (second). The number "0" of the start memory) is displayed.

After that, in (d14), a decorative special figure variation display game is being executed.

Then, in (d15), the player is hitting right in spite of the normal gaming state in which left-handing is recommended. Then, due to the passage of the game ball to the normal drawing start gate 34 (first predetermined area) by flowing down the right area, the left-handed instruction notification command from the game control device 100 (
A7703) is received by the effect control device 300 (B1334 in FIG. 106). and,
By the process of step B3704 of the process at the time of receiving the striking instruction (FIG. 107), the left striking instruction display 659 is displayed at the center position of the display screen for a predetermined period. Here, too, the left-handed instruction display 659 (third display, third image) is the right-handed instruction display 657 (first image) in the normal mode.
Although it is larger than, it is substantially the same size as the right-handed instruction display 658 (second image) of the special aspect. Therefore, the right-handed instruction display 658 of the special aspect is displayed in a large and conspicuous manner.

Next, in (d16), the left-handed instruction display 659 (third display) displayed only for a predetermined period.
Has been erased.

In the screen transition described above, at the start of the jackpot state of (d3), the game control device 100 transmits a right-handed instruction notification command to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device is the same as in (d9). The 300 may display the right-handed instruction display 658 of a special aspect.

[Action / effect of the twelfth embodiment]
According to the twelfth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is a variable display game (variable display of identification information).
A production control means (effect control device 30) capable of displaying a decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41.
0) is provided. The gaming machine 10 can generate a normal gaming state, a special gaming state (for example, a big hit state) and a specific gaming state (time reduction / probability variation state) that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Further, the gaming machine 10 may launch a gaming ball in a first gaming area (right region of the gaming area 32) where it is recommended to launch a gaming ball in a special gaming state and a specific gaming state, and in a normal gaming state. It includes a recommended second gaming area (left region of gaming area 32). The effect control means is the first display as a display recommending the player to launch the game ball into the first game area.
The display (right-handed instruction display) and the second display (mode display) can be displayed on the display device 41.
The effect control means continuously displays the first display (right-handed instruction display) in the special gaming state and the specific gaming state that shifts after the special gaming state. The effect control means displays the second display (mode display) from the end of the special gaming state, from the start of the specific gaming state, or from the middle of the specific gaming state.

According to such a gaming machine 10, right-handed notification can be reliably executed by the first display (right-handed instruction display) and the second display (mode display), and at the end of the special gaming state, or at the end of the special gaming state.
The second display (mode display) can be displayed at the start of the specific gaming state or during an appropriate period after the middle of the specific gaming state. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the twelfth embodiment, the staging control means (staging control device 300) has a first image (right-handed instruction display 657 in a normal embodiment) and a second image (special) larger than the first image. The first display (right-handed instruction display) is displayed by the display device 41 according to the right-handed instruction display 658) of the embodiment.
It can be displayed in. Further, the effect control means displays a third display (left-handed instruction display) that recommends the player to launch the game ball into the second game area by the third image larger than the first image. It can be displayed on.

Therefore, both the first image (right-handed instruction display 657 in the normal aspect) and the second image larger than the first image (right-handed instruction display 658 in the special aspect) give the player a first gaming area (the right-handed instruction display 658).
It is strongly recommended (instructed) to the player to launch the game ball in the right area). In addition, the third display (
Left-handed instruction display) can be displayed on the display device 41 in a large and conspicuous manner.

Further, according to the twelfth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) flows down the first game area (right area) to the first predetermined area (normal drawing start gate 34) in the normal gaming state. When the ball has passed, the third display (left-handed instruction display) can be displayed on the display device 41. The effect control means (effect control device 300) has flowed down the second game area (left area) and the game ball has passed through the second predetermined area (starting winning opening 36) in the special game state or the specific game state. In this case, the first display (right-handed instruction display) can be displayed on the display device 41. Therefore,
When a game ball is launched toward a game area that is not recommended in the current game state among the first game area and the second game area, the first display (right-handed instruction display) or the third display (right-handed instruction display) or the third display (right-handed instruction display) as a warning.
Left-handed instruction display) can be displayed.

[13th Embodiment]
The thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 117. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to twelfth embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to twelfth embodiments, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate.

The thirteenth embodiment relates to a relentless notification effect of relentlessly notifying one piece of information. The relentless notification effect is a display device (display device 4) such as a display device 41 under the control of the effect control device 300.
It may be executed in a sub-display device other than 1). In the present embodiment, in particular, the hitting method information of the twelfth embodiment described above will be used as an example of one piece of information, and the hitting method notification effect for notifying the hitting method information will be described as an example of the relentless notification effect.

The striking method notification given as an example in the present embodiment is, in particular, a striking instruction display displayed when the player executes a striking method different from the recommended striking method ((D9) in FIG. 108B, FIG. 108C. ((
D) 15)) or a striking instruction display (see, for example, (d) 13) of FIG. 108B, which is displayed when the gaming state changes and the recommended striking method changes.

In the following, a relentless notification effect for notifying the right-handed information for recommending right-handedness will be described by using the right-handed instruction display 658, which is a special aspect of the right-handed instruction display. As described below,
The mode of relentless notification production is characterized by a plurality of parameters.

[Form of the image itself (first parameter)]
FIG. 109 is a diagram illustrating the form of the image itself of the right-handed instruction display 658 as the first parameter (first factor) that defines and characterizes the effect mode of the relentless notification effect by the right-handed instruction display 658. Here, the form includes a shape, a pattern, and a color. Depending on the form of the image itself as the first parameter, the player can be impressed with the image of the entire right-handed instruction display 658.

(A), (B), and (C) of FIG. 109 show an example of the image form of the right-handed instruction display 658, respectively. The shapes (A), (B), and (C) are particularly different, but the colors and patterns may be different. The effect control device 300 not only uses the image (any one of (A), (B), and (C)) of the right-handed instruction display 658 of a certain form stored in the image ROM 325, but also (A).
) (B) (C), a plurality of images of the right-handed instruction display 658 having different forms may be stored in the image ROM 325 and appropriately selected.

As shown in FIG. 109, the image of the right-handed instruction display 658 is composed of a character image 658a showing the character "right-handed", a graphic image 658b showing an arrow, and a frame image 658c showing a frame figure. The frame image 658c that conforms to the graphic image 658b in shape is the graphic image 658.
It touches the outer circumference of b and surrounds the graphic image 658b. Therefore, the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658
c is displayed as one. The frame image 658c is not limited to this, and the character image 658 is not limited to this.
It may have other shapes such as surrounding a and / or the graphic image 658b (FIG. 113, which will be described later).
See B1)-(B3)). The character image 658a, the graphic image 658b, and the frame image 6
58c may be referred to as a first image, a second image, and a third image, respectively.

The colors of the character image 658a, the graphic image 658b, and the frame image 658c are multiple colors (multiple colors).
However, a single color may be used, but in the present embodiment, a case of multiple colors is shown. In the case of multiple colors, each image is painted in multiple colors that vary from place to place. Further, the character image 658a, the graphic image 658b, and the frame image 658c may have a predetermined pattern.

[Color change (second parameter)]
FIG. 110 is a diagram illustrating an internal color change of the right-handed instruction display 658 as a second parameter (second factor) that defines and characterizes the effect mode of the relentless notification effect by the right-handed instruction display 658. Here, the color change is a change in color over time. By changing the color as the second parameter, the player can be impressed with the image of the entire right-handed instruction display 658.

The effect control device 300 can change the color inside the right-handed instruction display 658 on the display screen of the display device 41 with time, but as a moving image (movie, animation),
The color inside the right-handed instruction display 658 may be changed with time.

(A1) to (A3) of FIG. 110A are character images 6 among the images of the right-handed instruction display 658.
The time change of the color of 58a is shown, and the color of each part of the character image 658a changes as time passes, as in (A1) → (A2) → (A3). The inside of the character image 658a is painted in multiple colors (plural colors), and the blue region 661A indicated by vertical stripes, the green region 661B indicated by diagonal stripes, and the like.
There is a yellow region 661C indicated by a checkered stripe and a red region 661D indicated by a mesh-like stripe. The color areas are arranged in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction) of the display screen, but may be arranged in the vertical direction (vertical direction) or diagonal direction.

In (A1) of FIG. 110A, from the left, a blue region 661A, a green region 661B, and a yellow region 6
61C, the red region 661D is arranged, in (A2), the blue region 661A spreads in the center, and the green region 661B, the yellow region 661C, and the red region 661D are arranged toward the outside in the left-right direction, and in (A3), ( Contrary to A1), from the left, the red area 661D and the yellow area 661C.
, Green region 661B and blue region 661A are arranged.

(B1) to (B3) of FIG. 110A are graphic images 6 of the images of the right-handed instruction display 658.
The time change of the color of 58b is shown, and the color of each part of the graphic image 658b changes like (B1) → (B2) → (B3) with the passage of time. The inside of the graphic image 658b is painted with multiple colors (plural colors), and the blue region 661A indicated by vertical stripes, the green region 661B indicated by diagonal stripes, and the like.
There is a yellow region 661C indicated by a checkered stripe and a red region 661D indicated by a mesh-like stripe.

In (B1) of FIG. 110A, the red region 663D, the yellow region 663C, and the green region 6 are shown from the left.
63B, the blue region 663A is arranged, in (B2), the blue region 663A spreads in the center, and the green region 663B, the yellow region 663C, and the red region 663D are arranged toward the outside in the left-right direction, and in (B3), ( Contrary to B1), from the left, the blue area 663A and the green area 663B
, Yellow region 663C, red region 663D are arranged.

In FIG. 110A, the colors of the respective parts of the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b change with time in various manners. For example, in the left part (hand-biased part) of the character "hit" in the character image 658a, green → blue → yellow, and in the right part (“chome”) of the character “hit”, yellow → blue → green in time. Change.

It should be noted that, more simply, as shown in FIGS. 110B (A1) to (A3), the blue region 661A, the green region 661B, the yellow region 661C, and the red region 661D are moved to the right so as to flow, and the character image is displayed. Right-handed information may be notified depending on the direction in which the color of 658a flows. Similarly, as shown in FIGS. 110B (B1) to (B3), the red region 661D, the yellow region 661C, the green region 661B, and the blue region 661A are moved to the right so as to flow, and the graphic image is obtained. Right-handed information may be notified depending on the direction in which the color of 658b flows.

For convenience of illustration, in FIG. 110, the blue region 663A, the green region 663B, the yellow region 663C, and the red region 663D are arranged by being separated by a clear boundary, but as shown in FIG. 111, the color is a clear boundary. It may be changed gradually in the left-right direction (spatial) according to the color wheel. In addition, (A1) to (A3) and (B1) to (B3) in FIG. 111 are
Corresponds to (A1) to (A3) and (B1) to (B3) in FIG. 110, respectively.

FIG. 111 is an example in which the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b are arranged so that the colors gradually change in the left-right direction (spatial) according to the hue circle. In FIG. 111, a dark portion is a reddish color and a light portion is a bluish color. For example, in FIG. 111, an orange color appears between yellow and red, and a yellowish green color appears between green and yellow. In FIG. 111, (A1
) → (A2) → (A3), the color inside the character image 658a changes with time. Further, in FIG. 111, the color inside the graphic image 658b changes with time as shown in (B1) → (B2) → (B3).

Further, the time change of the colors (A1) to (A3) and (B1) to (B3) in FIGS. 110 and 111 is only an example, and is not limited to this. For example, when the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b are painted in a single color instead of multiple colors, the entire color (one color) of the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b is gradually changed with time according to the hue circle. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, the color of the frame image 658c does not change with time, but the character image 65.
Similar to 8a and the graphic image 658b, it may change with time. For example, the portion of the frame image 658c and the portion of the graphic image 658b that opposes (contacts) the frame image may change with different colors or the same color over time. Further, in the present embodiment, the color of the frame image 658c is a single color (for example, white), but it may be a plurality of colors.

[Display position change (third parameter, movement)]
FIG. 112 shows a change in the display position of the right-handed instruction display 658 on the display screen of the display device 41, that is, as a third parameter (third factor) that defines and characterizes the effect mode of the relentless notification effect by the right-handed instruction display 658. , Is a diagram illustrating the movement of the right-handed instruction display 658. Third
By changing (moving) the display position as a parameter, the player can be impressed with the image of the entire right-handed instruction display 658.

The effect control device 300 can change the display position of the right-handed instruction display 658 on the display screen of the display device 41 and move the right-handed instruction display 658. The effect control device 300 may move the right-handed instruction display 658 as a moving image (movie, animation).

In FIG. 112, the entire right-handed instruction display 658 including the character image 658a, the graphic image 658b, and the frame image 658c moves in the display screen of the display device 41, and the right-handed instruction display 6
The display position of 58 changes with time. The moving direction of the right-handed instruction display 658 is the right direction toward the right side in order to notify (instruct, recommend, guide) the right-handed hit.

It should be noted that the right-handed instruction display 658 of the character image 658a, the graphic image 658b, and the frame image 658c.
The arrangement (relative position) of each other in the inside is fixed even if the right-handed instruction display 658 moves. That is, the character image 658a, the graphic image 658b, and the frame image 658c move as one. In the right-handed instruction display 658, the character image 658a is an integrated graphic image 6
It is arranged on the right side of 58b and the frame image 658c. In order to improve the interest of the game, the arrangement (relative position) of the character image 658a, the graphic image 658b, and the frame image 658c in the right-handed instruction display 658 changes with time, and the right-handed instruction display 658 is displayed. A configuration that changes with movement is also possible.

First, in (e1) of FIG. 112, the character image 658a "right-handed" first appears on the display screen from the position at the left end and moves to the right. The right-handed information is impressed by the form (first parameter), color change (second parameter), and display position change (third parameter) of the character image 658a (first image) to the player. Be notified.

Next, in (e2), the integrally combined graphic image 658b (second image) and the frame image 65.
8c (third image) appears from the leftmost position and moves to the right. Right-handed information is impressed and notified to the player by the form, color change, and display position change of the image itself of the graphic image 658b. The right-handed information is impressed and notified to the player by the form of the image itself of the frame image 658c and the change in the display position. The color change of the frame image 658c may give an impression of right-handed information and notify the player.

If the right-handed information is notified to the player by the form, color change, and display position change of the image itself of the graphic image 658b (second image) or the frame image 658c (third image), the character information. In addition to the character image 658a as, the graphic image 658b and the frame image 65 that are integrally combined.
Right-handed information can be reliably notified by one arrow of 8c.

Next, in (e3), the character image 658a "right-handed" that has moved to the right reaches the position at the right end of the display screen and disappears from the display screen. After that, the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c that have moved to the right also reach the rightmost positions and disappear from the display screen.

Further, in (e1) to (e3), the effect control device 300 displays a right-handed instruction display 658.
The right-handed instruction display 665 for notifying the right-handed information independently of the relentless notification effect is displayed on the display device 41 at the same time as the relentless notification effect. The right-handed instruction display 665 (fourth image) notifies the player of right-handed information as one piece of information only by the form (first parameter) of the image itself. In FIG. 114, the right-handed instruction display 665 is a graphic image (fourth image) showing an arrow.
However, it may be a character image showing characters (for example, "right-handed").

Unlike the right-handed instruction display 658 (first right-handed instruction display), the right-handed instruction display 665 (second right-handed instruction display) has a fixed position where it is displayed without moving, and the color does not change. , The right-handed information is inconspicuously notified independently of the relentless notification effect by the plurality of parameters of the right-handed instruction display 658. Further, the right-handed instruction display 665 is a right-handed instruction display 6
It is smaller than 58, so it is not noticeable. The right-handed instruction display 665 continues in the special game state and / or in the time saving / probability change state (specific game state) that shifts after the special game state, as in the right-handed instruction display 657 of the normal aspect in the twelfth embodiment. It may be displayed as.
That is, since the right-handed instruction display 665 can be displayed not only at the same time as the right-handed instruction display 658 but also in a situation different from the right-handed instruction display 658, the right-handed instruction display 65
It can be displayed for a longer period of time than 8 and is smaller and less conspicuous than the right-handed instruction display 658. The right-handed instruction display 665 may be made in the same size as the right-handed instruction display 658 and may be displayed lightly to make it inconspicuous.

Further, in (e1) to (e3), an effect image 658d that can be moved with respect to the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c is added on the frame image 658c, and the effect image 658d will be described later.

[Effect addition (4th parameter, emphasis)]
FIG. 113 shows the right-handed instruction display 658 (here, the frame image 658c) as a fourth parameter (fourth factor) that defines and characterizes the effect mode of the relentless notification effect by the right-handed instruction display 658.
It is a figure exemplifying the addition of the effect image 658d to). By adding an effect (addition of the effect image 658d) as the fourth parameter, the right-handed instruction display 658 can be impressed on the player.

The effect control device 300 can move by changing the display position of the effect image 658d. The effect control device 300 may move the effect image 658d as a moving image (movie, animation).

As shown in FIGS. 113 (A1) to (A3), the effect image 658d is relative to the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c as shown in (A1) → (A2) → (A3) with the passage of time. By moving to the right, right-handed information is notified. Further, by moving the effect image 658d, the integrated arrow of the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c can be emphasized, and the right-handed information by the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c can be emphasized. The effect image 658d moves on the frame image 658c, and the frame image 658c
After moving to the right end of, the movement from the left end to the right may be started again.

Further, as another example of the effect image 658d, the effect image 65 is placed on the frame image 658c that surrounds the character image 658a with a gap as shown in FIGS. 113 (B1) to (B3).
8d may be moved to the right. The shape of the effect image 658d is not constant and may change over time. The effect image 658d becomes (B1) → (with the passage of time).
By moving to the right relative to the character image 658a and the frame image 658c as in B2) → (B3), the right-handed information is notified.

[Example of presence / absence of each parameter]
FIG. 114 is a diagram illustrating the presence / absence of each parameter (each factor) that defines and characterizes the effect mode of the notification effect by the right-handed instruction display. Each parameter (each factor) can impress the player with the notification effect.

As described above, the first by the right-handed instruction display 658 composed of a plurality of images of the first image (character image 658a), the second image (graphic image 658b), and the third image (frame image 658c).
The notification effect (that is, the relentless notification effect) is based on the first parameter (form of the image itself), the second parameter (color change), the third parameter (display position change), and the fourth parameter (effect addition) of each image. , Right-handed information for recommending right-handed can be relentlessly notified to the player. The first notification effect (that is, the relentless notification effect) is characterized by a plurality of parameters of at least two or more. On the other hand, in the second notification effect by the right-handed instruction display 665 consisting of only the fourth image (graphic image), the right-handed information is notified to the player only by the first parameter (the form of the image itself).

In the example of FIG. 114, as described above, the effect of the first image (character image 658a) and the second image (graphic image 658b) is characterized by the first parameter, the second parameter, and the third parameter. The effect of the third image (frame image 658c) is characterized by a first parameter, a third parameter, and a fourth parameter.

The effects of the first image and the second image may be characterized by the fourth parameter (addition of an effect), and the effect of the third image may be characterized by the second parameter (color change). good.

In another example of FIG. 115, the effect of the first image (character image 658a) is the first parameter, the second.
It is characterized by a parameter and a fourth parameter. Second image (graphic image 658
The effect of b) is characterized by a first parameter and a third parameter. The effect of the third image (frame image 658c) is characterized by a first parameter, a second parameter, a third parameter, and a fourth parameter. The first notification effect (that is, the relentless notification effect) is characterized by a plurality of parameters of at least two or more.

In addition to the first to fourth parameters shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the parameters that characterize the effect mode of the relentless notification effect include the addition of voice from the speaker (“Please hit right”” as the fifth parameter. Etc.), as the sixth parameter, the light emission of the light emitting member (LED of the board effect device 44) arranged on the right side of the game board 30, as the seventh parameter, the temporal change of the shade of each image, as the eighth parameter. , There may be a temporal change in the shape of each image (for example, a change in (A) → (B) → (C) in FIG. 109). In addition, the spatial change in color of each image itself or the spatial change in shade can be regarded as a parameter.

[Modified example of relentless notification production]
FIG. 116 is a screen transition diagram showing a modified example of the effect mode of the relentless notification effect by the right-handed instruction display 658. In FIG. 116, the colors of the respective parts of the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b may be changed with time in the same direction of the hue circle. For example, the colors of each part of the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b are in one direction of the color wheel (... red → blue → green → yellow → red → blue → green → ...
) May change over time.

In FIG. 116, the display screen of the display device 41 is divided into a blue region 41A, a green region 41B, a yellow region 41C, and a red region 41D in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction). Then, in the moving character image 658a and the graphic image 658b, the portion overlapping with the blue region 41A is made into a blue region 661A painted in blue, and the portion overlapping with the green region 41B is painted green region 661B.
The part that overlaps with the yellow area 41C is set to the yellow area 661C that is painted in yellow, and the red area 41D is set.
The part that overlaps with is made into a red region 661D that is painted in red. In this way, the character image 6
By moving the 58a and the graphic image 658b, the colors of each part of the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b are in one direction of the color wheel (... red → blue → green → yellow → red → blue → green → ...). It changes over time.

Further, the effect image 658d may always be displayed at the position of the center line in the vertical direction on the display screen. Even in this way, by moving the frame image 658c, the effect image 65
8d moves relative to the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c, and the graphic image 65
The right-handed information of 8b and the frame image 658c can be highlighted and displayed. However, since the effect image 658d itself moves to the left relative to the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c, the right-handed information cannot be notified.

[Left-handed instruction display]
In FIGS. 109 to 113, the mode of producing the relentless notification effect by the right-handed instruction display 658 has been described. However, as in the screen transition diagram of FIG. 117, the left-handed instruction display 659 is used as the left-handed instruction display 658. A relentless notification effect of hitting information may be executed.

In FIGS. 117 (Ki 1) to (Ki 3), a left-handed instruction including a plurality of images of a first image (character image 659a), a second image (graphic image 659b), and a third image (frame image 659c). The first notification effect (that is, the relentless notification effect) by the display 659 is the first parameter (form of the image itself), the second parameter (color change), the third parameter (display position change), and the fourth of each image.
By the parameter (addition of effect), the player can be relentlessly notified of the left-handed information for recommending the left-handed. On the other hand, the left-handed instruction display 66 consisting of only the fourth image (graphic image)
In the second notification effect according to 7, the player is notified of the left-handed information only by the first parameter (the form of the image itself).

Since the left-handed state (normal game state) is more disadvantageous to the player than the right-handed state (probability change state, etc.), the left-handed instruction display 659 is different from the right-handed instruction display 658. May be good. For example, the left-handed instruction display 659 may be different in color from the right-handed instruction display 658. The left-handed instruction display 659 may be changed spatially and temporally with a plain color such as gray, or may be made a single color so as not to be changed spatially and temporally (without the second parameter). Further, in the left-handed instruction display 659, the addition of the effect may be eliminated (fourth).
No parameters).

As described above, the relentless notification effect has been described, but the relentless notification effect of the present embodiment can also be applied to the case of notifying information other than the striking method. As notification of information other than how to hit, for example, notification of operation instruction of the effect button 25 and notification of temporary stop of decorative special symbol (notification of reach).
, Notification of the occurrence of a big hit (fanfare), notification of a round during a big hit, etc. The notification of the operation instruction of the effect button 25 is, for example, a notification by a character image such as "press the button" and a graphic image imitating the operation button. The notification of the temporary stop of the decorative special symbol is, for example, a notification by a character image of "reach". The notification of the occurrence of a big hit is, for example, a notification by a character image of "big hit". The round notification is a notification using a character image such as "1 round" or "3 rounds".

[Action / effect of the thirteenth embodiment]
According to the thirteenth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is a variable display game (variable display of identification information).
A production control means (effect control device 30) capable of displaying a decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41.
0) is provided. The effect control means includes a first image (for example, a character image 658a), a second image (for example, a graphic image 658b), and a third image (for example, a frame image 658c) characterized by at least the first parameter (for example, the form of the image itself). ) Is displayed on the display device 41 to relentlessly notify one piece of information (for example, right-handed information). At least one of the first image, the second image, and the third image is characterized by a second parameter (eg, color change) and a third parameter (eg, display position change) in addition to the first parameter. One information (for example, right-handed information) can be notified to the player by the first parameter, the second parameter, and the third parameter.

According to such a gaming machine 10, one information can be displayed (notified) on the display device 41 in an easy-to-understand manner and impressed by the player by the relentless notification effect using three images and three parameters. For example, even if one piece of information is displayed with priority on the front side (upper layer), a situation may occur in which it becomes difficult to see if the background is changed violently, but such a situation can be prevented. In addition, even for beginner players and players who do not speak a predetermined language (Japanese) as their mother tongue, one information can be displayed on the display device 41 in an easy-to-understand manner by a relentless notification effect using three images and three parameters. It can be displayed (notified) to give an impression. Also, 3
With one image and three parameters, the relentless notification effect becomes lively and the fun of the game is enhanced.

According to the thirteenth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) notifies the player of one piece of information by the first parameter, the second parameter, and the third parameter of the first image, and then the second. One information can be notified to the player by the first parameter, the second parameter, and the third parameter of the image or the third image. Therefore, it is possible to impress the relentless notification effect many times by the three parameters.

According to the thirteenth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) sets the fourth image (for example, the image of the right-handed instruction display 665) that notifies one information independently of the relentless notification effect as the relentless notification effect. At the same time, it can be displayed on the display device 41. The fourth image informs the player of one piece of information by the first parameter (for example, the form of the image itself). Therefore, by displaying the fourth image in addition to the relentless notification effect, one information can be displayed (notified) on the display device 41 in an easy-to-understand manner to impress the player. In addition, a special situation (for example, a situation in which right-handed is recommended in a gaming state) in which one piece of information (for example, right-handed information) is always notified by the fourth image and the need for notification is increased is increased. ) Only, it is possible to perform a relentless notification effect to emphasize and notify one piece of information (for example, right-handed information).

According to the thirteenth embodiment, at least one of the first image, the second image, and the third image is
It is characterized by a fourth parameter (eg, addition of an effect) in addition to the first parameter, the second parameter, and the third parameter. The effect control means can notify the player of one piece of information by the first parameter, the second parameter, the third parameter, and the fourth parameter. Therefore, it is possible to execute a relentless notification effect that emphasizes and notifies one piece of information, and at the same time, the relentless notification effect becomes more lively and the interest of the game is improved.

According to the thirteenth embodiment, the first parameter is the form of each image itself, the second parameter is the color change of each image, and the third parameter is the change of the display position of each image in the display device 41. The four parameters are the addition of effects. Therefore, the appearance of the relentless notification production itself becomes lively, and the interest of the game is improved.

The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea, and it is clear that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Is. For example, it is possible to combine a plurality of embodiments. Further, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of claims and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and content equivalent to the scope of claims.

10 Pachinko machine 12 Front frame (game frame)
25 Direction button 30 Game board 32 Game area 36 1st start winning opening (1st start winning area)
36b LED
37 Ordinary variable winning device (second starting winning area)
39 Special variable prize device 40 Center case 41 Display device 42 Setting change device 44 Board effect device 44c, 44d Internal accessory (movable body)
46 Board decoration device 50 Collective display device (LED)
51 1st special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 1 display)
52 2nd special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 2 display)
93 Setting key switch 95a External accessory (outside movable member)
102 Setting value change switch 143 Probability setting value display device 150 Driver 152 Status display device 153 LED driver 100 Game control device (main board)
200 Payout control device 300 Production control device (sub-board)
341 Error code 342 Error code 343 Character information 344 Underline 345 Notification information 400 Power supply device 510 Parts 513 Identification board 516 Parallel serial conversion unit 519 Wiring (electric wire)
630 Hold display 640 Hold digestion area 815 I2CI / O expander

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine provided with an effect control means capable of displaying a variable display game in which a first identification information, a second identification information, and a third identification information are variablely displayed on a display device.
The effect control means is
A first configuration mode in which each of the first identification information, the second identification information, and the third identification information is configured by including a predetermined component, and the first configuration mode. Can be displayed on the display device with the second configuration mode having a different configuration.
In the first section where at least the first identification information and the second identification information are being displayed in a variable manner in the variable display game, the display device is provided with the first identification information of the first configuration embodiment. In addition to displaying the second identification information of the first configuration embodiment, the first identification information and the second identification information in the section after the first section are temporarily stopped. In the second configuration mode , which is a configuration mode of the first identification information and the second identification information, which is displayed in the second section in which the third identification information is variablely displayed . A gaming machine characterized in that the identification information of 3 can be displayed .

Images